The most frequently asked questions about Epoxy Resin

How long can the EP Color Paste be left open without affecting the quality of the result?

chevronBottom

We recommend using EP Color Paste within 6 months after opening.
You can run a small test the open EP Color Paste with a small amount of epoxy resin before starting a large project or discarding the EP Color Paste.

How to calculate the amount of resin and hardener I need?
How to calculate the amount of epoxy I need?
How to know how much epoxy resin to buy?
How to know how much resin to buy?

chevronBottom

Use our calculator to determine the exact amount of resin and hardener of the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system you need based on your project dimensions. Just put the length, width, and height of your mold into the calculator for accurate results. The calculator is showing the amount of resin and hardener. For coating, we recommend a layer thickness of min. 1/16“with our ECO system.

What is the mixing ratio of the ECO, PRO, PRO+, Crystal clear, clear?

chevronBottom

The mixing ratio of our ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system is 2:1 (resin A-component : hardener b-component). 

Do you sell equipment for working with epoxy?
Do you sell tools for working with epoxy?
Do you sell accessories for epoxy?

chevronBottom

Yes, we offer a variety of equipment for working with epoxy of the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system, including mixing jugs, jerry cans, gloves, scales, sanding materials, release tape, separating spray, as well as, ready to use accessory kits.

Do you sell silicone molds or any kind of molds for epoxy work?

chevronBottom

No, we don’t sell silicone molds or any pre-made mold. However, if you're working on a larger project, such as creating a custom table, we offer everything you need to build your own mold, including release tape, silicone, and other essential tools. We also sell RTV silicone molding, which is a 2-part liquid silicone to make your own reusable mold.

What is the difference between ECO and PRO?
What is the difference between ECO and PRO+?

chevronBottom

The difference between the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system is that the PRO series (PRO, PRO+) is crystal clear, like water.
In addition, the PRO series is UV-stabilised, so it has an additional additive against yellowing and color-changes due to sunlight. ECO System is also clear but not crystal clear and it has no UV-stabilizer additives.

Our PRO serie is formulated with advanced UV inhibitors (this gives a light blue/purple tint to the A-component PRO), delivering the highest level of UV protection available on the market. In contrast, our ECO system is not UV-stabilized and is therefore best suited for applications involving darker colors. Please note that no epoxy resin is entirely UV-resistant, and slight yellowing may still occur over time.

What is the recommended working temperature with epoxy resin?

chevronBottom

We recommend working at 70°F when not exceeding the maximal pouring height or each resin of the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system.

The min. temperature when working with our epoxy resin of the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system is 60°F, this is also the recommended working temperature when working with our PRO+ System on thicker layers.

The working temperature doesn’t only mean the room temperature! It is important that the substrate, and the epoxy itself are also at the right temperature.

How can I prevent epoxy resin from sticking to a wooden mold?

chevronBottom

You need to line your wooden mold with our separating tape and then spray the surface with our separating agent spray before pouring epoxy resin ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system.

It is important to put the separating tape next to each other and not overlapping in your mold. Overlapping the separating tape in the mold, will result in irregularity on the surface and will be tedious to sand after curing of the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system.

Do I need both the release spray and the release tape?

chevronBottom

If you are pouring the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system in a silicone mold, the release spray is enough.
When making your own frame to pour the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system, for example for a river table, we recommend both the release tape and spray to facilitate unmolding of the ECO system, PRO system, or PRO+ system. Using only the separating tape is possible, but the resin of the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system will be hard to free from the frame. 

Why should I put the separating spray on my silicone mold?

chevronBottom

Putting the separating spray on the silicone mold is increasing the longevity of the silicone mold and easing the unmolding of the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system. When using our separating spray, it is important to wipe off the excess before pouring your epoxy resin of the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system.

Can I use a mold made of latex with epoxy resin?
Can I use a mold made of carbon fibre with epoxy resin?
Can I use a mold made of fibreglass with epoxy resin?

chevronBottom

Epoxy Resin of the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system sticks to everything except silicone and some plastic. Therefore, we recommend using silicone mold when working with epoxy resin of the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system. We do not recommend latex mold, fibreglass mold or carbon fibre molds as the epoxy resin from the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system will stick to it. 

How do you apply clear, Crystal clear, ECO, PRO, PRO+, epoxy resin?

chevronBottom

In general, epoxy resin of the ECO system (clear) and PRO (Crystal clear) series is applied by pouring the mixed resin onto the surface and spreading it evenly. You can use a brush, roller, or squeegee to distribute the epoxy resin of the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system across the surface. For edges or detailed areas, a brush is often the best tool for precision to apply the epoxy resin of the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system.
This is a general answer, as the exact method can vary depending on the type of project you're working on with our epoxy resin of the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system. (e.g., floors, countertops, molds, or artwork).

How do apply transparent epoxy resin on a floor?
How to I pour clear epoxy resin on a floor?
How to coat my countertop with clear epoxy resin?
How to use clear epoxy resin on a countertop?
How to coat something with ECO clear transparent?

chevronBottom

Instructions for Use TRANSPARENT CLEAR ECO System
We recommend using the clear resin ECO System to apply 2 layers. The first layer ECO System serves as a primer, use 1/4 of the resin ECO (A) and hardener ECO (B) component for this step.
Mix the resin ECO (A) with the hardener ECO (B) in a ratio of 2:1 (e.g., 64fl.oz. resin: 32fl.oz. hardener).
Ideally, transfer the mixture of ECO System to a clean mixing bucket and stir again. This will ensure that the resin ECO (A) and hardener ECO(B) are completely mixed together.
Pour the mixture ECO onto the substrate immediately after mixing, as the product can boil up in the mixing bucket.
Apply the ECO epoxy resin with foam roller over the entire substrate. 
Let the first layer ECO cure.
Mix the remaining 3/4 of the resin ECO (A) and hardener ECO (B) for the main coat.
Mix the resin ECO (A) with the hardener ECO (B) in a ratio of 2:1 (e.g., 64fl.oz. resin: 32fl.oz. hardener).
Ideally, transfer the ECO mixture to a clean mixing bucket and stir again. This will ensure that the resin ECO (A) and hardener ECO (B) are completely mixed together.
Pour the ECO mixture onto the substrate immediately after mixing, as the product can boil up in the mixing bucket.
Apply the ECO system with a squeegee or foam roller flooding the entire substrate. 
The main coating ECO can be walked on/touches after approx. 20 hours and ECO is completely chemically cured after approx. 7 days.
Info: Epoxy resin is sensitive to any kind of moisture during curing (risk of amine blush formation, i.e. white patches in the top layer). For this reason, we recommend that you avoid any contact between water and the epoxy ECO until it has cured completely (at least 7 days). For thin layers, cold temperatures (ambient, substrate, and resin temperatures below 70°F) and increased humidity, the time until the epoxy resin is fully cured may be extended.

Please ensure that your substrate is dry, stable, level, and free from dirt or separating agents before applying the epoxy. While it is possible to level the substrate using epoxy, please note that this will require more material than the standard recommended quantity.

Instructions for use metallic floor?
How to apply metallic epoxy on a countertop?

chevronBottom

Instructions for Use ECO System with 1 Metallic Color

Start with the Primer 1K

We recommend a room, substrate, and product temperature of approx. 70°F when working with our countertop and flooring ECO epoxy resin kit.
the substrate should be dust-free, clean, and even. Level out holes, unevenness, and slopes in advance with a suitable levelling compound before applying our countertop and flooring ECO epoxy resin kit.
Start with Primer 1k when it is supplied in our countertop and flooring ECO epoxy resin kit.
Mix the Primer 1k and pour it into a paint tray.
Roll the Primer 1k onto the desired surface with a paint roller.
Allow the primer 1k to dry (approx. 8-12 hours) before applying the ECO system.

Continue with the Main Coat with ECO System

Use our ECO epoxy resin system (resin + hardener) for the main coating of your metallic countertop/flooring.
Mix the resin (A) ECO with the hardener (B) ECO in a ratio of 2:1 (e.g., 64fl.oz. resin: 32fl.oz. hardener).
Ideally, transfer the resin-hardener ECO Sytem to a clean mixing bucket and stir again. This will ensure that the resin (A) and hardener (B) ECO System are completely mixed together.
Add the supplied metallic pigment to the resin/hardener mixture ECO system (1g of metallic pigment per 2fl.oz. of epoxy.70g (2.5oz) of pigment per gallon of epoxy ECO system).
Pour the colored ECO System onto the substrate immediately after mixing, as the product can boil up in the mixing bucket.
Apply the colored ECO system with a squeegee and foam roller flooding the entire substrate. 
The main coating ECO system can be walked on/touched after approx. 20 hours and ECO is completely chemically cured after approx. 7 days.
Info: Epoxy resin is sensitive to any kind of moisture during curing (risk of amine blush formation, i.e. white patches in the top layer). For this reason, we recommend that you avoid any contact between water and the epoxy until it has cured completely. For thin layers, cold temperatures (ambient, substrate, and resin temperatures below 70°F) and increased humidity, the time until the epoxy resin is fully cured may be extended.

How to coat a floor with epoxy using 2 colors?
Instructions for use countertop 2 colors?

chevronBottom

Instructions for Use ECO System with 2 Colors

Start with the Primer 1K

We recommend a room, substrate, and product temperature of approx. 70°F when working with our countertop and flooring ECO epoxy resin kit.
the substrate should be dust-free, clean, and even. Level out holes, unevenness, and slopes in advance with a suitable levelling compound before applying our countertop and flooring ECO epoxy resin kit.
Start with Primer 1k when it is supplied in our countertop and flooring ECO epoxy resin kit.
Mix the Primer 1k and pour it into a paint tray.
Roll the Primer 1k onto the desired surface with a paint roller.
Allow the primer 1k to dry (approx. 8-12 hours) before applying the ECO system.

Continue with the Main Coat with ECO System

Use our ECO epoxy resin system (resin + hardener) for the main coating of your flooring/countertop in multiple colors.
Divide the amount of resin (A) and hardener (B) proportionally between the two colors supplied in your flooring or countert set BEFORE MIXING! It is important to plan the amount for each color before mixing. 
Mix the resin (A) ECO with the hardener (B) ECO for the main color in a ratio of 2:1 (e.g., 64fl.oz. resin: 32fl.oz. hardener).
Ideally, transfer the mixed ECO system to a clean mixing bucket and stir again. This will ensure that the resin (A) and hardener (B) are completely mixed together.
Add the supplied MAIN COLOR to the resin/hardener ECO mixture.
Pour the colored ECO system onto the substrate immediately after mixing, as the product can boil up in the mixing bucket.
Apply the colored ECO system with a squeegee and foam roller flooding the entire floor. We recommend a layer thickness of 1/16“.
Now mix and apply the highlight color of your countertop of flooring ECO system set in the same way and work the color wet in wet into the base color as a highlight.
The main coating ECO system can be walked on after approx. 20 hours and ECO is completely chemically cured after approx. 7 days.
Info: Epoxy resin is sensitive to any kind of moisture during curing (risk of amine blush formation, i.e. white patches in the top layer). For this reason, we recommend that you avoid any contact between water and the epoxy until it has cured completely. For thin layers, cold temperatures (ambient, substrate, and resin temperatures below 70°F) and increased humidity, the time until the epoxy resin is fully cured may be extended.

Recommended quantity of color pigment/paste:
Metallic powder: 1g of pigment per 2fl.oz of epoxy.70g (2.5oz) of pigment per gallon of epoxy eco system.
RAL Solid Color Paste: 1g of dye per 3fl.oz of epoxy. 40g (1.5oz) of dye per gallon of epoxy eco system).

How to apply ECO RAL on a floor?
Instructions for use epoxy resin RAL on countertop?

chevronBottom

Instructions for Use ECO System with RAL EP Color Paste

Start with the Primer 1K

We recommend a room, substrate, and product temperature of approx. 70°F when working with our countertop and flooring ECO epoxy resin kit.
the substrate should be dust-free, clean, and even. Level out holes, unevenness, and slopes in advance with a suitable levelling compound before applying our countertop and flooring ECO epoxy resin kit.
Start with Primer 1k when it is supplied in our countertop and flooring ECO epoxy resin kit.
Mix the Primer 1k and pour it into a paint tray.
Roll the Primer 1k onto the desired surface with a paint roller.
Allow the primer 1k to dry (approx. 8-12 hours) before applying the ECO system.

Continue with the Main Coat with ECO System

Use our ECO epoxy resin system (resin + hardener) for the main coating of solid color set for countertop or flooring.
Mix the resin (A) ECO with the hardener (B) ECO in a ratio of 2:1 (e.g., 64fl.oz. resin: 32fl.oz. hardener).
Ideally, transfer the mixed ECO system to a clean mixing bucket and stir again. This will ensure that the resin (A) and hardener (B) ECO are completely mixed together.
Add the supplied RAL paste to the resin/hardener ECO mixture (1g of dye per 3fl.oz. of epoxy. 40g (1.5oz) of dye per gallon of epoxy eco system).
Pour the colored ECO System onto the substrate immediately after mixing, as the product can boil up in the mixing bucket.
Apply the colored ECO System with a squeegee and foam roller flooding the entire substrate. 
The main coating ECO system can be walked on/touched after approx. 20 hours and ECO is completely chemically cured after approx. 7 days.
Info: Epoxy resin is sensitive to any kind of moisture during curing (risk of amine blush formation, i.e. white patches in the top layer). For this reason, we recommend that you avoid any contact between water and the epoxy until it has cured completely. For thin layers, cold temperatures (ambient, substrate, and resin temperatures below 70°F) and increased humidity, the time until the epoxy resin is fully cured may be extended.

How to use your marble kit for floors?
Do you have the Instructions for use of the marble set for countertop?

chevronBottom

Instructions for use Marble Flooring / Marble Countertop

Start with the Primer 1K

We recommend a room, substrate, and product temperature of approx. 70°F when working with our countertop and flooring ECO epoxy resin kit.
the substrate should be dust-free, clean, and even. Level out holes, unevenness, and slopes in advance with a suitable levelling compound before applying our countertop and flooring ECO epoxy resin kit.
In the marble epoxy resin set with ECO System, the 1K Primer must be dyed. Dye the 1K PRIMER from the marble epoxy resin set with our supplied WB PIGMENT paste and mix well (add 100g (3.5oz) WB pigment to 0.33gal 1K Primer). It is very important to never add the WB PIGMENT in the epoxy resin from the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system.
Pour the colored primer 1k into a paint tray after mixing.
Roll the colored primer 1k onto the desired surface with a paint roller.
Allow the primer 1k to dry (approx. 8-12 hours).
Spray the desired marbling on the primed surface with the Marble Effect Spray and allow it to dry.

Continue with the Main Coat with ECO System

Use our ECO epoxy resin system (resin + hardener) for the main coating of your marble set.
Mix the resin (A) with the hardener (B) in a ratio of 2:1 (e.g., 64fl.oz. resin: 32fl.oz. hardener).
Ideally, transfer the resin-hardener mixture to a clean mixing bucket and stir again. This will ensure that the resin (A) and hardener (B) are completely mixed together.
Pour the resin-hardener mixture ECO system onto the substrate immediately after mixing, as the product can boil up in the mixing bucket.
The main coating of ECO System can be walked on/touched after approx. 20 hours and ECO is completely chemically cured after approx. 7 days.
Info: Epoxy resin is sensitive to any kind of moisture during curing (risk of amine blush formation, i.e. white patches in the top layer). For this reason, we recommend that you avoid any contact between water and the epoxy until it has cured completely. For thin layers, cold temperatures (ambient, substrate, and resin temperatures below 70°F) and increased humidity, the time until the epoxy resin is fully cured may be extended.

Can I use epoxy resin on underheating floor?
Can I use ECO on underheating floor?

chevronBottom

Our epoxy resin systems of the ECO and PRO systems can be safely applied over underfloor heating. We recommend activating the heating system after the resin of the ECO and PRO systems has fully cured and running it continuously for several days. This process enhances the chemical reaction of the ECO or PRO resin system, thereby accelerating its curing. Additionally, operating the heating at full capacity improves the resin's heat resistance and scratch resistance.

For optimal results, we suggest maintaining a surface curing period of 24 hours at 70°F with working on a floor with our ECO and PRO systems. Once the surface coated with our ECO or PRO system is no longer tacky, increase the temperature of the floor to 73-75°F for the following 6 days. This procedure will ensure excellent final hardness and durability of the floor coated with ECO or PRO system.

Do I need expansion joint on my epoxy floor?
What do I do with my expansion joint before applying epoxy resin for floor?

chevronBottom

As a general rule, expansion joints do not need to be added when applying epoxy resin ECO or PRO system. However, if expansion joints are already present in the substrate to be coated with ECO or PRO system, these should be left open in the resin. The expansion joints can be taped using our masking tape. Once the resin begins to gel (approximately 6 hours after application), the masking tape must be removed to prevent it from bonding with the epoxy resin.

It is crucial to ensure that the underlying structure of the floor is professionally completed prior to the application of the epoxy resin ECO or PRO series or microcement. Specifically, floating screeds should never be in direct contact with the walls to accommodate any potential expansion of the screed. We therefore recommend the installation of "edge insulation strips" during the initial floor construction using screed or levelling compound. During the epoxy resin ECO or PRO system application, it is essential to ensure that the edge joints remain unsealed.

Can I apply ECO, PRO, PRO+, crystal clear, Crystal clear epoxy to vertical surfaces or slopes?

chevronBottom

We do not recommend applying our epoxy resin of the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system to vertical surfaces or on slopes. Due to their low viscosity, the resin of the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system tends to run, resulting in streaks. While it is possible to apply the epoxy of the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system in multiple layers on slopes or vertical surface, this technique requires significant expertise and precision, which is why we do not recommend applying the epoxy resin of the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system on vertical surface or slopes.

It is possible to apply the epoxy resin of the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system to the panels horizontally and then mount the panels vertically. It would also be possible to unmount a door and apply epoxy of the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system before letting it cure and mount the door again after curing of the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system.

How can I do a bottle cap table?
How to cover bottle caps with epoxy resin?

chevronBottom

For your project, we recommend using the PRO system with a layer thickness up to 3/4“, or the PRO+ system with a layer thickness up to 2“. Both the PRO and PRO+ systems cure crystal clear and provide the highest protection against yellowing, thanks to their UV-resistant properties. We suggest pouring the resin PRO or PRO+ System to a level that fully covers the bottle caps (approximately 1/16“over the bottle cap).

To make the frame of your bottle cap table, we recommend using an aluminium strip, which can be coated with our release tape and release spray. Additionally, you will need accessories such as mixing cups, stirring sticks, and gloves for your bottle cap table.

We advise a processing temperature of 67-70°F with our PRO and PRO+ System for your bottle cap table. It is crucial to maintain this temperature range with our PRO and PRO+ system, as exceeding or falling below it may result in improper curing or boiling of the epoxy.

To secure the bottle caps, you can press them into the gelling 1st layer of epoxy or glue them beforehand. Please note that the bottle caps are hollow, which could allow air to be released into the resin. Therefore, we recommend filling the caps beforehand with, epoxy, acrylic, tile adhesive, or grout filler to avoid this issue.

Is ECO, PRO, PRO+, Crystal clear epoxy resin resistant to chemicals?

chevronBottom

Our epoxy resins of the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system are resistant to almost all chemicals after complete chemical curing. However, given the wide range of chemicals, we recommend conducting spot tests in advance to verify compatibility with our ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system. Please note that the resin of the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system might get matte when washed with harsh chemicals. It is possible to repolish matte resin of the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system any time after curing. Alternatively, you can apply our 2K PU Topcoat on top of epoxy resin to regive it a glossy finish.

Is your epoxy toxic?
Is your epoxy safe?
Is your resin food safe?
Can I use your epoxy to do serving plates?

chevronBottom

Epoxy resin is not classified as hazardous to health according to the GHS08 standard for REACH compliance and is non-toxic under the GHS06 standard. Our resins of the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system are solvent-free and odourless. However, we strongly recommend wearing an FFP2 mask and nitrile gloves during handling the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system. Once fully cured, our resin of the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system is safe for contact with food. Please note that cutting on the resin of the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system may result in micro-particles remaining on your utensils.

Our epoxy resins of the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system are resistant to most chemicals and acids, including those commonly found in food. However, it is possible that components of the cured ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system that are not intended for consumption could be dissolved by acids or similar substances.

Can I do aquarium decors with your resin?
Is the epoxy safe for my fish?

chevronBottom

Epoxy resin is not classified as hazardous to health according to the GHS08 standard for REACH compliance and is non-toxic under the GHS06 standard. You can use our epoxy resin from the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system to make some aquarium decors. Please wait until full chemical curing of the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system before putting the resin in your aquarium. We do not recommend building the aquarium itself out of resin of the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system. 

How to make a river table?
How to build a river table?
Do you have instructions to do a river table?

chevronBottom

Step 1: Preparation
Have all materials and tools ready and make sure that the epoxy resin of the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system is at room temperature and that the environment in which you are working is clean and the temperature is around 70°F before starting your river table.

Step 2: Build the mold of your river table
You start by making a mold in the desired dimensions of the epoxy resin table. For this you need four smooth wooden strips and a wooden plate as molded parts. Then you stick the tape on all parts. Make sure that the tape does not overlap. Glue silicone on the edges of the moldings and screw the parts together. Let the silicone cure. Then spray the mold evenly with our release agent spray and spread it with a cloth. Then place the wooden planks of the same height in the mold.

Step 3: Priming your river table
Before you start pouring your river table, you should brush the areas of your wooden planks that come into contact with the resin of the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system, as well as the space between the wooden plank where the river will be. with a thin layer of epoxy resin of the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system.
This prevents loss of material and the formation of bubbles. You can calculate which quantities of the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system you need with our quantity calculator or by telling me the dimension and height you wish to pour.
For the primer layer on your river table, we recommend a layer thickness of 1/16“ made with the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system. Weigh the resin and hardener of the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system in the correct ratio and mix the components with a stirrer. Then apply the primer layer of ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system laterally to the inner sides of the wooden planks of your river table with a brush. Pour the rest of the primer of the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system onto the substrate between the wooden planks of your river table. The primer layer between your river table planks with the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system should be 1/16“. This prevents air chambers and bubbles. Allow the primer layer made with the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system to cure before continuing with the main coat of your river table.

Step 4: Pouring your river table
Once the primer made with the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system has cured, you can mix the epoxy resin of the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system for the main pouring. Now you can mix in the dyes or pigments in addition to the resin and hardener of the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system. You can control the intensity by adding more or less color pigment onto your epoxy resin of the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system. Mix the resin, hardener of the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system and pigments exactly as specified and pour over a stirring rod between the wooden planks. Make sure to not exceed the maximum pouring height of the epoxy resin system that you are using. Allow the resin to cure completely in the mold.

Step 5: Sealing and Polishing
Remove the mold by unscrewing all the screws and cutting through the silicone with a cutter. Then knock out all mold parts with a hammer. Now you can sand, polish and seal the tabletop. You will need either a polishing machine, such as a random orbital sander with the appropriate attachments, or a sanding block and wet sandpaper and some water. You will also need a polishing paste. Put on the fine dust mask and start sanding from the coarsest to the finest grain. If you work with wet sandpaper, remember to water it from time to time. When you are finished with the 3000 grits, wipe the table once. Now you can continue with the polishing of the epoxy resin of the ECO or PRO series. Apply the polishing paste to the machine attachment or a wipe. Polish the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system with little pressure in circular movements. When the desired gloss level is reached, you are finished. Now screw on the table legs to your river table. As a final sealant you can now apply oil, varnish or wax as a sealant on your river table. If you want an even more durable surface, we recommend applying a layer of matte polyurethane resin on your river table. Let the sealant cure before using the epoxy table for the first time.

How to sand epoxy resin ECO, PRO, PRO+, Crystal clear?

chevronBottom

To sand the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system, start with a P100 grit sandpaper and gradually work your way up to P3000 grit. If you want an even smoother finish, you can continue sanding your epoxy of the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system up to P10,000 grit, but avoid skipping any grits between stages. Each sanding stage needs to be fully completed, meaning that all marks or scratches left by the previous grit should be removed on your epoxy resin of the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system. Skipping a stage may result in haze or unevenness on the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system.

There is no exact rule for when a sanding stage is finished, as it depends on factors like the sanding speed, whether you're sanding dry or wet, and the surface hardness. After each sanding stage, be sure to dust off the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system and spray it with a silicone remover. Then, use a light to carefully check the surface and see if there are any areas that still need extra sanding.

Please note that the epoxy resin must be fully chemically cured before sanding.

Additionally, here are some helpful tips for sanding epoxy of the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system:

Wet sanding: For a finer finish, wet sanding of the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system is recommended. This helps to reduce dust, prevent clogging, and minimize heat buildup. It also creates a smoother, more polished surface.

Work in sections: Sand in small sections to ensure uniformity and check frequently with a light to identify areas that may need more attention.

Keep the surface cool: Overheating can cause the resin of the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system to soften and become gummy. To avoid this, sand in short bursts and let the surface cool down between each session.

Clean the surface regularly: Dust can interfere with the sanding process. Use a microfibre cloth or tack cloth to clean the surface after each sanding stage.

Wear protective gear: Always wear a dust mask or respirator, goggles, and gloves to protect yourself from dust and resin particles during sanding.

What is the density of epoxy resin ECO, PRO, PRO+, Crystal clear?

chevronBottom

The density of our epoxy resin systems — the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system — is approximately 9.2 lb/gal. Therefore, to calculate the volume in gallons, multiply the weight in pounds of your ECO system, PRO system, or PRO+ system by 0.11. Conversely, if you wish to determine the required weight of ECO PRO or PRO+ in pounds based on a specific volume in gallons, multiply the volume in gallons by 9.2.

Can I apply epoxy on oiled, waxed wood?

chevronBottom

In principle, applying epoxy resin of the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system to waxed or oiled surfaces is feasible. However, it is essential that these materials are fully absorbed and dried prior to application of the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system. We highly recommend conducting a small test pour in advance to verify compatibility of the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system and ensure optimal results.

How dry should my concrete be before applying epoxy? How dry should my wood be before applying epoxy?

chevronBottom

The residual moisture in wood should not exceed 12% before applying the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system. The residual moisture in concrete should not exceed 3% when applying the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system.

How do I build a frame for my river table?
How to build a frame to put epoxy in?

chevronBottom

Building a frame for a river table is a crucial step in creating a sturdy and well-formed piece. Here's a step-by-step guide to constructing the frame:

Materials Needed to build a river table frame:
Wood for side panels (e.g., plywood or MDF)
Thin particleboard or MDF (for the base)
EPODEX release tape
EPODEX release agent spray
Silicone sealant
Screws or nails
Wood glue (optional)
Saw (to cut wood)
Drill and screwdriver
Step-by-Step Instructions:
Design and Measure:

Determine the dimensions of your river table, including the length, width, and thickness of the river section.
Make sure to leave some margin around the edges to prevent resin from spilling over the sides of the formwork.
Build the Sides:

Cut the wood panels to the appropriate height for the sides of the formwork. This will be the boundary that holds the resin in place.
If you want a thicker resin pour, ensure that the height of the side panels is enough to contain the resin (typically, the sides should be about 2”-4” taller than the expected resin thickness).
Attach the side panels together using screws or nails, forming a rectangular or square box frame.
Prepare the Bottom:

Cut a thin piece of particleboard or MDF to the size of the base of the formwork. This will be the surface on which the wood slab sits.
Place this board on a flat, level surface to ensure your resin cures evenly.
Seal the Edges:

Apply silicone sealant to the edges of the formwork, particularly where the side panels meet the base. This ensures that no resin leaks out during the pouring process.
Let the silicone cure fully before proceeding.
Apply Release Tape:

Apply EPODEX release tape to the inside of the formwork, especially along the edges where the resin will meet the sides of the frame. This will prevent the epoxy resin from bonding with the formwork and allow for easy removal after curing.
Spray with Release Agent:

After applying the release tape, spray the surface with EPODEX release agent to further ensure that the resin does not stick to the formwork.
Test the Formwork:

Before pouring the epoxy resin, it is a good idea to do a test run with a small amount of resin to check for leaks or issues with the formwork.
Place the Wood Slabs:

Position the live edge wood slabs or your desired tabletop material into the formwork. Make sure they are properly aligned and level.
Pour the Epoxy Resin:

Once the formwork is prepared, you can begin the process of mixing and pouring your epoxy resin into the mold. Ensure you pour slowly to avoid creating air bubbles.
Additional Tips:
Levelling: Make sure the entire formwork is level, especially when using resin with a river section, as this helps ensure an even cure.
Ventilation: Work in a well-ventilated area when applying epoxy resin, as fumes can be harmful.
Cleaning: Clean up any spills immediately to avoid damage to the formwork or surfaces.

Can I add a photo, newspaper, puzzles, concert tickets, flowers inside my epoxy resin ECO, PRO, PRO+, Crystal clear?

chevronBottom

In principle, you can embed photos, puzzles, flowers or concert tickets with epoxy resin of the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system. However, it is essential to assess compatibility in advance, as these items may be made from various materials, which could lead to color degradation or smudging when embed into epoxy resin of the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system. We recommend pre-sealing the surface with a transparent acrylic spray in two layers to ensure optimal results.

How do I store my epoxy resin?
How long is epoxy resin ECO, PRO, PRO+, good?

chevronBottom

The optimal storage temperature for the ECO series ranges from 10°C to 85°F, while for the PRO series, it is between 60°F and 85°F. The ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system must be securely closed and stored in a dark environment to maintain their quality and effectiveness. The epoxy resin can be stored for up to one year before opening and for up to six months after opening, provided it is stored under the recommended conditions.

How long do I need to wait between my epoxy resin layers?
What is the waiting time between layers ECO, PRO, PRO+?

chevronBottom

The waiting times between layers depend on the epoxy resin system you are using. You can find all relevant information, including waiting times, for each resin system under the "Learn More" button on the respective product pages. Generally, the next layer can be poured once the first layer is no longer tacky.

When can I draw patterns in my epoxy?
How can I make a design with metallic pigment in epoxy resin?

chevronBottom

Determining the optimal time for pattern creation in the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system requires considering several factors.

In summary, the resin of the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system should reach a consistency similar to that of liquid honey when drawing patterns, ensuring that the pigments no longer settle at the bottom.

Can I work the epoxy after curing?
Can I cut and turn epoxy resin ECO, PRO, PRO+, Crystal clear?
Which blade do I need to cut epoxy resin?

chevronBottom

Once fully cured, your epoxy resin project made with the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system can be easily planed and turned. The curing time varies depending on the system used. For the ECO and PRO systems, the typical curing time is 7 days. Please note that curing times may vary due to temperature fluctuations.

For optimal results, we recommend using a metal blade when cutting the resin.

How can I polish my epoxy resin ECO, PRO, PRO+, Crystal clear?

chevronBottom

Note: The resin of the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system can only be polished after it has fully chemically cured.

Step 1: Clean the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system After sanding, ensure the surface is free of any dust or debris. Use a microfibre cloth or clean water to wipe down the surface thoroughly.

Step 2: Apply EPODEX Polish

Use a clean, soft cloth or a polishing pad to apply a small amount of EPODEX Polish to the surface of ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system.
Be careful not to use too much polish, as this can result in a milky appearance of the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system. Start with a small amount, work it in, and reapply as necessary.
Gently spread the polish over the surface in circular motions. Avoid excessive pressure, as the goal is to work the polish into the resin of the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system without causing damage.
Step 3: Buff the Surface

Once the polish is applied, use a soft, clean microfibre cloth to buff the surface in circular motions. This will help remove any excess polish and achieve a smooth, glossy finish of the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system.
For optimal results, repeat the polishing process until you achieve the desired level of shine.
Step 4: Final Cleaning

After polishing, wipe the surface with a clean cloth to remove any remaining residue. This will leave your epoxy resin of the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system with a brilliant, glossy finish.
Important Notes:

Always work in a well-ventilated area.
Wear gloves to protect your hands during the polishing process.

How can I make a semi-transparent epoxy color?
Why is there no semi-transparent dye in my order?
Why did I get a colored and a white drop-in instead of a semi-transparent drop-in?

chevronBottom

The semi-transparent dye consists of two pigments: the desired color tone and a white dye. It is the addition of the white dye that creates the semi-transparency effect. By adjusting the amount of white dye, you can control the intensity of the effect to suit your preferences.
Here are the recommendations to achieve the colors seen on our website: 

  • Transparent dyes (except white, black, and gray): 1g of dye per 17.5fl.oz. of epoxy. 7g (0.25oz) of dye per gallon of epoxy,
  • Transparent white, black, and gray dyes: 1g of dye per 53fl.oz. of epoxy. 2.5g (0.1oz) of dye per gallon of epoxy,
  • Semi-transparent dyes (except white): 1g of the desired dye and 0.5g of white dye per 26.5fl.oz. of epoxy. 5g (0.2oz) of the desired dye and 2.5g (0.1oz) of white dye per gallon of epoxy,
  • Semi-transparent white: 1g of dye per 17.5fl.oz. of epoxy. 7g (0.25oz) of dye per gallon of epoxy,

How can I clean my tool after working with epoxy?
How can I clean my accessories after working with epoxy?

chevronBottom

The accessories used to mix and apply epoxy resin of the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system can generally be cleaned immediately after use. Stir sticks and mixing cups can be wiped clean with a paper towel, and any cured ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system resin in the mixing container can be squeezed out.

For brushes and foam rollers used with the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system, we recommend cleaning them promptly after use with acetone for optimal results.

How to prepare the floor before laying epoxy? 

chevronBottom

It is important to note that the subfloor must be professionally prepared before applying epoxy resin. Specifically, floating screed should never have a direct connection to the wall in order to prevent expansion. For this reason, we recommend installing "edge insulation strips" when laying the screed or levelling compound. When processing the epoxy resin, ensure that the edge joints remain unsealed. Silicone would be an ideal material for this purpose, as it can easily be separated from the epoxy resin of the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system if necessary.

When can I remove the masking tape when working with epoxy?

chevronBottom

It is important to find the right time to remove the masking tape. The epoxy resin of the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system should have already reacted and no longer be so liquid that it can still flow when you peel off the tape. If the epoxy resin of the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system starts to "pull threads," these can simply be cut off with a utility knife while still in a soft state.

Is an epoxy resin floor ECO slippery?
Can I make my ECO resin floor non-slip?

chevronBottom

Epoxy resin floors made with the ECO system are classified with a slip resistance category of R9, which is comparable to standard tiles. For applications requiring a non-slip surface, micro glass beads can be added to the PU sealant.

We recommend incorporating 1% micro glass beads by weight into the PU resin and applying the mixture thinly with a foam roller for an even finish. This process ensures enhanced slip resistance while maintaining a durable and professional appearance.

Why did my epoxy resin crack?

chevronBottom

Cracking epoxy resin can have different causes, for example, overheating, unstable substrate, etc. The questions below can help us identify the reason why the epoxy resin cracked:

Which epoxy resin did you use?
How thick was the layer?
What was the room temperature when you applied the resin? What temperature was it during curing?
How did you mix the resin?
How much did you mix at once?
How long did the resin sit in the mixing container before being poured into the mold?
Was the resin fully cured within the specified time?
For River Tables: What type of wood did you use, and was it sealed?
Epoxy resin can crack if it overheats or if too much stress is placed on it during curing. Overheating can happen if the resin sits in the mixing container for too long, if the pour height is too high, or if the room is too warm. The reaction between the resin and hardener generates heat, and if any of these factors cause too much heat to build up, the resin can overheat. Overheating can also cause other issues, like:

Uneven surface
Yellowing
Bubbling
Stress can also occur, particularly in River Tables, if the wood hasn't been fully sealed.

If cracks have formed, they can be filled with epoxy resin, and once cured, only a very faint hairline will remain, which will be hardly noticeable.

Why does my epoxy resin have bubble in it?

chevronBottom

Bubbles inside the cured epoxy resin can have different causes, it can be a sign that the resin overheated, that the substrate wasn’t sealed properly, etc. The questions below can help us identify the epoxy resin has bubble in it:

Which epoxy resin did you use?
How thick is the layer?
What was the room temperature when you poured the resin? What was the temperature during curing?
How did you mix the resin?
How long did the resin sit in the mixing cup before you poured it?
Was your project fully cured in the time suggested?
For River Tables: What type of wood did you use, and was it sealed?
For floors, countertops, etc.: What is the surface made from?
For other casts with inclusions: Did you add anything to the resin? If so, what?

Bubbles can happen if the resin gets too hot, or if it's too cold, which makes it thicker and stops the defoamer from working properly. Bubbles can also form if the resin is poured onto a porous surface or if porous materials are added to the resin. To prevent this, we recommend sealing the surface or objects first with a thin layer of resin.

If the resin hasn't fully hardened and is still runny or gel-like, applying some heat can help remove the bubbles. Depending on the project, you can gently warm the underside with a blow dryer to soften the resin, or use a heat gun, lighter, or gas torch over the surface until the bubbles pop.

Just be careful not to stay in one spot for too long, as this can cause the surface to burn or become uneven.

If the resin is already cured, you’ll need to sand to open the bubbles and reapply a new layer to fill the opened bubbles.

Why is there epoxy resin missing in my bottle?

chevronBottom

Our material is carefully measured and automatically filled into the container to ensure precise quantities. However, it’s common for some material to remain on the edges of the container after pouring. The larger the container, the more material tends to stick. Additionally, thicker materials flow more slowly, and viscosity increases with colder temperatures.

To achieve the best results, we recommend allowing the material to reach room temperature (around 70°F) before use, rather than applying it immediately after delivery. This will ensure smoother handling and optimal performance.

Why does my epoxy resin coating has crater in it?
Why does my epoxy resin coating has holes in it?

chevronBottom

Craters inside the cured epoxy resin can have different causes, it can be a sign that the resin was applied too thinly, that the substrate wasn’t sealed properly, etc. The questions below can help us identify the epoxy resin has craters in it:

What is the substrate made of?
How was the surface prepared?
Was the surface pre-treated before applying the epoxy resin?
How much epoxy resin was used, and how many square metres were covered?
Was the surface level?
For floors:

Were nail shoes worn while walking on the epoxy?
Craters can form if too little epoxy resin was used (causing curing problems) or if the substrate is very porous and absorbs too much resin.
Craters can also happen if nail shoes were worn, as they can pierce the primer, causing holes that let the resin seep through.

The good news is, fixing craters is simple. We recommend applying another layer of at least 1/16“.

Why is my epoxy is yellow?

chevronBottom

Yellowing epoxy resin can have different causes, it can be a sign that the resin overheated, etc. The questions below can help us identify the epoxy resin is yellow:

If the yellowing happened right after curing:

Which epoxy resin did you use?
How thick is the layer of resin?
What was the room temperature when you poured the resin and during curing?
How did you mix the resin?
How long did the resin sit in the mixing cup before being poured?
Was your project fully cured within the suggested time?

If the yellowing happened after some time: 
All epoxy resins will yellow over time, but some are more resistant than others. Our PRO series is UV-stabilised, so it’s less likely to yellow than our ECO series, but no resin is completely UV-proof. If yellowing happened after curing, the resin was exposed to UV light.

Yellowing can happen if the resin gets too hot, causing immediate yellowing, or if it is exposed to UV light over time, which causes long-term yellowing. This can even happen indoors, as sunlight coming through a window can cause yellowing.

Does epoxy resin shrink after curing?

chevronBottom

Please note that all our epoxy resin of the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system shrink by about 1%. In larger projects, such as a river table, this shrinkage can be more noticeable. When using wooden molds, the resin tends to sink at the corners. With silicone molds, the edges often rise slightly, and the centre may sink a little. This is a natural part of the chemical process and unfortunately can’t be avoided, but it can be fixed by sanding or by repouring a new layer of epoxy resin. 

Glow in the dark epoxy resin not glowing?
How thick do I need to apply the glow in the dark to see it?

chevronBottom

To achieve a good glow with the Glow-in-the-Dark pigments, we recommend using a layer thickness of at least 3/8“. The thicker the layer, the stronger the glow. This is also the reason why our glow-in-the-dark pigments aren't available for countertops and floors.

Why isn’t my epoxy resin curing?

chevronBottom

Curing problem with epoxy resin of the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system can have different reasons. The questions below can help us identify the epoxy resin has curing problem:

Which epoxy resin did you use?
How long ago did you pour it?
How thick is the layer you applied?
What was the room temperature when you poured and left the resin to cure? (Did the temperature drop overnight?)
How did you mix the resin? How did you check that all parts were fully combined?
Can you send us pictures of the containers?
If the resin hasn’t fully cured, it could be because of one of these reasons:

  • The mixing ratio was wrong
  • The layer is too thin
  • The room or surface was too cold
  • The wrong product was used, or it wasn't mixed enough
    If the resin is still reacting, try increasing the room temperature to help it cure. If it hasn’t changed after 24-48 hours, the sticky material will need to be removed.

Why is my epoxy resin partly not cured?

chevronBottom

Partial curing problem with epoxy resin of the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system can have different reasons. The questions below can help us identify the epoxy resin has partial curing problem:

Which epoxy resin did you use?
When did you pour the resin?
How thick was the layer you applied?
What was the room temperature when you poured and let the resin cure? (Did the temperature drop overnight?)
How did you mix the resin? How did you check that all components were fully combined?
How many times did you mix the entire amount?
Did you transfer the resin into a new mixing container and mix it again?
Did you scrape the bottom and sides of the mixing container to make sure all the material was used?
Could you send us pictures of the containers?
If the resin hasn’t fully cured after the recommended time, the following reasons could be the cause: 

  • The resin wasn’t mixed thoroughly, so the components didn’t fully combine.
  • The surface is uneven, and some areas are too thin, which can prevent proper curing.
  • The wrong mixing ratio was used.
  • The resin wasn’t transferred or scraped from the edges and bottom of the container, leaving unmixed material.
    If there are sticky areas, these can be scraped off. After that, clean the areas with acetone and let the solvent evaporate for a few hours. Then, sand the area, remove any dust, and re-coat.

Can I apply epoxy resin ECO, PRO, PRO+, to Styrofoam, siporex, masonry block, absorbent surfaces?

chevronBottom

It is possible to apply epoxy resin on porous surfaces, but this requires preparation. Absorbent surfaces must be primed many times over to achieve a satisfactory result. We recommend priming with epoxy resin from the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system and not with PRIMER 1K on very absorbent surfaces. We recommend proceeding in many layers and plan more epoxy than normally recommended. Apply as many priming layers of epoxy resin as required to seal the absorbent surface. 

Can I apply epoxy resin on wood?

chevronBottom

Yes, you can apply epoxy resin from the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system on wood. We recommend priming the wood before applying the epoxy resin. Some wood requires more than 1 priming layer. The surface must be sealed before pouring. If the wood absorbs all the resin from the priming layer, apply another primer layer, let it cure and then proceed with the main pour. 

Do I need a primer with transparent epoxy resin ECO, PRO, PRO+,?

chevronBottom

Do not use 1K Primer when working with epoxy resin from the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system in transparent colors, semi-transparent or clear. The 1K primer is colored which will be visible under the transparent or semi-transparent epoxy resin.

For clear, transparent colors, semi-transparent colors, we recommend priming with a thin layer of same epoxy resin used for the casting. Depending on the substrate, 1 or more layers of epoxy resin might be required to prime. 

How hot does the epoxy resin ECO, PRO, PRO+, get when curing?

chevronBottom

When the processing temperature and the max pouring height are respected the epoxy resin from the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system do not get hotter than 140°F.

When the resin overheats (the processing temperature and/or max. pouring height aren’t respected) the epoxy resin from the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system can easily reach temperature over 200°F. This causes the resin to crack, yellow, and have bubbles.

What is the heat resistance of your epoxy resin, ECO, PRO, PRO+, Crystal clear?

chevronBottom

After complete chemical curing our epoxy resins for the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system are heat resistant up to 140°F. Increasing the heat resistance by slowly heating the cured resin is possible. To do so, the resin must be place on a stable surface to prevent it from bending and deforming. Heat the resin until it gets soft and let it cool back down completely. Repeat the process by slowly increasing the heating temperature (1. 150°F, then 160°F, 170°F etc) With this technic it is possible to increase the heat resistance to about 180°F. For larger pieces which can’t be easily heated, it is possible to apply a heat-resistant topcoat such as our PU resin which is heat resistant up to 180°F.

Can I add my WB PIGMENT into the epoxy resin, ECO, PRO, PRO+, Crystal clear?

chevronBottom

No, the WB PIGMENTs aren’t compatible with the epoxy resin from the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system.

WB PIGMENTs are included in some Countertops and Flooring epoxy resin set to color the 1K PRIMER.

Can I add LED into epoxy resin ECO, PRO, PRO+, Crystal clear?

chevronBottom

Yes, LED can be added into the epoxy resin from the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system. We recommend adding it to clear non-dyed resin, to transparent colored, or semi-transparent colored epoxy resin.

Please note that on thicker layer, we recommend adding fewer drop-in dyes as the colors look darker on thicker layer. We recommend adding the dye little by little, the color of the uncured resin remains the same after curing.

Do not use metallic pigment, RAL color paste, Neon, or glow-in-the-dark pigment when working with LED. These pigments are opaque, and the LED won’t be visible.

How do I apply epoxy resin for arts, crafts, and other castings?
How to coat a surface (painting or table, etc) with epoxy resin?

chevronBottom

To apply epoxy resin for projects like jewellery, bookmarks, lamps, or other crafts:

  1. Surface preparation (if applicable): If you're pouring resin onto a surface like wood, or coating a table or a painting, apply a thin layer of epoxy resin as a primer to avoid material loss and blistering. Mix the resin (A-component) and hardener (B-component) thoroughly in a 2:1 ratio until streak-free. Use a brush or roller to apply the primer evenly and let it cure completely.
  2. Prepare the resin mixture: Mix the resin and hardener thoroughly, scraping the sides and bottom of the cup to ensure no unmixed material remains. Transfer the mixture to a clean cup and mix again.
  3. Pour or cast the resin: Immediately pour the mixed resin into your mold or onto the prepared surface. Work quickly to avoid overheating the mixture in the cup.
  4. Avoid moisture during curing: Keep the resin away from water or high humidity during curing to prevent imperfections like white patches. Allow the resin to fully cure, which may take up to 7/14days days depending on the conditions.

How do I apply epoxy resin to the edges of a table/counter to achieve a nice result?

chevronBottom

You should wait until the resin has gelled. This should be monitored closely, and when you notice that the resin has a honey-like texture and is thick, you should remove the tape from the sides, and then the resin will flow down to the edges. Just be careful - protect the floors and furniture that you don’t want to get stained with resin.

When can I apply a new layer of resin?

chevronBottom

For the ECO system, at a temperature of 70°F, after 6 hours; for the PRO system, after 12 hours; for PRO+, after 48-72 hours.

How much pigment/ dyes do I have to add to the epoxy resin?
How to dye or pigment or color the epoxy resin?
How to dye or pigment or color the ECO, PRO, PRO+,Crystal clear?

chevronBottom
  • If you are using pigments and dyes for epoxy resin of the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system, here are the percentage amounts for coloring resin and hardener (The amount in grams is given for 1kg of resin and hardener):
    Powder pigments (Metallic, Neon and Glow in the dark): 1g of pigment per 2fl.oz. of epoxy.70g (2.5oz) of pigment per gallon of epoxy,
  • Transparent dyes (except white, black, and gray): 1g of dye per 17.5fl.oz. of epoxy. 7g (0.25oz) of dye per gallon of epoxy,
  • Transparent white, black, and gray dyes: 1g of dye per 53fl.oz. of epoxy. 2.5g (0.1oz) of dye per gallon of epoxy,
  • Semi-transparent dyes (except white): 1g of the desired dye and 0.5g of white dye per 26.5fl.oz. of epoxy. 5g (0.2oz) of the desired dye and 2.5g (0.1oz) of white dye per gallon of epoxy,
  • Semi-transparent white: 1g of dye per 17.5fl.oz. of epoxy. 7g (0.25oz) of dye per gallon of epoxy,
  • Solid color: 1g of dye per 3fl.oz. of epoxy. 40g (1.5oz) of dye per gallon of epoxy),
  • Glitter pigments/flakes: 1g of dye per 3fl.oz. of epoxy. 40g (1.5oz) of dye per gallon of epoxy


It is important to not add more liquid Dye than recommended! Adding too much liquid into the resin and hardener mixture can cause curing problem. Do not add more RAL EP Color Paste (pigment paste solid color) than recommended. Do not add too much drop-in dyes as well.

Why do I have white lines/ white spots/ white streaks, a greasy milky finish over my resin project?

chevronBottom

This is called amine blush—a reaction between uncured epoxy resin and moisture/water. It can also occur at low room temperatures, high humidity level and in very thin layers. If the resin has never fully cured, there is a risk of amine blush even months after the epoxy has been applied.

When a water-based coating (like a painting) is sealed with epoxy, the remaining moisture in the paint can cause amine blush. This can also happen on surfaces where the resin has been applied over a water-based primer that is not completely dry.

Let the resin cure completely and first try to remove the amine-blush with white vinegar. This might leave the surface matt. If the amine-blush can’t be removed with white vinegar, you’ll need to sand it to remove it.

we recommend applying a sealer or another layer on top of the epoxy once you remove the amine-blush. Applying another layer or a sealer will prevent the resin from getting amine-blush again.

How can I remove the cured epoxy resin?
How do I clean up dried epoxy resin?
Is it possible to remove hardened epoxy resin from a surface?
What should I do if epoxy resin has dried on my table/floor?

chevronBottom

Cured epoxy resin of the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system can only be removed by sanding. If the resin is absorbed into the substrate, and you wish to remove it completely, you will also need to remove part of the substrate where the resin is absorbed.

How can I remove uncured resin? How can I remove liquid epoxy?

chevronBottom

It is possible to scrap off liquid resin of the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system and remove any sticky area with acetone.

What can I use to clean the tools from the epoxy resin?

chevronBottom

You can use acetone as a solvent to clean your tools effectively after using the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system.

It is possible to let the epoxy resin from the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system cure in the mixing cup. After curing the epoxy can be easily removed from the cup by tapping the bottom to pop the resin out.

In which container size am I getting the products?

chevronBottom

We are having different container sizes and always try to send each product in the biggest container-size possible. However, sometimes certain sizes are getting out of stock. In this case you will get the product in smaller containers so that you get  the purchased product as soon as possible.

Can I get my order in small bottles only?

chevronBottom

All orders are packed with the biggest size bottle/jerry can be available to achieve this quantity. It is not possible to change the size of the container for your order. If you wish to receive your order in smaller quantities, we kindly ask that you order several small packages. We know that the price of many small quantities is higher than the price of one large quantity and we can’t offer a discount on an order with many small quantities and smaller packaging cost more money to produce and ship. The cost of each bottle and labels must be taken into consideration. Furthermore, smaller containers often do not fit into 1 parcel which also increases the price of shipping which we are paying for. 

How to maintain/ clean epoxy surfaces, like epoxy floors, epoxy countertops, epoxy tables?

chevronBottom

We recommend cleaning the cured epoxy with mild surfactants.

We do not recommend using acid-based, chlorine-containing cleaners, or alkalis as they can mattify the surface or even degrade it.

What is the viscosity of the epoxy resin?

chevronBottom

The viscosity of ECO is 700cP, of PRO 530cP, of PRO+ 350cP.

What is the 
SHORE hardness of the epoxy resin after curing?

chevronBottom

The SHORE hardness after curing (D1) of our flooring epoxy kit (ECO) is 87, of the PRO epoxy resin it is 82, of the PRO+ is 80.

What will happen if I put a hot plate on my resin?
What will happen if my cured epoxy resin gets hotter than 140°F?

chevronBottom

If the epoxy resin from the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system get hotter than 140°F, it will deform.

We recommend using coasters or a mat when drinking out of a hot mug or eating out of a hot plate.

Can I do a candle holder out of epoxy resin ECO, PRO, PRO+, Crystal clear?

chevronBottom

Yes, you can do a candle holder out of our epoxy resin from the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system. Please note that the resin will soften the few first times that you are using the candle holder. This is normal, do not apply pressure or the resin will deform. Let the resin cool down so that it doesn’t deform. After using it a few times the resin heat resistance will increase, and the resin will eventually no longer soften when the candle holder is used. 

Can I put my epoxy resin in the dishwasher? 

chevronBottom

We do not recommend putting your epoxy resin from the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system in the dishwasher. 

Can I put my epoxy resin in the microwave?

chevronBottom

We do not recommend putting your epoxy resin from the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system in the microwave.

My room temperature is 71°F is this ok to use epoxy resin?

chevronBottom

Even 1°F over the recommended processing temperature can lead the resin to overheat. If you can’t have the room temperature at 70°F, we recommend that you do not pour a layer close to the max pouring height.

Can I use epoxy resin PRO+ system if my river table has a thickness of 2 1/64”?

chevronBottom

Yes, but we recommend pouring the pro+ in layers if the layer thickness is over 2”. 

Can I buy epoxy resin components individually?

chevronBottom

Unfortunately, we do not sell the individual epoxy resin components.

Can I use another mixing ratio for my resin and hardener?

chevronBottom

 No, you must use the right mixing ratio. Using another mixing ratio will cause the resin to not cure. 

Can I put more hardener?

chevronBottom

No, you can’t put more hardener than recommended. Adding more hardener will not result in a faster curing, it will cause the resin to not cure. It is important to always respect the mixing ratio.

How can I thicken my resin but keep it transparent?

chevronBottom

Adding any thickening agent such as microglass beads will result in a not transparent resin. The only way to have a thicker resin but it transparent is to let the resin set before using. Be careful when using this technic, you must watch your resin closely as it can quickly overheat. Mix it and stay close until the resin has the desired consistency. 

Can I work with epoxy resin ECO, PRO, PRO+, Crystal clear in a humid room?

chevronBottom

No, we do not recommend working with the epoxy from the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system when the humidity level is over 60%. It is important to have a humidity level under 60% until the resin is fully cured. If the humidity level is too high, it can cause whitening of the resin also called amine-blush.

Can I work the epoxy resin in my apartment? Can I use epoxy resin, ECO, PRO, PRO+, ultra inside?

chevronBottom

Yes, you can use our products inside without problem. It is important to follow the recommended temperature and maximum pouring height so that the resin doesn’t overheat. When used properly the resin doesn’t smell nor fume. All our epoxy resin from the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system are solvent-free and not dangerous to health.

I’m working inside, can I open a window after pouring my epoxy resin?

chevronBottom

It is important to not open window when the resin is uncured. The humidity and temperature change from outside can cause whitening of the resin also called amine-blush.

Can you tell me how much resin and hardener ECO, PRO, PRO+, Crystal clear, I need to have 3lbs mixture?

chevronBottom

Yes, to have a 3lbs mixture of the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system, you need to use a 2 to 1 ratio. This means that for 3lbs total weight, you need 2lbs resin A-component, and 1lbs hardener B-component.

How can I pour and not have lines between my layers of epoxy resin, ECO, PRO, PRO+, Crystal clear?

chevronBottom

There is 2 ways to proceed.

  1. Sand between the layers. Be careful to wait for curing and vacuum up the sanding dust before pouring.
  2. Apply the next layer while the previous layer isn’t completely cured. You need to wait until the first layer has the consistency of a liquid-gel. But be careful with this method. The layers will react with each other, pour each layer with a thickness inferior to the max pouring height and lower the room temperature. 
    If you pour the layers and do not sand or pour too late and miss the right time to pour, the line will only be visible when looking perpendicularly (90°)

Do I need to polish between my layers of epoxy resin?

chevronBottom

No, only polish at the end when the last layers are chemically cured if you wish to polish. 

Can I use your wax on epoxy resin?

chevronBottom

No, we do not recommend our wax for the epoxy resin. Our wax is made to seal chalk paint. For epoxy resin, we recommend our Polish.

Can I apply the polish on the wood part of my river table?

chevronBottom

We recommend using the polish on the resin part of the table. For the wood, we recommend using an oil for wood. 

Why is my epoxy resin staying matte after sanding? 

chevronBottom

To remove these marks, you can sand the resin without any problem. Start with P100 grit and gradually sand up to P3,000 grit. If desired, you can also sand up to P10,000 grit until you achieve the desired effect, without skipping grit levels. Each sanding step must be completed, meaning that any damage caused by the previous grit size must be eliminated. If a sanding step with a specific grit size is skipped, some opacity may remain.
It is not possible to generally determine when sanding is complete, as it depends on many factors, such as the rotation speed, whether sanding is done dry or wet, and the "hardness" of the surface. We recommend dusting off the surface after each sanding and spraying it with an anti-silicone product. If you then shine a light over it, you will clearly see where further work is needed.

Why is my sanded and polished epoxy resin now milky and still matte?

chevronBottom

If your epoxy resin gets milky and matte after sanding and polishing it means that either the sanding wasn’t done properly or too much polish was applied.

How do I use your polish?

chevronBottom

It is important to use only a small amount of polish at a time. Take an amount about the size of a dime and work it into the surface. If the table needs more polishing, apply another small amount. Never use too much polish at once, as this makes it difficult to apply and can leave the surface looking milky and unclear, rather than mirror-like.

How can I achieve a mirror like finish on my epoxy resin, ECO, PRO, PRO+?

chevronBottom

The resin from our ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system have a glossy finish. If you want an even glossier finish, you can sand and polish.

I have sanded my resin, and do I need to polish before applying the sealer, topcoat?

chevronBottom

No, never polish between the layers.

How fine do I need to sand between my layers of epoxy resin?

chevronBottom

When sanding between epoxy layers, it's recommended to use grit between P180 and P320. This range provides enough surface roughness for proper adhesion without creating deep scratches that could show through the next layer.

  • For thick layers or structural bonding: P180–P220 grit works well.
  • For clear, glossy finishes: P240–P320 grit is ideal to avoid visible scratches.
    After sanding, always clean the surface thoroughly to remove dust and debris before applying the next layer.

Where can I find your white epoxy resin flooring set? Where can I find your white epoxy resin countertop set?

chevronBottom

We do not have a white epoxy floor or countertop in store because the resin will yellow eventually and the floor or countertop will not stay white for long. All the sets available under our epoxy resin ECO system countertop and flooring are colors that hides the yellowing.

We also do not recommend using the PRO System to do a white floor or countertop. Yes the PRO system contains UV additive to help with yellowing but yellowing will still occur. We do not recommend white epoxy floor.

I have sanding marks on my epoxy resin, if I apply a new layer will you see the marks?

chevronBottom

We recommend sanding to a grit of P240-P320 between the layers. A coarser grit could still be visible between the layers. 

Why is the epoxy resin I poured in a silicone mold matte? 

chevronBottom

It is important to use a glossy silicone form if you wish to obtain a glossy finish. Using a matte silicone form will result in the epoxy being matte.

If your epoxy is matte, you can polish it to achieve a glossy finish. If the form is irregular and polishing it is difficult, you can also apply a clear acrylic spray to make it glossy. Make sure to wait the complete chemical curing before polishing or applying an acrylic spray. 

With which hardener B-component is the ECO A-component resin compatible?

chevronBottom

The ECO A-component resin is compatible with the ECO B-component.

With which hardeners B-component is the PRO A-component resin compatible?

chevronBottom

The PRO A-component resin is compatible with the PRO B-component and PRO+ B-component.

Is there a PRO+ A-component resin?

chevronBottom

No, there is no PRO+ A component resin only a PRO A-component resin.

Can I mix ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system together?

chevronBottom

We do not recommend mixing ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system in 1 pour. It is possible to apply a layer of PRO System on top of a layer of ECO system. But we do not recommend mixing ECO and PRO together in one pour.

Can I use epoxy resin PRO if I’m pouring a large object that has 13/16“ thickess?

chevronBottom

No, we do not recommend pouring large objects over the maximum pouring height of any ECO or PRO series epoxy resin.

Can I mix metallic pigment and RAL EP color paste in my epoxy resin ECO, PRO, PRO+, Crystal clear?

chevronBottom

Yes, you can mix pigment together in epoxy. Please note that both the metallic pigment and the RAL colors are opaque and they can hide each other in epoxy resin. We recommend testing on a small quantity of epoxy resin to find the ratio that works for you.

Can I mix different metallic pigments together inside epoxy ?

chevronBottom

Yes, you can mix different metallic pigments together in epoxy. We recommend testing on a small quantity of epoxy to find out the ratio that works for the effect you are looking for.

Can I mix different drop-in dyes together in one mixture of epoxy?

chevronBottom

Yes, you can mix different color paste together inside epoxy.

Our Drop-in dye follow the theory of colors. For example, mixing yellow and blue will result in green. Please note that adding white will give a semi-transparent color.

Can I mix transparent drop-in dyes and metallic pigment in one mixture?

chevronBottom

Yes, you can mix metallic pigment and drop-in dyes inside epoxy.

Please note that the metallic pigments are opaque at 1,5% and that it might cover the drop-in. We recommend testing on a small quantity to find out the ratio that works for you. 

Can I mix drop-in transparent dye with RAL color paste in one resin?

chevronBottom

Yes, in theory you could but this is not necessary. We have all colors available in Drop-in transparent dye and all colors available in RAL color paste.

The color pastes are opaque and will hide the drop-in dye. We recommend choosing a RAL color of your choice instead of mixing RAL and drop-in. 

What are neon pigments?

chevronBottom

Neon pigments are not glowing in the dark. These are only very intensive colors known as neon.

How can I pour different colors and not have them mix with each other?

chevronBottom

To achieve different colors separately, you will need to prepare many mixtures. You can also mix a large quantity of transparent resin and hardener and dye part of it in different colors. If you do not want the color to mix, you’ll need to wait until the resin has a gel-like consistency before pouring it. Be careful when using this technic, you’ll need to watch your resin closely ot make sure it doesn’t overheat. 

Can I use epoxy resin from the PRO and ECO series in my unheated garage or workshop?

chevronBottom

It is important to always have the right temperature when working epoxy resin. Make sure that your working space has constantly the right working temperature for epoxy resin. The temperature must be constant day and night.

How to apply epoxy resin ECO on floors?

chevronBottom

It is important when working on floors with our epoxy resin floor set ECO that the floor has a temperature of 70°F. Please take into consideration that when the room temperature is about 70°F, tiles will be colder. 

Do I need to remove the tree bark from my plank that I will use for my river table?

chevronBottom

Yes, we recommend removing the tree bark or any looses pieces of wood before using it in a river table. Leaving the tree bark or looses pieces of wood, will compromise the bond between the resin and the wood.

Can I apply epoxy resin for floor ECO to a wooden floor?

chevronBottom

To apply ECO resin for floor to a wooden floor, make sure that the floor is levelled and has no cracks between the wooden floor. The epoxy resin kit ECO is applied very thinly and can take little bit movement. If the floor is moving a lot, we recommend stabilising it first with ECO epoxy resin and fibreglass mat.

Can I apply epoxy resin floor ECO to a vinyl floor?

chevronBottom

Yes, epoxy resin ECO flooring set can be applied to a vinyl floor. It is also possible to add a vinyl sticker before applying the epoxy ECO to achieve what is known as a 3D floor.

Can I apply epoxy resin floor ECO to a PVC floor?

chevronBottom

No, epoxy resin can’t be applied to PVC floor, The PVC must be removed before applying the ECO resin for floors.

Can I use a PVC mold to pour epoxy resin from the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system?

chevronBottom

Epoxy doesn’t stick well to PVC but it is hard to remove the epoxy resin from the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system from a rigid mold without breaking it. If you don’t mind breaking your mold to unmold the resin, you can use the PVC mold with our separating agent spray to pour our ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system.

Can I apply epoxy ECO for floors on laminated flooring?

chevronBottom

We do not recommend putting epoxy resin ECO for laminated floors. We recommend removing the laminated floor before using our ECO resin for floors. If you wish to only protect the laminated floor with a thin coat of transparent resin, you recommend that you look at our PU resin available in matte or glossy.

What can I add into epoxy resin form the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system?

chevronBottom

Yes, almost anything can be added to the epoxy resin ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system. Only some plastics do not stick to the epoxy resin ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system. The object that you want to include should be able to resist to temperature of at least 140°F as this is the temperature that the resin ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system will reach while normally curing. If your object is fragile or very porous, we recommend sealing it with a thin layer of epoxy resin from the ECO or PRO series. If your object could discolor (such as real flower), we recommend sealing with a clear acrylic spray before adding it into the epoxy from the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system. 

Why did my epoxy resin river table deformed? Why is my epoxy resin project made with the ECO or PRO series is deformed?

chevronBottom

When doing a river table, it is important to have the right support under it to prevent it from deforming. If your table deforms, take the table feet out, put your river table on an even surface and heat the resin to soften it. Put weight on the epoxy resin river table to make it straight again and let it cool down in that position. Once the river table is straight again put the feet again and add some support to prevent it from bending again.

If your epoxy resin project made with the ECO or PRO series is deforming heat it, to soften it, bring it in the right form and let it cool down in that position. Add support if needed to prevent it from deforming again. 

Why do I need to prime with epoxy resin the and the river part of my river table?

chevronBottom

You need to prime the wood that will touch the river and the river space of your river table to prevent material lost through absorption and reduce the tension on the epoxy during the main pour of the river table. If you do not prime your river table, the wood will put tension to the curing resin of the ECO or PRO series that will lead to cracking.

Can I apply epoxy resin, ECO PRO, PRO+, outside?

chevronBottom

We do not recommend working with epoxy resin form the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system outside as you can’t control the temperature and humidity level outdoors. We recommend using epoxy resin from the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system indoors, let it cure in a controlled environment and then bring it outside if you wish.

Are your resins from the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system self-levelling?

chevronBottom

All our resins from the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system (ECO System, PRO System, PRO+ System) are self-levelling and not water based.

Can I mix different RAL EP color paste together in my epoxy resin ECO, PRO, PRO+, Crystal clear?

chevronBottom

Yes, you can mix different color paste together. Our RAL EP color paste follow the theory of colors. For example, mixing yellow and blue will result in green. 

What are the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system?

chevronBottom

The ECO serie is the ECO System.
The PRO serie is the PRO System and the PRO+ System.

What are the container sizes of the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system?

chevronBottom

Component A ECO Resin and PRO Resin come in 16fl.oz., 32fl.oz., 64fl.oz., 96fl.oz., 1.25gal, 2.5gal bottles and jerry cans.
Component B ECO hardener, ECO+ hardener, PRO hardener, come in 8fl.oz., 16fl.oz., 32fl.oz., 64fl.oz., 96fl.oz., 1.25gal, 2.5gal bottles and jerry cans.

What is the ECO system?

chevronBottom

The ECO system is the Epoxy Resin ECO A-component resin and the Hardener B-component ECO.

What is the PRO system?

chevronBottom

The PRO system is the Epoxy Resin PRO A-component resin and the Hardener B-component PRO.

How long do I need to wait before I can apply another layer of ECO system?

chevronBottom

A 3/8“ layer of ECO system needs 6h at 70°F before you can apply a new layer of ECO. If the layer of ECO is less than 3/8“ or the temperature is less than 70°F, the time before you can apply a new layer of ECO will be longer. 

What is the gelling time/ processing time of the ECO System?

chevronBottom

A thickness of 1/16” of ECO System has a gel-time of 120minutes at 70°F.
A thickness of 3/8“of ECO System has a gel-time of 25minutes at 70°F.

How long is the drying, hardening, curing time of the ECO System?

chevronBottom

The ECO system can be touches, and walked on (mechanical hardening) after about 20-24h at 70°F. The ECO System is completely chemically cured after 7 days at 70°F. The ECO system is sensitive to water and scratches until the full chemical curing of 7days. If the temperature is below 70°F, the ECO System needs longer to cure.

What is the minimum processing temperature, and working temperature of the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system?

chevronBottom

The minimum working temperature (substrate temperature, resin temperature, hardener temperature, and room temperature) as well, as the curing temperature with the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system is 60°F. We do not recommend using the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system under 60°F. The temperature when using the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system should always be minimum 60°F during both processing and curing.

What is the recommended processing temperature, and working temperature of the ECO System and PRO System?

chevronBottom

The recommended working temperature (substrate temperature, resin temperature, hardener temperature, and room temperature) as well, as the curing temperature with the ECO System and PRO System is 70°F. We do not recommend using the ECO and PRO System at more than 70°F. If you must work the ECO and PRO system at 71-72°F, never pour close to the maximum pouring height. 

What is the minimal layer thickness with the ECO system or PRO system? How thick do I need to apply the ECO System and PRO system on floor and countertop?

chevronBottom

The minimum layer thickness at 70°F with the ECO system and the PRO System is 1/16“.

What is the gelling time of the ECO system when pouring a layer of 1/16“ thickness?

chevronBottom

The gelling time of the ECO System when pouring a layer of 1/16“at 70°F is 60minutes.

What is the PRO+ system?

chevronBottom

The PRO system is the Epoxy Resin PRO A-component resin and the Hardener B-component PRO+.

What is the maximum pouring height of the ECO System?

chevronBottom

The maximum pouring height of the ECO System is 3/8“ at 70°F. 

Are WB PIGMENT and EP Color paste the same thing?

chevronBottom

No, WB PIGMENTs are water-based pigment for paint, varnishes and microcement.
EP Color pastes are RAL color paste for the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system.

What is the maximum pouring height of the PRO System?

chevronBottom

The maximum pouring height of the PRO System is 3/4“ at 70°F. 

What is the minimum layer thickness with the epoxy resin ECO for floors, countertop, and coatings?

chevronBottom

The minimum layer thickness with the ECO resin for floors, countertop and coatings is 1/16“.

What is the pot life of the ECO system?

chevronBottom

The pot life of the ECO system is 25minutes for 100g(3.5fl.oz.) at 70°F. For larger quantities and higher temperatures, the pot life is shorter. 

How long is the drying, hardening, curing time of the PRO System?

chevronBottom

The PRO system can be touches, and walked on (mechanical hardening) after about 20-24h at 70°F. The PRO System is completely chemically cured after 7 days at 70°F. The PRO system is sensitive to water and scratches until the full chemical curing of 7days. If the temperature is below 70°F, the PRO System needs longer to cure.

What are the properties of the PRO series?

chevronBottom

The PRO series has a glossy finish, is Crystal clear, VOC free, bubble free and is UV stabilised. We recommend using the PRO series in transparent clear, white or with colorants.

What is the pot life of the PRO+ system?

chevronBottom

The pot life of the PRO+ system is 6hours for 22lbs at 70°F. For larger quantities and higher temperatures, the pot life is shorter. 

How long do I need to wait before I can apply another layer of PRO + system?

chevronBottom

A 2“ layer of PRO+ system need 48h to 72h at 70°F before you can apply a new layer of PRO+. If the layer of PRO+ are less than 2“ or the temperature is less than 70°F, the time before you can apply a new layer of PRO+ will be longer. 

What is the gelling time of the PRO+ system when pouring a layer between of 1/16“ thickness?

chevronBottom

The gelling time of the PRO+ System when pouring a layer of 1/16“thick at 70°F is 360minutes.

What is the gelling time of the PRO+ system when pouring a layer between 1/16” and 3/4“ thickness?

chevronBottom

The gelling time of the PRO+ System when pouring a layer between 1/16” and 3/4“ thick at 70°F is 360minutes.

What is the gelling time of the PRO+ system when pouring a layer between 3/4“ and 2“ thickness?

chevronBottom

The gelling time of the PRO+ System when pouring a layer between 3/4“ and 2“ thick at 70°F is 240minutes.

How long is the drying, hardening, curing time of the PRO+ System?

chevronBottom

The PRO+ system can be touched, and walked on (mechanical hardening) after about 48-72h at 70°F.

The PRO+ System are completely chemically cured after 14 days at 70°F.

The PRO+ system are sensitive to water and scratches until the full chemical curing of 14days.

If the temperature is below 70°F, the PRO+ System need longer to cure.

What is the recommended working temperature of the PRO+ system when working under the maximum pouring height of 2“?

chevronBottom

The recommended working temperature (substrate temperature, resin a-component temperature, hardener b-component temperature, room temperature) when using the PRO+ System with a layer thickness of 2“ of less is 70°F.

What is the recommended working temperature of the PRO+ system when pouring over 2“ but under 12” thick on a small area of max. 4”x4”?

chevronBottom

The recommended working temperature (substrate temperature, resin a-component temperature, hardener b-component temperature, room temperature) when using the PRO+ System with a layer thickness of more than 2“ but less than 12” on a small area of max 4”x4” is 60°F.

What is the maximum pouring height of the PRO+ system when working at 60°F on a small area of max. 4“x4“?

chevronBottom

The maximum pouring height of the PRO+ system at 60°F when working on a area of maximum 4“x4“ is 12“.  If the area is bigger than 4“x4“ or the temperature higher than 60°F it is not possible to pour 12“ with the PRO+ System.

How long does the temperature have to be at right temperature when working with the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system?

chevronBottom

The temperature should be constant day and night until full curing of the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system.

Can I use alcohol ink for a river table? Can I use alcohol ink with PRO+ System?

chevronBottom

Alcohol ink can only be used when the layer thickness of maximum ½” with the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system. We recommend using the alcohol ink only in the ECO system or PRO system.

I want to use transparent or semi-transparent drop-in dyes in my ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system but my layer is more than 3/8“?

chevronBottom

If you want to use the drop-in dyes in a thick layer, we recommend adding the drop-in dye slowly into the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system, the thicker the layer, the less amount of drop-in dye you require. The drop-in dyes specially the black and gray drop-ins look very dark on thicker layers. 

Can I use pigment and dyes from another company into your ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system?

chevronBottom

It is possible to add epoxy dyes and pigment from another company into our ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system. If you add pigments are dyes from another company into our ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system, you need to make sure the dyes aren’t water-based and we recommend testing them in a small quantity of the ECO or PRO serie as the color can change after curing. It is better to use our dyes and pigments with our ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system as all our pigments and dyes were tested to make sure they remain the same color after curing.

How do you use the alcohol ink in epoxy resin ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system?

chevronBottom

To achieve an alcohol ink effect, you need to combine a color with the alcohol ink selenit white. Add the colored alcohol ink of your choice to the still liquid the resin-hardener mixture ECO System of PRO System and then add the alcohol ink SELENIT WHITE. The alcohol inks will react with each other creating a unique pattern. The more selenit white ink drops you add to the colored ink drop, the more pronounced and deeper the effect will be.The more selenit white drops you put on the colored alcohol ink drop, the deeper the alcohol ink sink into the resin ECO system or PRO System and the stronger the Alcohol Ink effect is.

Are the drop-in dyes and alcohol inks the same thing?

chevronBottom

No, the transparent drop-in and the alcohol inks aren’t the same thing. The transparent drop-ins give a uniform transparent color to all the resins for the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system. The alcohol inks do not give a uniform color to the ECO system and PRO system, the alcohol ink allows you to achieve a pattern called the petri dish effect.

Can I put more than 1.5% pigment into the resin-hardener mixture of the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system?

chevronBottom

You can add more powder pigment into the resin-hardener mixture of the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system, but it is not necessary. There is no advantages to add more than 1.5% powder pigment into the resin from the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system, except for the glow-in-the-dark where adding more than 1,5% can make it glow more in the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system.

How long do I need to mix my epoxy resin from the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system?

chevronBottom

We recommend mixing the epoxy resin for the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system until the mixture is streak-free and homogenous. Make sure to mix the edges and the bottom of your mixing jug where you have the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system. The ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system hardener and resin have different density, and the component sometimes sink to the bottom of the mixing jug. Once your ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system mixture of streak-free pour the mixture of the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system in a new mixing jug and mix again. 

Can I put more ep color paste of liquid drop dye into the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system?

chevronBottom

No, never put more liquid drop-in dye or ep color paste than recommended into the resin-hardener mixture of the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system, it can lead to the resin not curing.

How can I coat the edges of my countertop, table with the epoxy resin from the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system?

chevronBottom

To coat the edges of a table or countertop with our epoxy resin from the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system, start by putting masking tape under the edge to catch any resin drips. We recommend keeping a bit of epoxy resin and hardener mixture of your ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system in a mixing cup and letting it slowly thicken. Watch your epoxy resin from the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system closely, as the epoxy can overheat in the mixing cup. Once the epoxy resin of the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system has reached a gel-like texture (like honey). Apply the gel-like resin-hardener mixture of the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system on your edge. Let the edge thicken, remove the masking tape from under the edge before the drips solidify completely.

Where can I trash my leftover ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system?

chevronBottom

Cured epoxy resin from the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system is not dangerous and can be trashed with other plastic or at your local recycling centre. For more information on how to dispose of cured epoxy resin, we recommend that you check your local regulations. We recommend mixing unmix ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system and letting it cure before disposing of it. Never pour the components of the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system down the drain or in the rainwater. The ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system container can be disposed of at your local recycling centre.

Which mask, glove, protection do I need to use ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system?

chevronBottom

A mask FFP2 is sufficient while working with our ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system, we recommend wearing nitrile gloves while working with our ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system. We do not recommend wearing latex gloves while working with ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system, the epoxy can go through the latex, make sure to wear nitrile gloves while working with the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system. 

Can I use my old ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system?
What happen if I use expire ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system?

chevronBottom

Using ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system that have expire can lead to the resin not curing or not curing properly. 

How to use the Nevada kit for countertop?

chevronBottom

Instructions for Use Nevada Countertop Kit

Start with the Primer 1K

We recommend a room, substrate, and product temperature of approx. 70°F when working with our countertop and flooring ECO epoxy resin kit.
the substrate should be dust-free, clean, and even. Level out holes, unevenness, and slopes in advance with a suitable levelling compound before applying our countertop and flooring ECO epoxy resin kit.
Start with Primer 1k when it is supplied in our countertop and flooring ECO epoxy resin kit.
Mix the Primer 1k and pour it into a paint tray.
Roll the Primer 1k onto the desired surface with a paint roller.
Allow the primer 1k to dry (approx. 8-12 hours) before applying the ECO system.

Continue with the Main Coat with ECO System

Use our ECO epoxy resin system (resin + hardener) for the main coating.
For the Nevada set Start by planning the quantity of resin (A) and hardener (B) that will be used for each color. To achieve a Nevada result like on our site, plan: 18% PLATINUM SILVER, 18% SAPPHIRE BLUE, 18% BRONZE BROWN, 18% HAVANA BRONZE, 18% PEARL WHITE, 10% SIGNAL WHITE.
To acchieve the Nevada effects, you need to proceed with multiple mixtures. 
Watch the instructional video and plan the colors you will use for each mixture of your Nevada set.
Mix some the resin (A) with the hardener (B) in a ratio of 2:1 (e.g., 64fl.oz. resin: 32fl.oz. hardener).
Pour the clear resin-hardener mixture into several cups and color each cup with one of the colors you want to use in this mixture of Nevada set. We recommend a color proportion of about 1.5% for pigments, e.g., 1g of metallic pigment per 2fl.oz. of epoxy.70g (2.5oz) of pigment per gallon of epoxy resin + hardener ECO system and about 1% for color pastes, e.g., 1g of ep color paste per 3fl.oz. of epoxy. 40g (1.5oz) of dye per gallon of epoxy resin + hardener ECO System.
Pour the pre-mixed colors of your Nevada set into a large cup as shown in the instructional video. Do not re-mix the colors of your Nevada set once they are poured into the same cup.
Pour the cup containing all the colors of your Nevada set onto the surface to be covered. Repeat steps until the resin and hardener have been completely used.
The main coating ECO system can be walked on after approx. 20 hours and ECO is completely chemically cured after approx. 7 days.
Info: Epoxy resin is sensitive to any kind of moisture during curing (risk of amine blush formation, i.e. white patches in the top layer). For this reason, we recommend that you avoid any contact between water and the epoxy until it has cured completely. For thin layers, cold temperatures (ambient, substrate, and resin temperatures below 70°F) and increased humidity, the time until the epoxy resin is fully cured may be extended.

How to use the ammonit kit for countertop?

chevronBottom

Instructions for Use Ammonit Countertop Kit

Start with the Primer 1K

We recommend a room, substrate, and product temperature of approx. 70°F when working with our countertop and flooring ECO epoxy resin kit.
the substrate should be dust-free, clean, and even. Level out holes, unevenness, and slopes in advance with a suitable levelling compound before applying our countertop and flooring ECO epoxy resin kit.
Start with Primer 1k when it is supplied in our countertop and flooring ECO epoxy resin kit.
Mix the Primer 1k and pour it into a paint tray.
Roll the Primer 1k onto the desired surface with a paint roller.
Allow the primer 1k to dry (approx. 8-12 hours) before applying the ECO system.

Continue with the Main Coat with ECO System

Use our ECO epoxy resin system (resin + hardener) for the main coating.
For the Ammonit set Start by planning the quantity of resin (A) and hardener (B) that will be used for each color. To achieve a Ammonit result like on our site, plan: 23,75% DARK BROWN, 23,75% BRONZE RED, 23,75% BRONZE BROWN, 23,75% PEARL WHITE, 5% SIGNAL WHITE.
To acchieve the Ammonit effects, you need to proceed with multiple mixtures. Watch the instructional video and plan the colors you will use for each mixture of your Ammonit set.

Mix some the resin (A) with the hardener (B) in a ratio of 2:1 (e.g., 64fl.oz. resin: 32fl.oz. hardener).
Pour the clear resin-hardener mixture into several cups and color each cup with one of the colors you want to use in this mixture of Ammonit set. We recommend a color proportion of about 1.5% for pigments, e.g., 1g of metallic pigment per 2fl.oz. of epoxy.70g (2.5oz) of pigment per gallon of epoxy resin + hardener ECO system and about 1% for color pastes, e.g., 1g of ep color paste per 3fl.oz. of epoxy. 40g (1.5oz) of dye per gallon of epoxy resin + hardener ECO System.
Pour the pre-mixed colors of your Ammonit set into a large cup as shown in the instructional video. Do not re-mix the colors of your Ammonit set once they are poured into the same cup.
Pour the cup containing all the colors of your Ammonit set onto the surface to be covered. Repeat steps until the resin and hardener have been completely used.
The main coating ECO system can be walked on after approx. 20 hours and ECO is completely chemically cured after approx. 7 days.
Info: Epoxy resin is sensitive to any kind of moisture during curing (risk of amine blush formation, i.e. white patches in the top layer). For this reason, we recommend that you avoid any contact between water and the epoxy until it has cured completely. For thin layers, cold temperatures (ambient, substrate, and resin temperatures below 70°F) and increased humidity, the time until the epoxy resin is fully cured may be extended.

How to use the rust gray kit for countertop?

chevronBottom

Instructions for Use Rust Gray Countertop Kit

Start with the Primer 1K

We recommend a room, substrate, and product temperature of approx. 70°F when working with our countertop and flooring ECO epoxy resin kit.
the substrate should be dust-free, clean, and even. Level out holes, unevenness, and slopes in advance with a suitable levelling compound before applying our countertop and flooring ECO epoxy resin kit.
Start with Primer 1k when it is supplied in our countertop and flooring ECO epoxy resin kit.
Mix the Primer 1k and pour it into a paint tray.
Roll the Primer 1k onto the desired surface with a paint roller.
Allow the primer 1k to dry (approx. 8-12 hours) before applying the ECO system.

Continue with the Main Coat with ECO System

Use our ECO epoxy resin system (resin + hardener) for the main coating.
For the Rust gray set Start by planning the quantity of resin (A) and hardener (B) that will be used for each color. To achieve a Rust gray result like on our site, plan: 25% SATIN GRAY, 25% FLAME COPPER, 25% BRONZE BROWN, 25% PEARL WHITE.
To acchieve the Rust gray effects, you need to proceed with multiple mixtures. Watch the instructional video and plan the colors you will use for each mixture of your Rust gray set.

Mix some the resin (A) with the hardener (B) in a ratio of 2:1 (e.g., 64fl.oz. resin: 32fl.oz. hardener).
Pour the clear resin-hardener mixture into several cups and color each cup with one of the colors you want to use in this mixture of Rust gray set. We recommend a color proportion of about 1.5% for pigments, e.g., 1g of metallic pigment per 2fl.oz. of epoxy.70g (2.5oz) of pigment per gallon of epoxy resin + hardener ECO system and about 1% for color pastes, e.g., 1g of ep color paste per 3fl.oz. of epoxy. 40g (1.5oz) of dye per gallon of epoxy resin + hardener ECO System.
Pour the pre-mixed colors of your Rust gray set into a large cup as shown in the instructional video. Do not re-mix the colors of your Rust gray set once they are poured into the same cup.
Pour the cup containing all the colors of your Rust gray set onto the surface to be covered. Repeat steps until the resin and hardener have been completely used.
The main coating ECO system can be walked on after approx. 20 hours and ECO is completely chemically cured after approx. 7 days.
Info: Epoxy resin is sensitive to any kind of moisture during curing (risk of amine blush formation, i.e. white patches in the top layer). For this reason, we recommend that you avoid any contact between water and the epoxy until it has cured completely. For thin layers, cold temperatures (ambient, substrate, and resin temperatures below 70°F) and increased humidity, the time until the epoxy resin is fully cured may be extended.

How to use the moon kit for countertop?

chevronBottom

Instructions for Use Moon Countertop Kit

Start with the Primer 1K

We recommend a room, substrate, and product temperature of approx. 70°F when working with our countertop and flooring ECO epoxy resin kit.
the substrate should be dust-free, clean, and even. Level out holes, unevenness, and slopes in advance with a suitable levelling compound before applying our countertop and flooring ECO epoxy resin kit.
Start with Primer 1k when it is supplied in our countertop and flooring ECO epoxy resin kit.
Mix the Primer 1k and pour it into a paint tray.
Roll the Primer 1k onto the desired surface with a paint roller.
Allow the primer 1k to dry (approx. 8-12 hours) before applying the ECO system.

Continue with the Main Coat with ECO System

Use our ECO epoxy resin system (resin + hardener) for the main coating.
For the Moon set Start by planning the quantity of resin (A) and hardener (B) that will be used for each color. To achieve a Moon result like on our site, plan: 30% SATIN GRAY, 30% PLATINUM SILVER, 30% PEARL WHITE, 10% SIGNAL WHITE.
To acchieve the Moon effects, you need to proceed with multiple mixtures. Watch the instructional video and plan the colors you will use for each mixture of your Moon set.

Mix some the resin (A) with the hardener (B) in a ratio of 2:1 (e.g., 64fl.oz. resin: 32fl.oz. hardener).
Pour the clear resin-hardener mixture into several cups and color each cup with one of the colors you want to use in this mixture of Moon set. We recommend a color proportion of about 1.5% for pigments, e.g., 1g of metallic pigment per 2fl.oz. of epoxy.70g (2.5oz) of pigment per gallon of epoxy resin + hardener ECO system and about 1% for color pastes, e.g., 1g of ep color paste per 3fl.oz. of epoxy. 40g (1.5oz) of dye per gallon of epoxy resin + hardener ECO System.
Pour the pre-mixed colors of your Moon set into a large cup as shown in the instructional video. Do not re-mix the colors of your Moon set once they are poured into the same cup.
Pour the cup containing all the colors of your Moon set onto the surface to be covered. Repeat steps until the resin and hardener have been completely used.
The main coating ECO system can be walked on after approx. 20 hours and ECO is completely chemically cured after approx. 7 days.
Info: Epoxy resin is sensitive to any kind of moisture during curing (risk of amine blush formation, i.e. white patches in the top layer). For this reason, we recommend that you avoid any contact between water and the epoxy until it has cured completely. For thin layers, cold temperatures (ambient, substrate, and resin temperatures below 70°F) and increased humidity, the time until the epoxy resin is fully cured may be extended.

How to use the spice brown kit for countertop?

chevronBottom

Instructions for Use Spice Brown Countertop Kit

Start with the Primer 1K

We recommend a room, substrate, and product temperature of approx. 70°F when working with our countertop and flooring ECO epoxy resin kit.
the substrate should be dust-free, clean, and even. Level out holes, unevenness, and slopes in advance with a suitable levelling compound before applying our countertop and flooring ECO epoxy resin kit.
Start with Primer 1k when it is supplied in our countertop and flooring ECO epoxy resin kit.
Mix the Primer 1k and pour it into a paint tray.
Roll the Primer 1k onto the desired surface with a paint roller.
Allow the primer 1k to dry (approx. 8-12 hours) before applying the ECO system.

Continue with the Main Coat with ECO System

Use our ECO epoxy resin system (resin + hardener) for the main coating.
For the Spice brown set Start by planning the quantity of resin (A) and hardener (B) that will be used for each color. To achieve a Spice brown result like on our site, plan: 30% BRONZE BROWN, 30% HAVANA BRONZE, 30% PEARL WHITE, 10% JET BLACK.
To acchieve the Spice brown effects, you need to proceed with multiple mixtures. Watch the instructional video and plan the colors you will use for each mixture of your Spice brown set.

Mix some the resin (A) with the hardener (B) in a ratio of 2:1 (e.g., 64fl.oz. resin: 32fl.oz. hardener).
Pour the clear resin-hardener mixture into several cups and color each cup with one of the colors you want to use in this mixture of Spice brown set. We recommend a color proportion of about 1.5% for pigments, e.g., 1g of metallic pigment per 2fl.oz. of epoxy.70g (2.5oz) of pigment per gallon of epoxy resin + hardener ECO system and about 1% for color pastes, e.g., 1g of ep color paste per 3fl.oz. of epoxy. 40g (1.5oz) of dye per gallon of epoxy resin + hardener ECO System.
Pour the pre-mixed colors of your Spice brown set into a large cup as shown in the instructional video. Do not re-mix the colors of your Spice brown set once they are poured into the same cup.
Pour the cup containing all the colors of your Spice brown set onto the surface to be covered. Repeat steps until the resin and hardener have been completely used.
The main coating ECO system can be walked on after approx. 20 hours and ECO is completely chemically cured after approx. 7 days.
Info: Epoxy resin is sensitive to any kind of moisture during curing (risk of amine blush formation, i.e. white patches in the top layer). For this reason, we recommend that you avoid any contact between water and the epoxy until it has cured completely. For thin layers, cold temperatures (ambient, substrate, and resin temperatures below 70°F) and increased humidity, the time until the epoxy resin is fully cured may be extended.

How to use the onyx kit for countertop?

chevronBottom

Instructions for Use Onyx Countertop Kit

Start with the Primer 1K

We recommend a room, substrate, and product temperature of approx. 70°F when working with our countertop and flooring ECO epoxy resin kit.
the substrate should be dust-free, clean, and even. Level out holes, unevenness, and slopes in advance with a suitable levelling compound before applying our countertop and flooring ECO epoxy resin kit.
Start with Primer 1k when it is supplied in our countertop and flooring ECO epoxy resin kit.
Mix the Primer 1k and pour it into a paint tray.
Roll the Primer 1k onto the desired surface with a paint roller.
Allow the primer 1k to dry (approx. 8-12 hours) before applying the ECO system.

Continue with the Main Coat with ECO System

Use our ECO epoxy resin system (resin + hardener) for the main coating.
For the Onyx set Start by planning the quantity of resin (A) and hardener (B) that will be used for each color. To achieve a Onyx result like on our site, plan: 45% INTENSE ANTHRACITE, 45% PEARL WHITE, 5% JET BLACK, 5% SIGNAL WHITE.
To acchieve the Onyx effects, you need to proceed with multiple mixtures. Watch the instructional video and plan the colors you will use for each mixture of your Onyx set.

Mix some the resin (A) with the hardener (B) in a ratio of 2:1 (e.g., 64fl.oz. resin: 32fl.oz. hardener).
Pour the clear resin-hardener mixture into several cups and color each cup with one of the colors you want to use in this mixture of Onyx set. We recommend a color proportion of about 1.5% for pigments, e.g., 1g of metallic pigment per 2fl.oz. of epoxy.70g (2.5oz) of pigment per gallon of epoxy resin + hardener ECO system and about 1% for color pastes, e.g., 1g of ep color paste per 3fl.oz. of epoxy. 40g (1.5oz) of dye per gallon of epoxy resin + hardener ECO System.
Pour the pre-mixed colors of your Onyx set into a large cup as shown in the instructional video. Do not re-mix the colors of your Onyx set once they are poured into the same cup.
Pour the cup containing all the colors of your Onyx set onto the surface to be covered. Repeat steps until the resin and hardener have been completely used.
The main coating ECO system can be walked on after approx. 20 hours and ECO is completely chemically cured after approx. 7 days.
Info: Epoxy resin is sensitive to any kind of moisture during curing (risk of amine blush formation, i.e. white patches in the top layer). For this reason, we recommend that you avoid any contact between water and the epoxy until it has cured completely. For thin layers, cold temperatures (ambient, substrate, and resin temperatures below 70°F) and increased humidity, the time until the epoxy resin is fully cured may be extended.

How to use the granit kit for countertop?

chevronBottom

Instructions for Use Granit Countertop Kit

Start with the Primer 1K

We recommend a room, substrate, and product temperature of approx. 70°F when working with our countertop and flooring ECO epoxy resin kit.
the substrate should be dust-free, clean, and even. Level out holes, unevenness, and slopes in advance with a suitable levelling compound before applying our countertop and flooring ECO epoxy resin kit.
Start with Primer 1k when it is supplied in our countertop and flooring ECO epoxy resin kit.
Mix the Primer 1k and pour it into a paint tray.
Roll the Primer 1k onto the desired surface with a paint roller.
Allow the primer 1k to dry (approx. 8-12 hours) before applying the ECO system.

Continue with the Main Coat with ECO System

Use our ECO epoxy resin system (resin + hardener) for the main coating.
For the Granit set Start by planning the quantity of resin (A) and hardener (B) that will be used for each color. To achieve a Granit result like on our site, plan: 45% PLATINUM SILVER, 45% PEARL WHITE, 5% JET BLACK, 5% SIGNAL WHITE.
To acchieve the Granit effects, you need to proceed with multiple mixtures. Watch the instructional video and plan the colors you will use for each mixture of your Granit set.

Mix some the resin (A) with the hardener (B) in a ratio of 2:1 (e.g., 64fl.oz. resin: 32fl.oz. hardener).
Pour the clear resin-hardener mixture into several cups and color each cup with one of the colors you want to use in this mixture of Granit set. We recommend a color proportion of about 1.5% for pigments, e.g., 1g of metallic pigment per 2fl.oz. of epoxy.70g (2.5oz) of pigment per gallon of epoxy resin + hardener ECO system and about 1% for color pastes, e.g., 1g of ep color paste per 3fl.oz. of epoxy. 40g (1.5oz) of dye per gallon of epoxy resin + hardener ECO System.
Pour the pre-mixed colors of your Granit set into a large cup as shown in the instructional video. Do not re-mix the colors of your Granit set once they are poured into the same cup.
Pour the cup containing all the colors of your Granit set onto the surface to be covered. Repeat steps until the resin and hardener have been completely used.
The main coating ECO system can be walked on after approx. 20 hours and ECO is completely chemically cured after approx. 7 days.
Info: Epoxy resin is sensitive to any kind of moisture during curing (risk of amine blush formation, i.e. white patches in the top layer). For this reason, we recommend that you avoid any contact between water and the epoxy until it has cured completely. For thin layers, cold temperatures (ambient, substrate, and resin temperatures below 70°F) and increased humidity, the time until the epoxy resin is fully cured may be extended.

How to use the rust black kit for countertop?

chevronBottom

Instructions for Use Rust Black Countertop Kit

Start with the Primer 1K

We recommend a room, substrate, and product temperature of approx. 70°F when working with our countertop and flooring ECO epoxy resin kit.
the substrate should be dust-free, clean, and even. Level out holes, unevenness, and slopes in advance with a suitable levelling compound before applying our countertop and flooring ECO epoxy resin kit.
Start with Primer 1k when it is supplied in our countertop and flooring ECO epoxy resin kit.
Mix the Primer 1k and pour it into a paint tray.
Roll the Primer 1k onto the desired surface with a paint roller.
Allow the primer 1k to dry (approx. 8-12 hours) before applying the ECO system.

Continue with the Main Coat with ECO System

Use our ECO epoxy resin system (resin + hardener) for the main coating.
For the Rust black set Start by planning the quantity of resin (A) and hardener (B) that will be used for each color. To achieve a Rust black result like on our site, plan: 45% BRONZE BROWN, 45% PEARL WHITE, 10% JET BLACK.
To acchieve the Rust black effects, you need to proceed with multiple mixtures. Watch the instructional video and plan the colors you will use for each mixture of your Rust black set.

Mix some the resin (A) with the hardener (B) in a ratio of 2:1 (e.g., 64fl.oz. resin: 32fl.oz. hardener).
Pour the clear resin-hardener mixture into several cups and color each cup with one of the colors you want to use in this mixture of Rust black set. We recommend a color proportion of about 1.5% for pigments, e.g., 1g of metallic pigment per 2fl.oz. of epoxy.70g (2.5oz) of pigment per gallon of epoxy resin + hardener ECO system and about 1% for color pastes, e.g., 1g of ep color paste per 3fl.oz. of epoxy. 40g (1.5oz) of dye per gallon of epoxy resin + hardener ECO System.
Pour the pre-mixed colors of your Rust black set into a large cup as shown in the instructional video. Do not re-mix the colors of your Rust black set once they are poured into the same cup.
Pour the cup containing all the colors of your Rust black set onto the surface to be covered. Repeat steps until the resin and hardener have been completely used.
The main coating ECO system can be walked on after approx. 20 hours and ECO is completely chemically cured after approx. 7 days.
Info: Epoxy resin is sensitive to any kind of moisture during curing (risk of amine blush formation, i.e. white patches in the top layer). For this reason, we recommend that you avoid any contact between water and the epoxy until it has cured completely. For thin layers, cold temperatures (ambient, substrate, and resin temperatures below 70°F) and increased humidity, the time until the epoxy resin is fully cured may be extended.

Can I apply the ECO resin epoxy flooring set to prevent water rising by capillarity?

chevronBottom

No, our epoxy resin from the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system can’t be used on a floor having water rising by capillarity. You must solve the issue causing the water to raise before applying our ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system.

Can I apply your paint on top of your epoxy resin from the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system?

chevronBottom

Yes, you can paint on our epoxy resin of the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system, we recommend waiting until full chemical curing before painting and sanding the epoxy resin of the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system before painting on it. 

What paint or resin can I use over vinyl floor? What paint or resin can I use over vinyl sticker floors?

chevronBottom

To paint a vinyl floor, you can use our tile paint 2k. Please note that painting vinyl with tile paint 2k will only give a new color and not hide any imperfections.
You can use our ECO system for floors on a vinyl floor.

Are UV resin and resin resistant to UV the same thing?

chevronBottom

No, UV resins are resins curing under a UV lamp. EPODEX doesn’t have UV resin. 
Resin resistant to UV are resin that have UV additive to protect against yellowing.

Can you apply epoxy resin ECO flooring set on tiled floor?

chevronBottom

Yes, you can apply epoxy resin ECO flooring set to tiled floors, but it is recommended to first level the grout and then use our ECO flooring set. If you wish to only paint the tiled floor with resin, we recommend using our tile paint 2k. 

Do you have an epoxy flooring with a white base and highlight? Do you have an epoxy countertop set with white base and highlight?
Do you have a white epoxy floor with marble black?

chevronBottom

We do not have a white based epoxy resin ECO flooring/countertop with highlight. We do not recommend a white based epoxy resin ECO flooring/counter as the resin yellows. 

How many minutes do you need to mix epoxy resin?

chevronBottom

We recommend mixing the epoxy resin until the mixture if free of streak. There is no specific time to mix the resin, as it depends on the mixing speed and the quantity being mixed. Just sure that the epoxy resin mixture A and B is free of streaks, pour it in another mixing cup and mix again before use.

Do you have a BPA-free certificate for your epoxy? 

chevronBottom

We don’t have a certificate as we are only selling the products in their liquid state the epoxy is free of BPA after proper chemical curing.

Do you have high viscosity epoxy resin?

chevronBottom

Our epoxy resins from the ECO and PRO range are self-levelling low viscosity resins. We do not have epoxy resin with high viscosity; it is possible to let the epoxy resin from the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system thicken before using but it is important to closely monitor the epoxy resin to make sure it doesn’t overheat.

Can I use bonding primer under my epoxy resin set on tiles?

chevronBottom

We do not recommend applying the bonding primer under the epoxy resin set. To achieve a levelled finish on tiles with epoxy resin, we recommend planning more epoxy resin to fill in the tiles joint or to do a self-levelling compound over the tiles before applying our epoxy resin set.

I prepared too much epoxy resin. How long can I store the mixture of epoxy resin and hardener?

chevronBottom

You need to use the mixed epoxy resin from the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system immediately. Once mixed, the epoxy resin of the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system cannot be stored.

Can I use your ECO System to seal or protect the tank of my vehicle? Is the epoxy resin ECO fuel-resistant?

chevronBottom

Yes, you can use the ECO System to seal or protect your vehicle’s tank.
The ECO system is resistant to fuels once it is fully chemically cured (after 7 days at 20 °C).

What is the thickness of the epoxy on your epoxy resin Flooring ECO set?

chevronBottom

The layer thickness of the epoxy resin flooring ECO set is 1/16“. 

What is the right product to protect a laminated worktop?

chevronBottom

To protect a laminated worktop, countertop or table, we recommend our epoxy resin for countertop set.

Do you have an epoxy resin flooring set with a thickness of 1/8”?

chevronBottom

No, we only have an epoxy resin set with a thickness of 1/16“. If you wish to apply more than 1/16“ epoxy resin on your floor, we recommend that you buy the ECO System individually.

Can I pour an epoxy resin floor ECO system 1/8” thickness at once?

chevronBottom

When pouring an epoxy resin floor with our 1K Primer as a primer, it is possible to pour up to 3/8“ thickness at once. When pouring an epoxy floor WITHOUT our 1K Primer as a primer, we recommend pouring your epoxy floor in 2 layers. The first layer of an epoxy flooring without 1k primer, should be about 1/32” thick to seal the floor. Let the first layer of the epoxy flooring cure before applying the 2nd layer with the rest of the epoxy.

Do you see the different layers of epoxy resin on the floor?

chevronBottom

You’ll not see the different layers of epoxy resin on the floor.

My resin says 3/8“ but my hardener says something else, how thick can I pour?

chevronBottom

The maximal layer thickness is determined by the hardener; you can pour the thickness written on your hardener.

What is the right product for repairing rainwater and drinking water tanks?

chevronBottom

To repair water tanks, you can use our epoxy resin system for laminating – ECO System. If the water tank has a hole, we recommend reinforcing it with fibreglass and our ECO System.

Can I use your epoxy resin ECO Flooring set to pour more than 1/16“ thick?

chevronBottom

No, we do not recommend using our epoxy resin ECO flooring set to pour more than 1/16“. To pour a floor with epoxy resin ECO with a thickness of more than 1/16“, we recommend buying the epoxy and primer individually.

Why can’t I use the ECO flooring set for thickness of more than 1/16“?

chevronBottom

You can’t use the ECO flooring set to pour more than 1/16“ thickness because when selecting a bigger quantity, you will end up with too much primer and not enough epoxy resin ECO.

Can I use the ECO Flooring set to pour less than 1/16“ thickness?

chevronBottom

We do not recommend pouring less than 1/16“ thickness with our ECO flooring set, as it can cause curing problems. 

Can I use your epoxy resin ECO countertop set to pour more than 1/16“ thick?

chevronBottom

No, we do not recommend using our epoxy resin ECO countertop set to pour more than 1/16“. To pour a countertop with epoxy resin ECO with a thickness of more than 1/16“, we recommend buying epoxy and primer individually.

Why can’t I use the ECO countertop set for thickness of more than 1/16“?

chevronBottom

You can’t use the ECO countertop set to pour more than 1/16“ thickness because when selecting a bigger quantity, you will end up with too much primer and not enough epoxy resin ECO.

Can I use the ECO countertop set to pour less than 1/16“ thickness?

chevronBottom

We do not recommend pouring less than 1/16“ thickness with our ECO countertop set, as it can cause curing problems. 

How long is an epoxy resin floor or countertop good? 

chevronBottom

The epoxy resin is made to last. The epoxy resin can have superficial scratches which can be polished away easily. 

Do you have a matte epoxy resin?

chevronBottom

No, we do not have a matte epoxy resin. It is possible to sand the epoxy resin without polishing to achieve a matte finish or apply a matte polyurethane topcoat.

Can I put the epoxy flooring set ECO on tiles?

chevronBottom

Yes, you can put the epoxy resin flooring set ECO on tiles. Please note that we do recommend levelling the tiles before applying the epoxy resin flooring set ECO or planning more epoxy resin ECO to fill out the grout between the tiles. 

Do you have a UV resin?

chevronBottom

We do not have any resin drying under UV lamp no. Our epoxy resin are curing be chemical reaction between the resin and hardener.

Will your epoxy resin cure faster under UV lamp?

chevronBottom

No, our epoxy resin will not cure faster with a UV lamp.

Can I apply epoxy resin on furniture?

chevronBottom

Yes, you can apply epoxy resin on furniture but please note that it is very difficult to achieve the vertical part with our epoxy resin. 

Can I add micro glass beads into the epoxy resin to achieve a non-slip finish?

chevronBottom

To achieve a non-slip finish, we recommend either applying a polyurethane topcoat with 1% micro glass beads or sprinkling micro glass beads on top of the still liquid epoxy resin flooring ECO. 

Do you have a glossy topcoat to apply on epoxy resin?

chevronBottom

Yes, our 2K PU Topcoat in glossy can be applied to epoxy resin to give it a glossy finish.

I don’t want to polish my sanded epoxy resin, do you have a product I can put on top?

chevronBottom

Yes, you can apply our 2K PU Topcoat on top of your sanded epoxy resin to give it back its glossy finish without polishing.

Can I apply epoxy resin on glass?

chevronBottom

Yes, it is possible to apply the epoxy resin of the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system on glass. To apply epoxy resin on glass, the glass must be sanded and clean. We recommend applying a silicone edge to prevent the epoxy resin from running down from the glass. 

Can I apply epoxy resin in areas exposed to water and humidity? Can I apply epoxy in my sauna? Can I use epoxy in my bathroom?

chevronBottom

Yes, after complete chemical curing epoxy resin is resistant to water and humidity changes. 

What are the white lumps inside my epoxy resin?

chevronBottom

Due to colder temperatures during storage or transport, the A component (epoxy resin) may crystallize. This has the effect of a cloudy, milky appearance. White residues may also appear on the rim or bottom of the container.
No need to worry! You can easily reverse the crystallization. We recommend that you check in advance whether crystallization has occurred. To do this, pour some resin into a mixing cup. If you notice traces of crystallization, please place the container in a boiling water bath. A few minutes are sufficient to reverse the crystallization. If this does not happen after a few minutes, extend the time in the water bath, and increase the temperature. Alternatively, you can place the containers on a heater and shake them repeatedly in between. Then let the product cool down to room temperature. Then the material can be processed as usual.

What are the white streaks on my epoxy resin?

chevronBottom

The white streaks on epoxy resin are carbamates that form when moisture encounters uncured material. You can easily sand the carbamate down and then polish the resin back up.
To bring your sanded epoxy to a high gloss, use our sandpaper.
Start with a grit of P100 and gradually sand up to a P3,000 grit. If you wish, you can also sand up to a P10,000 grit until you have achieved the desired effect. Finally, polish your surface with EPODEX Resin Polish.

Which material is incompatible with epoxy resin?

chevronBottom

The epoxy resin adheres to almost all surfaces and materials. Epoxy resin doesn’t stick to silicone and polypropylene. We recommend sanding (roughening) smooth surfaces before applying epoxy resin to ensure a good adhesion.

Is your epoxy BPA and VOC free?

chevronBottom

The ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system are BPA-free, but only the PRO serie is VOC-free.

Which mixing containers are suitable for epoxy resin?

chevronBottom

Silicone or polypropylene mixing containers are best when mixing epoxy resin because they can be reused after the residue has been cured. The material does not bond with the epoxy resin of the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system or the 2K paints, so you can squeeze out the residues after curing.

Is epoxy resin resistant to chemicals, acids, petrol, oil, etc.?

chevronBottom

Our epoxy resins are resistant to almost all chemicals, petrol and oil. However, due to a large number of chemicals, we recommend testing the resistance selectively in advance. Various acids can dissolve the surface. We recommend a test in advance.

Is your epoxy resin UV-resistant or UV-stabilized?

chevronBottom

No epoxy resin is 100% UV resistant. However, by adding UV stabilizers it is possible to obtain a very crystal-clear resin. Compared to the ECO system, our PRO systems offer the highest possible UV protection, which largely prevents yellowing. Nevertheless, it must be considered that no epoxy resin is completely UV-resistant, and yellowing might always occur.

How can I prevent epoxy from yellowing?

chevronBottom

It is not possible to prevent epoxy resin from yellowing. We recommend using a colorants to color the epoxy resin and hide the yellowing.

Will a PU topcoat prevent my epoxy resin from yellowing?

chevronBottom

No, applying the 2K PU Topcoat will not prevent the epoxy resin from yellowing. Applying the 2K PU Topcoat will slow down, minimize yellowing but not stop it completely.

How can I increase the scratch resistance of my epoxy resin?

chevronBottom

You can increase the scratch resistance of your epoxy resin by applying our 2K PU Topcoat.

How can I increase the heat resistance of my epoxy resin?

chevronBottom

You can increase the heat resistance of your epoxy resin by applying our 2K PU Topcoat.

What paint can I use to paint over epoxy resin?

chevronBottom

You can use our 2K PU paint to paint over epoxy resin. It is also possible to use acrylic-based paint to paint over epoxy resin. 

How to make epoxy mortar or epoxy filler?

chevronBottom

Our 2K Levelling Compound can be used as an epoxy mortar. Epoxy putty is a ready-made putty. We do not sell epoxy putty.

Is your epoxy pre-colored?

chevronBottom

Our ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system aren’t pre-colored, giving you the opportunity to customize your epoxy to your need. 

How can I remove bubbles in my epoxy resin?

chevronBottom

If the ECO system, PRO system, and PRO+ system are not yet cured, the addition of heat will cause the bubbles to rise. You can therefore use a hairdryer, for example, and apply heat to your epoxy resin project at a slight distance. If the resin has already cured, the bubbles can no longer be removed.

Can I put epoxy resin in the dishwasher?

chevronBottom

Yes, if the epoxy resin has been made heat resistant with a suitable product.

Can I cast fresh flowers inside the epoxy resin?

chevronBottom

No, the flowers must be dried and sealed, for example with a layer of EPODEX ECO epoxy resin. To preserve the color, you can soak the flowers in silicate salts.

How can I prevent the metallic pigment from sinking inside my epoxy resin?

chevronBottom

When creating patterns, it is important to work at the gelling point of the epoxy resin. This is reached when the consistency of the epoxy resin is a solid gel.

What can be the reason why my epoxy resin doesn’t cure?

chevronBottom

The following problem can cause the epoxy resin to not cure:

  • Not stirred without streaks
  • Mixed by volume and not by kg
  • Not repotted
  • Scraped from the edge or bottom
  • Ambient temperature too low
  • Wrong mixing ratio
  • Not weighed, but simply tipped out A and added B - due to different viscosities, not all come out of the container
  • Too much pigment
  • Foreign pigment

Why do some parts of my epoxy resin remain sticky?

chevronBottom

If the mixing ratio is followed exactly and resin and hardener are mixed evenly and then repotted, the epoxy resin will cure fully. The following problem can cause partial curing problem:

  • Not stirred without streaks - means unconnected poured material.
  • Scraped from the rim of the cup
  • Not repotted

Do I need to put a color in the primer under my epoxy resin? 

chevronBottom

If you order an Epoxy Resin Countertop set or Epoxy Resin Flooring set, you’ll receive 1K PRIMER which will either be pre-tinted in grey or you’ll receive WB PIGMENT to add into the 1K PRIMER untinted. Never adding anything else than WB PIGMENT to the 1K PRIMER to dye it.

Why is my marble spray not spraying?

chevronBottom

The marble effect spray has a plastic safety washer under the sprayer that needs to be removed out before use. 

Do you have a resin that can come into contact with food?

chevronBottom

Yes, our epoxy resin from the ECO and PRO series can be put in contact with food after full chemical curing. 

Can I apply epoxy resin at temperature over 70°F?

chevronBottom

We do not recommend applying our epoxy resin from the ECO and PRO series at more than 70°F. The recommended working temperature of the ECO and PRO series is 67-70°F. 

Can I pour the epoxy resin at 71°F or 72°F?

chevronBottom

No, we do not recommend pouring epoxy resin from the ECO or PRO series at more than 70°F. Pouring epoxy resin at 71°F or 72°F can lead to overheating. 

Can I put my epoxy resin in the dishwasher?

chevronBottom

No, we do not recommend putting epoxy resin from the ECO and PRO series in the dishwasher even after full chemical curing. 

How long can I store the epoxy resin once the bottles are opened?

chevronBottom

The epoxy resin from the ECO and PRO series can be stored up to 6 months after opening. 

Can I mix the resin A-component PRO with the hardener B-component PRO?

chevronBottom

Yes, you can mix the resin A-component PRO with the hardener B-component PRO.

Can I mix the resin A-component PRO with the hardener B-component PRO+?

chevronBottom

Yes, you can mix the resin A-component PRO with the hardener B-component PRO+.

Can I mix the resin A-component PRO with the hardener B-component ECO?

chevronBottom

No, you can’t mix the resin A-component PRO with the hardener B-component ECO.

Can I mix the resin A-component ECO with the hardener B-component ECO?

chevronBottom

Yes, you can mix the resin A-component ECO with the hardener B-component ECO.

Can I mix the resin A-component ECO with the hardener B-component PRO?

chevronBottom

No, you can’t mix the resin A-component ECO with the hardener B-component PRO.

Can I mix the resin A-component ECO with the hardener B-component PRO+?

chevronBottom

No, you can’t mix the resin A-component ECO with the hardener B-component PRO+.

How long do I need to wait until I can apply the 2K PU Topcoat on the ECO and PRO series?

chevronBottom

We recommend waiting until full chemical curing before applying the 2K PU Topcoat on epoxy resin from the ECO and PRO series. The full chemical curing of the ECO System and PRO system Is 7days. The full chemical curing of the PRO+ System is 14 days.

Is the 1K PRIMER included in the Epoxy Resin Set for Floors?

chevronBottom

Yes, the 1K PRIMER is included in all the Epoxy Resin Set for floors, except in the transparent one.

Is the 1K PRIMER included in the Epoxy Resin Set for Countertops?

chevronBottom

Yes, the 1K PRIMER is included in all the Epoxy Resin ECO Set for countertops, except in the transparent one.

Can I apply DEEP PRIMER under epoxy resin?

chevronBottom

No, we do not recommend using DEEP PRIMER under epoxy resin. 

Is the primer included with the resin flooring set?

chevronBottom

Yes, the primer is always included with the ECO Flooring set, except when ordering transparent.

Can I apply the epoxy resin for floor coating with a brush?

chevronBottom

We do not recommend applying our Epoxy Resin ECO Flooring Set with a brush. We recommend applying the Flooring Set with a squeegee or foam roller.

What is included in the Marble Epoxy Resin Flooring Set? What is included in the marble set?

chevronBottom

The Marble Epoxy Resin Flooring Set includes the 1K PRIMER, WB Pigment to dye the 1K PRIMER, the marble spray, the ECO resin, and ECO Hardener in clear. 

Which colorants can I use inside my epoxy when incorporating LEDs?

chevronBottom

We only recommend our transparent drop-in colorants when working with LEDs inside epoxy resin. 

Can I apply epoxy resin on Plexiglas?

chevronBottom

We do not recommend using epoxy resin to coat Plexiglas as epoxy doesn’t stick well to plastics.

Is PRO+ System better than the PRO System?

chevronBottom

No, the PRO System has the same quality as the PRO+ System. Both resins have the same transparency; they only differ in the layer thickness you can apply.

Is the marble spray a powder?

chevronBottom

No, the marble spray is a spray paint that sprays fine, web-like strand resembling the natural veining of marble.

Do you have marbling powder? Do you have a powder to do marble effect?

chevronBottom

No, we do not have marbling powder. We only have a marble spray

How to use the epoxy resin marble set?
how to use the ANTHRACITE GREY & MARBLE BLACK - Epoxy Resin for Surfaces ?
how to use the ANTHRACITE GREY & MARBLE WHITE - Epoxy Resin for Surfaces ?
how to use the AZURE BLUE & MARBLE BLACK - Epoxy Resin for Surfaces ?
how to use the AZURE BLUE & MARBLE WHITE - Epoxy Resin for Surfaces ?
how to use the CONCRETE GREY & MARBLE BLACK - Epoxy Resin for Surfaces ?
how to use the CONCRETE GREY & MARBLE WHITE - Epoxy Resin for Surfaces ?
how to use the IRON GREY & MARBLE BLACK - Epoxy Resin for Surfaces ?
how to use the IRON GREY & MARBLE WHITE - Epoxy Resin for Surfaces ?
how to use the PEBBLE GREY & MARBLE BLACK - Epoxy Resin for Surfaces ?
how to use the PEBBLE GREY & MARBLE WHITE - Epoxy Resin for Surfaces ?
how to use the OCHRE YELLOW & MARBLE BLACK - Epoxy Resin for Surfaces ?
how to use the OCHRE YELLOW & MARBLE WHITE - Epoxy Resin for Surfaces ?
how to use the OLIVE GREY & MARBLE BLACK - Epoxy Resin for Surfaces ?
how to use the OLIVE GREY & MARBLE WHITE - Epoxy Resin for Surfaces ?
how to use the PASTEL TURQUOISE & MARBLE BLACK - Epoxy Resin for Surfaces ?
how to use the PASTEL TURQUOISE & MARBLE WHITE - Epoxy Resin for Surfaces ?
how to use the JET BLACK & MARBLE WHITE - Epoxy Resin for Surfaces ?
how to use the SILVER GREY & MARBLE BLACK - Epoxy Resin for Surfaces ?
how to use the SILVER GREY & MARBLE WHITE - Epoxy Resin for Surfaces ?
how to use the TERRA BROWN & MARBLE BLACK - Epoxy Resin for Surfaces ?
how to use the TERRA BROWN & MARBLE WHITE - Epoxy Resin for Surfaces ?
how to use the ANTHRACITE GREY & MARBLE WHITE - Epoxy Resin Floor to Pour on ?
how to use the CONCRETE GREY & MARBLE WHITE - Epoxy Resin Floor to Pour on ?
how to use the IRON GREY & MARBLE WHITE - Epoxy Resin Floor to Pour on ?
how to use the PEBBLE GREY & MARBLE BLACK - Epoxy Resin Floor to Pour on ?
how to use the OCHRE YELLOW & MARBLE BLACK - Epoxy Resin Floor to Pour on ?
how to use the OCHRE YELLOW & MARBLE WHITE - Epoxy Resin Floor to Pour on ?
how to use the OLIVE GREY & MARBLE BLACK - Epoxy Resin Floor to Pour on ?
how to use the OLIVE GREY & MARBLE WHITE - Epoxy Resin Floor to Pour on ?
how to use the JET BLACK & MARBLE WHITE - Epoxy Resin Floor to Pour on ?
how to use the SILVER GREY & MARBLE BLACK - Epoxy Resin Floor to Pour on ?

chevronBottom

Instructions for use Marble Flooring / Marble Countertop

Start with the Primer 1K

We recommend a room, substrate, and product temperature of approx. 70°F when working with our countertop and flooring ECO epoxy resin kit.
the substrate should be dust-free, clean, and even. Level out holes, unevenness, and slopes in advance with a suitable levelling compound before applying our countertop and flooring ECO epoxy resin kit.
In the marble epoxy resin set with ECO System, the 1K Primer must be dyed. Dye the 1K PRIMER from the marble epoxy resin set with our supplied WB PIGMENT paste and mix well. We recommend a color proportion of approx. 10%, for example, 100g color paste to 1kg 1K PRIMER. It is very important to never add the WB PIGMENT in the epoxy resin from the ECO and PRO series.
Pour the colored primer 1k into a paint tray after mixing.
Roll the colored primer 1k onto the desired surface with a paint roller.
Allow the primer 1k to dry (approx. 8-12 hours).
Spray the desired marbling on the primed surface with the Marble Effect Spray and allow it to dry.

Continue with the Main Coat with ECO System

Use our ECO epoxy resin system (resin + hardener) for the main coating of your marble set.
Mix the resin (A) with the hardener (B) in a ratio of 2:1 (e.g., 2gal A + 1gal B).
Ideally, transfer the resin-hardener mixture to a clean mixing bucket and stir again. This will ensure that the resin (A) and hardener (B) are completely mixed together.
Pour the resin-hardener mixture ECO system onto the substrate immediately after mixing, as the product can boil up in the mixing bucket.
The main coating of ECO System can be walked on/touched after approx. 20 hours and ECO is completely chemically cured after approx. 7 days.
Info: Epoxy resin is sensitive to any kind of moisture during curing (risk of amine blush formation, i.e. white patches in the top layer). For this reason, we recommend that you avoid any contact between water and the epoxy until it has cured completely. For thin layers, cold temperatures (ambient, substrate, and resin temperatures below 70°F) and increased humidity, the time until the epoxy resin is fully cured may be extended.

Can I use Epoxy Resin outdoors?

chevronBottom

We do not recommend using epoxy resin of the ECO and PRO series outside as the temperatures and humidity levels can’t be controlled.

Which epoxy resin do you recommend for a thin layer?

chevronBottom

We recommend our ECO System or PRO System when applying a thin layer.

Do I need to sand the epoxy resin before applying the 2K PU Topcoat? 

chevronBottom

It’s not necessary to sand the epoxy resin before applying the 2K PU Topcoat. The epoxy resin has to be totally cured before applying the 2K PU Topcoat. If you need to fix some imperfections, you can sand to the P600/P800 before applying the 2K PU Topcoat. 

Are your epoxy resins bio-based?
Do your epoxy resins contain bio-based content?
Are your epoxy resins made from renewable or bio-based sources?

chevronBottom

Our epoxy resin are not bio-based. 

What happens to these resins at the end of their life cycle, and what impact do they have on the environment?
How are these resins typically disposed of or recycled, and what are the environmental consequences?
Can you explain how these resins are managed when they reach end-of-life and what their ecological footprint is?
What options exist for processing these resins after use, and how sustainable are they?
How do these resins break down or persist in the environment once they’re discarded?

chevronBottom

Liquid epoxy resin is a toxic and hazardous chemical. If you have containers with unused liquid epoxy, it’s recommended that you take them to an appropriate hazardous waste collection center.
Once the chemical curing process is complete, however, the epoxy resin becomes non-toxic and non-hazardous to both human health and the environment. If possible, we recommend mixing Part A and Part B to ensure the resin cures fully before disposal. Fully cured epoxy can then be safely discarded in your household plastic waste bin. To reduce the ecological footprint of the resins, it’s important to minimize resin waste, use the exact amounts needed, and ensure proper curing and disposal — ideally through hazardous waste facilities for uncured resin and safe disposal of cured resin with household plastics where local rules allow.

Can I add quartz sand on top of my epoxy resin to achieve a non-slip finish?

chevronBottom

Yes, it is possible to add quartz sand on top of epoxy resin to achieve a non-slip but we recommend using microglass beads for esthetic reasons.

Can I roll on or paint on thinly the epoxy resin ECO set for floors?

chevronBottom

It is important to apply min. 1/16” thickness with the epoxy resin ECO set for floors. It is possible to spread the material with a roller but please not that we do not recommend applying less than 1/16" on a leveled floor. 

Do you have bio-sourced epoxy resin?

chevronBottom

No, we do not have bio-sourced epoxy resin. 

What does Eco from ECO system stands for?

chevronBottom

The ECO from ECO System stands for economical.

Do you have a food-safe certificate for your epoxy resin of the ECO and PRO series?

chevronBottom

We do not have a food-safe certificate for our epoxy resin of the ECO and PRO series as we are only selling the product in unmixed form. 

Can I mix glow-in-the-dark pigment with other pigment inside my epoxy resin?

chevronBottom

Mixing the different opaque pigments such as glow in the dark, metallic pigment, neon pigment and ral color paste together in one pour will hide the different effects, for example the glow in the dark might not be visible or the color paste will hide the metallic shimmer. 
To use different colors, we recommend preparing different mixture of each colors. 

Do you have a set with PRO resin A-component and PRO hardener B-component?

chevronBottom

Yes, the PRO system includes both the PRO A-component resin and hardener PRO b-component in the right mixing ratio.

Do you have a set with PRO resin A-component and PRO+ hardener B-component?

chevronBottom

Yes, the PRO+ system includes both the PRO A-component resin and hardener PRO+ b-component in the right mixing ratio.

Do you have a set with ECO resin A-component and ECO hardener B-component?

chevronBottom

Yes, the ECO system includes both the ECO A-component resin and hardener ECO b-component in the right mixing ratio.

Do you sell the glitter pigment without epoxy resin?

chevronBottom

Yes, we do sell the glitter pigment without epoxy resin. 

Is there a cost-effective to Epoxy resin flooring ECO system?

chevronBottom

If, you wish to coat or paint your floor with a more cost-effect product than the epoxy resin flooring ECO, we recommend taking a look at our polyurethane or concrete paint.

Is it normal for the Deep pour PRO+ epoxy resin to still be runny after 24hours?

chevronBottom

Yes, it is normal for the epoxy resin PRO+ to still be runny after 24h but it should show sign or getting thicker. The PRO+ resin will no longer be tacky after 48-72hours.

Can I pour a new layer on my Deep pour PRO+ epoxy resin today, if I poured yesterday?

chevronBottom

No, you need to wait at least 72-96hours before pouring a new layer on the PRO+ epoxy resin.

Is the epoxy resin already tinted?

chevronBottom

No, our epoxy resin of the ECO and PRO series always comes in transparent with the pigments/dyes separately.

What is the waiting time between 2 layers of PRO+ System?

chevronBottom

The waiting time between two layers of PRO+ system is 48-72h.

What are the properties of the ECO series?

chevronBottom

The ECO series has a glossy finish, is clear, low in VOC, bubble free but not UV stabilised. We recommend using the ECO series with a colorant. For white and transparent castings, we recommend choosing the PRO series.

What is the pot life of the PRO system?

chevronBottom

The pot life of the PRO system is 65minutes for 145g (5fl.oz.) at 70°F. For larger quantities and higher temperatures, the pot life is shorter.

How long do I need to wait before I can apply another layer of PRO system?

chevronBottom

A 3/4“ layer of PRO system needs 12h at 70°F before you can apply a new layer of PRO. If the layer of PRO is less than 3/4“ or the temperature is less than 70°F, the time before you can apply a new layer of PRO will be longer.

What is the gelling time of the PRO system when pouring a layer of 1/16“thickness?

chevronBottom

The gelling time of the PRO System when pouring a layer of 1/16“ thick at 70°F is 120minutes.

What is the gelling time of the PRO system when pouring a layer of 3/8“ thickness?

chevronBottom

The gelling time of the PRO System when pouring a layer of 3/8“ thick at 70°F is 90minutes.

What is the gelling time of the PRO system when pouring a layer of 3/4“ thickness?

chevronBottom

The gelling time of the PRO System when pouring a layer of 3/4“ thick at 70°F is 60minutes.

The most frequently asked questions about Microcement & Concrete Effect 

What is Microcement?

chevronBottom

Microcement is a versatile design filler consisting of two components: Microcement (A) and Acrylic Resin (B – liquid). It can be applied to walls (tiled or not), facades, floors (tiled or not), doors, furniture, and various other surfaces such as concrete, metal, plastic, or wood. It is important to always prime the substrate before applying Microcement.
It is suitable for indoor use and outdoor areas. For outdoor spaces, floors, bathrooms, showers, or other wet areas with water contact, Microcement must be sealed with a Polyurethane topcoat (2K PU Topcoat) to ensure water resistance.
This makes Microcement an excellent choice for creating durable, stylish finishes on a wide range of surfaces.

What is the recommended processing temperature of Microcement?
What’s the best temperature to apply Microcement?
Can I use Microcement if it’s too cold or too hot?
What’s the temperature range for applying Microcement?

chevronBottom

The processing temperature of Microcement should be between 50°F and 75°F, with an optimal temperature of 70°F.

What is the drying/hardening time of Microcement?
How long does Microcement take to dry?
When will the Microcement be ready to use?
How long before the Microcement fully hardens?

chevronBottom

At 70°F, Microcement dries and achieves mechanical hardening in 8 hours, while chemical hardening is completed in 7 days.

What is the pot life of Microcement?

chevronBottom

Microcement has no pot life. If the Microcement thickens just stir to reliquefy it.

How much Microcement do I need per layer?

chevronBottom

For walls/ furniture coated with Microcement:

  • The first layer Microcement (using medium grain with liquid B) requires about 0.24lb/sqft.
  • The second layer Microcement (using medium grain with liquid B) will need  0.24lb/sqft.
    For floors:
  • The first layer Microcement (using large grain with liquid B) requires around 0.32lb/sqft.
  • The second layer Microcement (using medium grain with liquid B) will need 0.24lb/sqft.

What container sizes are available for Microcement?

chevronBottom
  • Microcement Medium and Large Grain: A: 15.4lbs / B: 4.4lbs

What are the key properties/differences/uses of Microcement grains?

chevronBottom

Microcement Medium Grain: Unpigmented, matte, perfect for the walls or the second layer on floors.
Microcement Large Grain: Unpigmented, matte, best for the first layer on floors.

What is the waiting time between coats for Microcement, and what should you do if you wait too long?

chevronBottom

The waiting time between coats for Microcement is a minimum of 8 hours and a maximum of 24 hours at 70°F. If more than 24 hours pass after applying the first layer Microcement , you need to sand the surface and apply B liquid before applying the second coat Microcement . Apply the Microcement on the wet B liquid.

If you are working at more than 70°F, the drying time of the Microcement is quicker and applying the second layer after 24h might cause bubbles in the second layer. At high temperature we recommend to sand and apply a thin layer of liquid B when approaching 24h. When working at higher temperature, add more liquid B to your Microcement to help the Microcement to self-vent and not harden as quickly.

What is the mixing ratio by weight for A:B in Microcement?

chevronBottom

The mixing ratio for Microcement by weight for the Microcement powder and liquid B in Microcement is as follows:
 

  • Medium Grain Microcement: 100:20 (15.4lbs Microcement Powder with 3lbs Liquid B + WB pigment to dye the mixture)
  • Large Grain Microcement: 100:25 (15.4lbs Microcement Powder with 3.85lbs Liquid B + WB pigment to dye the mixture)
    You can add between 2 and 10 % WB Pigment to Microcement. The Microcement sets are delivered with 2% WB Pigment which are the colors displayed on our website. For more intensive colors, you can add up to 10% WB pigment to your microcment, to do so, you will need to order extra WB pigment.

How is Microcement applied, and what precautions should be taken?

chevronBottom

Microcement is applied by spreading it on a surface with a trowel. Important precautions:

  • It is not dilutable Microcement with water—do not mix it with water.
  • Avoid putting Microcement in contact with water contact within the first 24 hours after application, as it can cause stains and slow down the drying time of the Microcement.
  • Heat sources or sunlight can cause the Microcement to have different color and in some cases even crack in the Microcement and CONCRETE EFFECT 1k.
  • Do not turn on your underfloor heating for at least 48h after the last layers of Microcement.
  • It is important to always prime the substrate properly before applying Microcement.

Which pigments can I use with Microcement?
How to color Microcement?

chevronBottom

You can mix Microcement with 2% WB Pigment (Water-based pigment). For example, mix 2 x 100 g WB pigment are sufficient to color 1x Bag of Microcement Poweder and the Appropriate amount of liquid B. 

When can a PU topcoat be applied to Microcement?

chevronBottom

A PU topcoat can be applied at least 48 hours after the last layer of Microcement has been applied.

Do you have Microcement color samples?

chevronBottom

No, we do not have any ready color samples for our microcement, but we do have a sample kit where you can do your own samples.

Can I test Microcement before buying a full set?

chevronBottom

Yes, you can! We offer a Microcement Sample Set that includes medium grain-sized Microcement and up to 10 custom colors of your choice. It’s perfect for testing and finding the right color Microcement and texture for your project.

Can I buy only specific parts of the Microcement set, like the liquid B or Microcement powder?

chevronBottom

Yes, you can! We offer the option to purchase individual components of the Microcement set. You can choose:

  • The liquid part (B) separately.
  • Microcement Powder (A) in two sizes (medium, and large).
    This is ideal for projects where you only need to restock certain materials.

Do you sell equipment for working with Microcement or CONCRETE EFFECT?

chevronBottom

Yes, we do! We offer a variety of equipment for working with Microcement, including rollers, trowels, brushes, mixing buckets, and complete sets tailored to your needs—whether you're applying Microcement on floors or walls.

What is the difference between Microcement and CONCRETE EFFECT?

chevronBottom

The Difference Between Microcement and CONCRETE EFFECT

  • Microcement is applied in 2 layers and mixed with Liquid B, an acrylic-based binder. It can be applied to walls, floors, ceilings, and furniture. It is available in 2 grain-sizes. The layer superposition allows you to achieve a unique textured finish which can’t be obtain with another product. It is highly resistant to tear and wear and scratches. Microcement With a PU sealant it can be applied to wet room, such as bathroom and outdoor spaces.
  • CONCRETE EFFECT is a cost-effective alternative to Microcement that can only be applied to surface not subjected to heavy tear and wear, such as walls. The CONCRETE EFFECT comes in only 1 grain-size which is a bit finer than microcement medium. It is applied in 1 layer. Unlike Microcement CONCRETE EFFECT can be sanded easily making it ideal for temporary decorative projects. You can also add a PU topcoat to CONCRETE EFFECT.

Can I apply Microcement on top of underfloor heating?
Is Microcement compatible with underfloor heating?

chevronBottom

It is important to avoid using underfloor heating for at least 48 hours after applying the last layer of Microcement. Additionally, underfloor heating should not be used during the application or drying process of the Microcement. This is crucial to ensure proper curing and adhesion of the Microcement layers, as interference from heat could affect the quality and durability of the finish.

What is the mixing ratio of the PUTTY PRIMER?

chevronBottom

The mixing ratio of our PUTTY PRIMER is as follow: 11lbs of primer and 0.5gal of water.

What is the mixing ratio of the 2K LEVELING COMPOUND for floors?

chevronBottom

The mixing ratio for the 2K LEVELING COMPOUND is as follows: 100 parts quartz sand + 60 parts resin/hardener. For example, 22lbs of quartz sand + 8.8lbs of resin (A) + 4.4lbs of hardener (B).

What is the mixing ratio of the 2K bonding primer?

chevronBottom

The mixing ratio for the 2K bonding primer is 5:1. For example, 1lb of resin BONDING PRIMER to 0.2lb of hardener BONDING PRIMER.

What is the mixing ratio of the DEEP PRIMER? What is the coverage of the DEEP PRIMER?

chevronBottom

The DEEP PRIMER is ready to use and does not need to be mixed with any other product. The coverage is 2.2lbs per 75.3sqm.

Why does the color of my Microcement look different than on the website?

chevronBottom

The color of the Microcement may vary depending on the lighting in the room. The brighter the room and the cooler the light source, the lighter and cooler the color will appear.
In rooms with a warm light source, the color may appear warmer and more yellowish.

Why is my Microcement patchy while drying? Why is my wet Microcement so dark?

chevronBottom

The color of the Microcement may look different right after application, and you may notice some uneven patches. This is due to the drying time of each Microcement layer, the size of the area covered, and the thickness of the Microcement in certain spots.
The thicker the layer of Microcement, the longer it will take to dry. Two coats of Microcement usually need 24-48 hours to dry fully, and only then will the true color be visible.

Is Microcement waterproof?

chevronBottom

Microcement is only waterproof when it is sealed with our 2K PU Topcoat.

How can I apply Microcement on walls?

chevronBottom

Priming the Surface before applying Microcement on walls
Ensure the surface where you want to apply Microcement is dimensionally stable (not warping), solid, dry, and free of dirt, release agents, or irregularities.
Sand down any uneven areas before starting to prime for the Microcement.
Apply primer compatible with Microcement:
If you want to apply Microcement to tiled walls or dimensionnaly stable non-absorbent walls: Use our special PUTTY PRIMER to prime the tiles and fill the joints.
If you want to apply Microcement to smooth absorbent but dimensionnaly stable walls: We recommend our DEEP PRIMER before laying Microcement. (we recommend 2 layers DEEP PRIMER before applying Microcement)
Allow the primer to dry completely before proceeding with Microcement. Applying Microcement on when the primer isn't properly dry, will result in cracking. 
Main Coating of Microcement on Walls

  1. The first layer Microcement on walls is done with Microcement medium-grained. Mix the Microcement A-component (medium grain) with the B-component according to the specified ratio.
  2. Add WB pigment in the recommended quantity to color the Microcement.
  3. Spread the microcment with a trowel on the wall and let it dry.
  4. Sand down any Microcement imperfections larger than 1/8“ and vacuum the dust.

Apply a second layer of Microcement medium grain on your wall within 24h: 
Pro Tips: You can add up to 10% WB pigment to your Microcement to achieve deeper colors. Our Microcement sets include 2% pigment if you want a deeper color, we recommend buying WB pigment separately.
If more than 24 hours pass between Microcement layers, sand the first layer Microcement lightly and remove any dust. This will roughen the Microcement, improving adhesion and preventing the next layer Microcement from peeling.
Apply a small amount of Liquid B with a brush or roller on the sanded Microcement layer. Be careful not to oversaturate the surface.
Sealing Instructions (Seal Microcment 48 Hours After the last Microcement layer)
Note: When using Microcement in wet rooms, on surfaces exposed to direct water contact, or high-wear areas (e.g., floors, surfaces cleaned with aggressive detergents, or heavy mechanical loads), we recommend sealing Microcement with EPODEX Polyurethane Resin (2K PU Topcaot) in matt or glossy finish.
Steps for Sealing Microcement with 2K PU Topcoat:
Prepare the 2K PU Topcoat:

  1. Mix PU Resin (A) with the PU Hardener (B) in a 2 to 1 mixing ratio (for example, 28fl.oz. resin A-component 2K PU Topcoat with 14fl.oz. hardener B-component 2K PU Topcoat)
  2. Stir through the edge and bottom of the mixing cup as the 2K PU Topcoat components will settle there. Ideally, pour the 2K PU Topcoat mixture a clean mixing cup and mix again until it is streak-free. This ensures that the resin A-component and hardener B-component are completely mixed together.
  3. Pour the mixed 2K PU Topcoat into a paint tray and apply it thinly with a roller in a criss-cross pattern.
  4. Let the first layer 2K PU Topcoat cure and apply the second coat in the same way. We recommend applying the second coat 2K PU Topcoat after min. 6h but not more than 20h.
    Curing Time of the 2K PU Topcoat:
    The surface coated with 2K PU Topcoat will be walkable after 12 hours at 75°F and fully chemically cured after approximately 6 days.
    Pro Tips: Ensure Full Coverage: Apply the 2K PU Topcoat in two thin coats, using overlapping strokes. This significantly reduces the risk of missed spots and ensures complete sealing. We recommend applying 2 coats 2K PU Topcoat of each 0.28fl.oz./sqft.
    Pro Tip for when applying 2K PU Topcoat to a coarse Microcement finish: If your Microcement is very textured, you can apply the 2K PU Topcoat with a brush. Make sure to apply it very thinly!

What will happen if I add more of less pigment in the Microcement?

chevronBottom

We recommend using 2% pigment in each Microcement mix. Adding more or less pigment onto the Microcement may result in a color different from what is shown on our website. The way you apply the Microcement can also affect the result, leading to variations in shade and surface texture.

How to apply Microcment on floor?

chevronBottom

Priming for Microcement on floors
Surface Preparation for Microcement:
Ensure the surface is dimensionally stable (not warping), solid, load-bearing, dry, and free of dirt, separating agents, and uneven areas before applying Microcement.
Sand down any uneven areas.
Choosing and applying the right primer for your Microcement project:
When applying Microcement to tiled floors or uneven floors: Use our 2K Leveling Compound to prime and level.
When applying Microcement to absorbent levelled floors that are dimensionally stable: Use our DEEP PRIMER, we recommend 2 layers.
When applying Microcement to non-absorbent levelled floors that are dimensionally stable: Use our 2K Bonding primer. 
Let the primer dry completely before proceeding with the Microcement. Applying Microcement on when the primer isn't properly dry, will result in cracking. 
Main Coating of Microcement on Floors

  1. Start with the Microcement large-grained on your floor. Mix The Microcement powder Component A (Large Grain) with Component B according to the recommended ratio.
  2. Add the recommended amount of WB pigment to your Microcement to achieve the desired color.
  3. Pour the mixed and colored Microcement, spread it evenly with a trowel on your floor, and allow it to dry.
  4. Sand down any unevenness in your Microcement that are over 1/8“ and vacuum the dust.

Apply a second layer Microcement on your floor within 24h using Medium Grain, following the same process.
Pro Tips: You can add up to 10% WB pigment to your Microcement to achieve deeper colors. Our Microcement sets include 2% pigment if you want a deeper color, we recommend buying WB pigment separately.
If more than 24 hours pass between Microcement layers, sand the first layer Microcement lightly and remove any dust. This will roughen the Microcement, improving adhesion and preventing the next layer Microcement from peeling.
Apply a small amount of Liquid B with a brush or roller on the sanded Microcement layer. Be careful not to oversaturate the surface.
Steps for Sealing Microcement with 2K PU Topcoat (48 Hours After the last Microcement layer):
Prepare the 2K PU Topcoat:

  1. Mix PU Resin (A) with the PU Hardener (B) in a 2 to 1 mixing ratio (for example, 28fl.oz. resin A-component 2K PU Topcoat with 14fl.oz. hardener B-component 2K PU Topcoat)
  2. Stir through the edge and bottom of the mixing cup as the 2K PU Topcoat components will settle there. Ideally, pour the 2K PU Topcoat mixture a clean mixing cup and mix again until it is streak-free. This ensures that the resin A-component and hardener B-component are completely mixed together.
  3. Pour the mixed 2K PU Topcoat into a paint tray and apply it thinly with a roller in a criss-cross pattern.
  4. Let the first coat 2K PU Topcoat cure and apply the second coat in the same way. We recommend applying the second coat 2K PU Topcaot after min. 6h but not more than 20h.
    Pro Tip for Flooring: Do not wear rubber-soled shoes while sanding, cleaning, after cleaning, or during the application of the 2K PU Topcoat, as rubber microparticles may cause an uneven finish. Rubber-soled shoes can be worn once the second coat of 2K PU Topcoat is cured. Wait until the 2K PU Topcoat is walkable (approx. 12 hours) before applying the second coat.
    Curing Time of the 2K PU Topcoat:
    The surface coated with 2K PU Topcoat will be walkable after 12 hours at 75°F and fully chemically cured after approximately 6 days.
    Pro Tips: Ensure Full Coverage: Apply the 2K PU Topcoat in two thin coats, using overlapping strokes. This significantly reduces the risk of missed spots and ensures complete sealing. We recommend applying 2 coats 2K PU Topcoat of each 0.28fl.oz./sqft.
    Pro Tip for when applying 2K PU Topcoat to a coarse Microcement finish: If your Microcement is very textured, you can apply the 2K PU Topcoat with a brush. Make sure to apply it very thinly!

How to apply Microcement to furniture?

chevronBottom

Instructions for Use Microcement on furniture
Priming for Microcement
Surface Preparation for Microcement:
Ensure the furniture is dimensionally stable (not warping), ,solid, dry, and free of dirt, separating agents, and uneven areas before applying Microcement.
Sand down any uneven areas.
If required use our PUTTY PRIMER to level and prime your furniture before applying Microcement.
4. If the furniture where you want to apply Microcement is already leveled and smooth, use either our 2K Bonding Primer (for-non absorbent surfaces) or DEEP PRIMER (for absorbent surfaces) to prime your furniture where Microcement will be applied.
5.  Let the primer dry completely. Applying Microcement on when the primer isn't properly dry, will result in cracking. 
________________________________________
Main Coating of Microcement on Furniture

  1. Start with the Microcement medium-grained on furniture. Mix Microcement A components in medium grain size with the Liquid B component in a ratio of 100:20 by weight (i.e 15.4lbs Powder A-component with 3lbs Liquid B-component).
  2. Add 2% WB pigment to color the Microcement (i.e. 2×100g (3.5oz) WB Pigment to 15.4lbs Powder A-component and 3lbs Liquid B-component).
  3. Spread the colored mixed Microcement thinly with a trowel on your furniture and allow to dry.
  4. Sand off any unevenness in the Microcement greater than 1/8“ and vacuum up any sanding dust.
  5. Apply a second coat of Microcement medium-grained on your furniture in the same way within 24 hours.
    Pro Tip: Up to 10% WB Pigment can be added to your Microcement for more intense colors. The Microcement set for furniture comes with 2% WB pigment, if you want a deeper color, you need to order more wb pigment. If you exceed 24 hours between the Microcement layers, sand the first layer and remove the dust. This roughens the microcemenet for better bonding and ensures the next layer Microcement won’t break off.
    On the sanded micro cement, use a light brush of liquid B. Brush or roll on a small amount to avoid flooding the Microcement.
    ________________________________________
    Sealing Instructions with PU (48 Hours After last coat of Microcement)

Note: When using Microcement in wet rooms, on surfaces exposed to direct water contact, or high-wear areas (e.g., floors, surfaces cleaned with aggressive detergents, or heavy mechanical loads), we recommend sealing Microcement with EPODEX Polyurethane Resin (2K PU Topcoat) in matt or glossy finish.
Steps for Sealing Microcement with 2K PU Topcoat:
Prepare the 2K PU Topcoat:

  1. Mix PU Resin (A) with the PU Hardener (B) in a 2 to 1 mixing ratio (for example, 28fl.oz. resin A-component 2K PU Topcoat with 14fl.oz. hardener B-component 2K PU Topcoat)
  2. Stir through the edge and bottom of the mixing cup as the 2K PU Topcoat components will settle there. Ideally, pour the 2K PU Topcoat mixture a clean mixing cup and mix again until it is streak-free. This ensures that the resin A-component and hardener B-component are completely mixed together.
  3. Pour the mixed 2K PU Topcoat into a paint tray and apply it thinly with a roller in a criss-cross pattern.
  4. Let the first layer 2K PU Topcoat cure and apply the second coat in the same way. We recommend applying the second coat 2K PU Topcoat after min. 6h but not more than 20h.
    Curing Time of the 2K PU Topcoat:
    The surface coated with 2K PU Topcoat will be walkable after 12 hours at 75°F and fully chemically cured after approximately 6 days.
    Pro Tips: Ensure Full Coverage: Apply the 2K PU Topcoat in two thin coats, using overlapping strokes. This significantly reduces the risk of missed spots and ensures complete sealing. We recommend applying 2 coats 2K PU Topcoat of each 0.28fl.oz./sqft.
    Pro Tip for when applying 2K PU Topcoat to a coarse Microcement finish: If your Microcement is very textured, you can apply the 2K PU Topcoat with a brush. Make sure to apply it very thinly!

My Microcement is too thick what can I do?

chevronBottom

If the Microcement is too thick, you can add more Liquid B to adjust its consistency.
Here are the recommended mixing ratios by Microcement grain-size:
Large Microcement: 100:25 to a maximum of 100:28 (by weight)
Medium Microcement: 100:20 to a maximum of 100:23 (by weight)
Please note that adding more liquid B to your Microcement, will lighten the color at the end.

Why doesn’t my first coat Microcement look like the pictures on your website?

chevronBottom

It is completely normal not to see a strong Microcement effect after just one layer. The textured finish you're aiming for is typically achieved with two layers of Microcement. The first layer Microcement serves as a base, while the second layer Microcement helps to build up the texture and enhance the overall effect.

What are the Microcement grain-size?

chevronBottom

We offer three different grain sizes Microcement: large (80 µm), medium (330 µm).

Can I apply your Microcement set for furniture, or Microcement set for walls to my floor?

chevronBottom

No, when working on floors, you must start with a layer of large grain-size Microcement to provide higher compressive strength and durability.

What is CONCRETE EFFECT?

chevronBottom

CONCRETE EFFECT is a decorative, resin-modified, and fibre-reinforced Leveling compound designed to mimic the look of raw concrete. It is primarily used on walls and tiled surfaces to create a modern, industrial-style finish. The product is mixed with water and WB Pigments to achieve the desired color and is applied with a trowel for a smooth or textured appearance. Perfect for adding a stylish, cost-effective finish to interiors.

How to use/apply CONCRETE EFFECT?

chevronBottom

      1. Prepare the Substrate before applying CONCRETE EFFECT:

  • Ensure the substrate where you want to apply CONCRETE EFFECT is stable, dry, and free of dirt, separating agents, and unevenness.
  • Sand off any uneven areas.
    2. Applying the CONCRETE EFFECT
  • Mix CONCRETE EFFECT powder with water in a weight ratio of 5:2 (e.g., 2.2lbs EFFECT powder with 0.1gal water).
  • Add approximately 2% WB PIGMENT to your CONCRETE EFFECT+WATER MIXTURE (e.g., 2 x 100g bottles WB PIGMENT for 11lbs EFFECT powder mixed with 0.5gal of water).
    3. Application of the CONCRETE EFFECT:
  • Apply the CONCRETE EFFECT evenly with a trowel.
  • Working Time of the CONCRETE EFFECT: Approx. 30 minutes.
  • Consumption Volume of the CONCRETE EFFECT: Approx. 0.24lb/sqft per 1/32” layer thickness.
  • Drying Time of the CONCRETE EFFECT: Approx. 24 hours.
    Pro tips: Don’t mix the CONCRETE EFFECT bag all at once, as you will only have 30min to use it all. Proceed in small batches. Use cold water instead of hot water, hot water is easier to mix in the CONCRETE EFFECT but the working time is even shorter with hot water. Use cold water, it will take a bit more time to mix it in the CONCRETE EFFECT, but it will give you more working time.

What is the mixing ratio by weight for CONCRETE EFFECT?

chevronBottom

The mixing ratio of the CONCRETE EFFECT is 5:2 (5 parts EFFECT powder to 2 parts water, e.g 2.2lbs CONCRETE EFFECT with 0.1gal Water).

What is the maximum coating height for 1K CONCRETE EFFECT?

chevronBottom

The maximum coating height of the CONCRETE EFFECT is 10 cm per process at 70°F. Consumption of the CONCRETE EFFECT is approximately 0.24lb/sqft per 1/32“ layer thickness.

How long does CONCRETE EFFECT take to dry and harden?

chevronBottom

CONCRETE EFFECT dries and hardens mechanically in 20–24 hours, but full chemical hardening takes 7 days.

What is the processing and pot life of 1K CONCRETE EFFECT?

chevronBottom

You have about 30 minutes of working time after mixing CONCRETE EFFECT, as it sets quickly. The pot life of CONCRETE EFFECT is also around 30 minutes due to its fast-setting nature.

What is the recommended processing temperature for 1K CONCRETE EFFECT?

chevronBottom

The ideal temperature for working with CONCRETE EFFECT is between 50°F and 75°F, with 70°F being the optimal temperature for the best results.

What is the container size for 1K CONCRETE EFFECT?

chevronBottom

CONCRETE EFFECT comes in a 11lbs bag, perfect for your projects.

What are the key properties of 1K CONCRETE EFFECT?

chevronBottom

CONCRETE EFFECT is unpigmented, has a matt finish, is VOC-free, and is UV-stable, making it both durable and environmentally friendly.

Which pigments can be used with 1K CONCRETE EFFECT?
How to color 1K CONCRETE EFFECT?

chevronBottom

You can use WB Pigment with CONCRETE EFFECT and Water at a ratio of 2%. For example, if you’re mixing 11lbs of EFFECT powder with 4.4lbs of water, add 2 x 100g (3.5oz) WB Pigment bottles for the desired color.

Can I use CONCRETE EFFECT on floor?

chevronBottom

Unfortunately, the 1K CONCRETE EFFECT Filler is not suitable for floors. For flooring, we recommend using Microcement, which is more durable and better suited for high traffic areas. We have a Microcement flooring set available.

We also recommend applying two extra layers of PU sealer on top of the Microcement for added protection.

Additionally, a primer should be used under the Microcement, depending on the type of surface. 

Can I use PUTTY PRIMER on floors?

chevronBottom

No, PUTTY PRIMER can not be used on floors as it is not resistant to heavy tear and wear. 

Can I apply Microcement without primer? Do I need a primer with Microcement?

chevronBottom

You always have to prime before applying Microcement. Choose the right primer for Microcement depending on where you want to apply it.

Do I need a primer under the CONCRETE EFFECT?

chevronBottom

No, you do not need a primer under the CONCRETE EFFECT, it is only important to clean and degrease properly before applying the CONCRETE EFFECT. If you want to level tiled walls before applying CONCRETE EFFECT, you can use the PUTTY PRIMER or only use more CONCRETE EFFECT. 

Is CONCRETE EFFECT waterproof?

chevronBottom

You can make CONCRETE EFFECT waterproof by applying 2 layers of 2K PU Topcoat.

Is Microcement waterproof?

chevronBottom

You can make Microcement waterproof by applying 2 layers of 2K PU Topcoat on it. 

Can I apply your Microcement in a pool?

chevronBottom

Our Microcement can be applied in a pool but it must be sealed with our 2K PU Topcoat. Our Microcement alone without 2K PU Topcoat can’t be apply in a pool. We recommend applying at least 2 coats of 2K PU Topcoat and waiting until the 2K PU Topcoat is sealed before filling up the pool. 

Can I apply Microcement outside?

chevronBottom

Yes, you can apply Microcement outside. Please note that sun and temperature fluctuation can change the Microcement color. We recommend protecting your drying Microcement from the sun if possible. Make sure that it doesn’t’ rain during the process and for 48h after applying the Microcement. If the Microcement gets wet while drying it will stain it. The stain on your drying Microcement won’t go away.You’ll need for your wet Microcement to dry and reapply a new layer of Microcement to hide the stain caused by the Microcement getting wet while drying. 

Is 2K PU Topcoat chaging the color of my Microcement?

chevronBottom

Applying 2K PU Topcoat glossy on top of Microcement will slightly darken the color of the Microcement. Applying 2K PU Topcoat matte on top of Microcement will not significantly change the color of the Microcement.

My floor has expansion joint, can I apply Microcement on it?

chevronBottom

If the existing floor has an expansion joint, there are two options to address it before applying Microcement:

  1. Keep the Expansion Joint in the Microcement:
    If the expansion joint is retained within the Microcement, it can be sealed with silicone or acrylic after curing. This will help prevent dust and dirt from accumulating in the joint.
    2. Reinforce the Expansion Joint before applying Microcement:
    To Fill the expansion joint before applying Microcement, follow these steps:
  2. Clear the expansion Joint of your floor.
  3. Remove any silicone or filler from the joint.
  4. Fill the expansion joint with epoxy ECO System mixed with quartz sand and allow it to cure fully.

After filling the expansion joint with ECO and Quarzsand has cured, follow this procedure to stabilize the substrate before applying Microcement:

  1. Roll on a thin coat of epoxy resin and hardener ECO System over the entire area that needs reinforcement before applying Microcement and allow it to cure completely.
  2. Roll on a second thin coat of ECO resin and hardener on the surface needing reinforcement before applying Microcement.
  3. Immediately lay down the fibreglass mat (1oz/sqft is ideal for this step) on top of the second coat of ECO resin.
  4. Apply another thin coat of ECO resin and hardener over the fibreglass to fix it in place and reinforce the surface before applying Microcement.

Note: One layer of fibreglass is sufficient to stabilise the substrate before proceeding with the Microcement application.
Important: Failing to properly stabilise the substrate can lead to cracking in the finished Microcement surface.

My floor doesn’t have expansion joints on it can I apply Microcement?

chevronBottom

If your floor is stable and not moving there is no need to add an expansion joint before applying the Microcement. Make sure that your floor was built by professional and respect the building regulation.

Do I need to add expansion joint of edge strips before applying Microcement?

chevronBottom

If your floor is table and not moving, there is no need to add an expansion joint before applying Microcement. Make sure that your floor was built by professional and respect the building regulation.

Microcement in a new bathroom, must the bathroom be sealed before?

chevronBottom

Microcement acts a finishing layer. It is important to prepare your bathroom in accordance with the building regulation. This means that the bathroom must be sealed before applying the Microcement. 

Can I apply Microcement on tiles that are no longer watertight? 

chevronBottom

We recommend waterproofing the tiles before applying Microcement.

How to apply Microcement across multiple rooms?

chevronBottom

When applying Microcement across multiple rooms, it is advisable to add an expansion joint into the Microcement only. Here's how to proceed:

Cut a joint into the Microcement when working across multiple rooms. To cut a joint into Microcement, use a circular saw to cut a line into the Microcement at the location of the door.
A 2mm joint in the Microcement between the rooms is sufficient for this purpose.
Seal the Microcement joint:

After cutting the joint into the Microcement, seal the Microcement joint with silicone or acrylic to prevent dust and debris from entering.

Can I apply Microcement on a new concrete, screed, Leveling compound?

chevronBottom

It is important to wait until the concrete, screed, Leveling compound is dry and is no longer moving before applying Microcement. Some screed and concrete, for example, in new buildings, will move for up to 1 year. It is important to wait until the concrete of screed is no longer moving to apply Microcement. To know how long you need to wait, please seek advice from the professional who laid the screed or concrete.

My concrete has cracks in it, can I fill it and cover it with Microcement?

chevronBottom

We do not recommend filling in cracks with Microcement. Microcement is made to be used as a topcoat and not a repairing product. We do not recommend applying Microcement to a cracked, or unstable substrate. You must repair and stabilise your floor before applying Microcement to it. 

What happens if you apply the second layer Microcement too quickly on the first layer? What happens if I wait less than 8h between the Microcement layers?

chevronBottom

If you apply a second layer of Microcement when the first layer isn’t dry properly, it can result in cracking. The excess humidity from the first layer will enter the second layer of Microcement causing cracking.

What happens if you apply the 2nd layer Microcement too late on the 1st layer? What happens if I wait more than 24h between the Microcement layers?

chevronBottom

If you apply the 2nd layer Microcement when the 1st layer is too dry, it can cause bubbles. Microcement is porous and air from the first layer can come up in the 2nd layer Microcement resulting in bubbles. 

What happen if the primer isn’t dry before applying Microcement?

chevronBottom

If you apply the Microcement when the primer isn’t dry, the humidity from the primer will come in the Microcement layer causing cracking.

What is I don’t apply primer before applying Microcement?

chevronBottom

Not applying a primer before applying Microcement can lead to the Microcement detaching itself from the substrate and bubbles, and cracks.

Can you do a slope with Microcement?

chevronBottom

Microcement is applied with a trowel and it can be applied to vertical surfaces and slopes. 

Can I add a lot of liquid B to my Microcement and pour it so that is self-level?

chevronBottom

No, our Microcement can’t be made so liquid that its self-level. We do not recommend adding more liquid B to the Microcement that the recommended ratio. Adding too much liquid B inside your Microcement can lead to discoloration. 

What if I apply my Microcement near a heat source or if it is too hot, or too sunny?

chevronBottom

If you apply Microcement near a heat surface, in a hot room, or in a sunny area, it will cause the Microcement to harden faster. When Microcement hardens too quickly, it causes color differences, and it can also lead to cracking. 

What will happen if the temperature is too cold while applying Microcement? 

chevronBottom

If the temperature is too cold when applying the Microcement, the Microcement will take longer to cure. If the temperature is very low, the Microcement won’t be able to dry. Low temperature also causes color differences in the Microcement, it is important to have the right temperature when working with Microcement and keep the temperature constant. 

Can I apply Microcement on a wooden floor?

chevronBottom

Microcement can be applied to a wooden floor with proper preparation. Wooden floor isn’t dimensionally stable and can move. It is important to stabilise the wooden floor before applying Microcement.

Can I apply epoxy on a not dimensionally stable surface, such as warping wood?
Can I apply Microcement to warping surface? Can I apply Microcement to surface that isn’t dimensionally stable?

chevronBottom

Microcement can be applied to a warping surface or a surfaces that isn’t dimensionally stable with proper preparation. It is important to stabilise not dimensionally stable surface before applying Microcement. Failling to stabilise the surface before applying Microcement will lead to cracks.

I have expansion joint on my floor and don’t want them in Microcement, what can I do?

chevronBottom

If you do not want to keep your existing joint into your Microcement, you’ll need to reinforce the expansion joint before applying Microcement:
To Fill the expansion joint before applying Microcement, follow these steps:

  1. Clear the expansion Joint of your floor.
  2. Remove any silicone or filler from the joint.
  3. Fill the expansion joint with epoxy ECO System mixed with quartz sand and allow it to cure fully.

After filling the expansion joint with ECO and Quarzsand has cured, follow this procedure to stabilize the substrate before applying Microcement:

  1. Roll on a thin coat of epoxy resin and hardener ECO System over the entire area that needs reinforcement before applying Microcement and allow it to cure completely.
  2. Roll on a second thin coat of ECO resin and hardener on the surface needing reinforcement before applying Microcement.
  3. Immediately lay down the fibreglass mat (1oz/sqft is ideal for this step) on top of the second coat of ECO resin.
  4. Apply another thin coat of ECO resin and hardener over the fibreglass to fix it in place and reinforce the surface before applying Microcement.

Note: One layer of fibreglass is sufficient to stabilise the substrate before proceeding with the Microcement application.
Important: Failing to properly stabilise the substrate can lead to cracking in the finished Microcement surface

How can I do a seamless finish on both walls and floor with Microcement?

chevronBottom

To achieve a seamless finish with Microcement on multiple surfaces such as wall and floor, or wall and furniture, you need to use the same grain size on the top layer. If you are using the same color Microcement but a different grain-size for the floor and wall, there will be a slight color different. To achieve a seamless wall and floor Microcement finish, you need to use the same grain size for the last layer.

Do the WB pigment looks the same in all Microcement grain-size?

chevronBottom

The same WB pigment will look different in each Microcement grain size. The color differences between each Microcement grain size is visible when you put each grain size next to each other. 

What is the grain size of the CONCRETE EFFECT?

chevronBottom

The CONCRETE EFFECT grain size is a bit finer than the microcement medium grain.

Are the WB Pigment color identical in Microcement and CONCRETE EFFECT?

chevronBottom

No, the WB pigment color looks slightly different in each grain size Microcement and in the CONCRETE EFFECT. 

How long do I need to wait to apply the next layer Microcement after I sanded and apply a thin coat of liquid B?

chevronBottom

You can apply your next Microcement layer immediately after your roll on a thin layer of liquid B. 

Can I use the Microcement floor set on walls?

chevronBottom

Yes, you could use the Microcement floor set on walls if you want but we recommend buying the Microcement set for walls as it more cost effective for walls.

Can I use another Microcement set than the Floor set on my floor?

chevronBottom

No, you must use the Microcement set for floors on your floor. It is important for the floor stability to start with a large grain size Microcement. The large grain size is only available in Microcement flooring set. 

What will happen if I don’t prime under my Microcement?

chevronBottom

Failing to prime under the Microcement can lead the the Microcement not bonding with the substrate. If a porous substrate isn’t primed, it can cause the Microcement to have bubbles. 

Can I just redo a part of my Microcement or will you see it?

chevronBottom

We recommend applying the layer of Microcement on the whole area on the same day. If you are working on different surfaces for example, different walls, it is possible to do one wall one day and the other wall another day. If you have to patch or redo part of the Microcement on a wall, it might be visible, it requires a lot of technics to be able to coat only part of the Microcement surface. 

Can I put Microcement around my pool?

chevronBottom

Yes, it is possible to apply our Microcement inside a pool with our 2K PU Topcoat. It is important that your pool is watertight before applying our Microcement and 2K Topcoat in it. 

Can I apply Microcement to my ceiling?

chevronBottom

Yes, you can apply Microcement to the ceiling. We recommend using the Microcement wall set on ceilings.

Why does my Microcement changes color when wet? Why does my wet Microcement looks stained?

chevronBottom

Let your wet stained Microcement dry. If the stain on your Microcement go away, seal the Microcement with 2 layers of 2K PU Topcoat. If the stains on your Microcement do not go away, you will need to sand the Microcement and reapply a new layer of Microcement. Once the new layer of Microcement is dry, we recommend protecting it with 2 layers of our 2K PU Topcoat. 

Why does my sealed Microcement changes color when wet? Why does my sealed Microcement looks stained when wet?

chevronBottom

If you have applied 2 coats of 2K PU Topcoat on top of your Microcement but the Microcement still changes colors when wet, it has not been sealed properly. The 2K PU Topcoat should be applied very thinly to the Microcement with a roller or a brush. We recommend applying 2 layers of 2K PU Topcoat in a criss-cross motion to ensure full coverage. This significantly reduces the risk of missed spots and ensures complete sealing. If you still missed a spot, and your sealed Microcement changes color when wet, we recommend applying another layer of 2K PU Topcoat.

What should I do if it rains on my Microcement?

chevronBottom

If it rains on your Microcement before it is completely dry, you will need to wait until the Microcement is dry, sand the Microcement, apply a thin roll of liquid B and reapply another layer. Rain on drying Microcement can cause stains that will not go away after drying. 

How to put Microcement around a drain? How to avoid having Microcement somewhere?

chevronBottom

We recommend using masking tape and plastic drop cloth on area you do not want to coat with Microcement. If you are using masking tape, remove it before the Microcement has completely dry for a clean edge.

Why does my second layer Microcement has bubbles when the first layer was looking good?

chevronBottom

 If the first layer of Microcement was looking good and the second layers of Microcement has bubbles in it. It means that the first layer was too dry and air from the first layer went up in the second layer causing bubbles. It could also be that the 2nd layer of Microcement was mixed too quickly and didn’t vent.

Why does my first layer Microcement has bubbles in it?

chevronBottom

If the first layer of Microcement has bubble, it means that the substrate wasn’t prime properly and was porous. It can also happen if the Microcement is mixed too quickly and didn’t vent.

Why is my Microcement having different colors?

chevronBottom

If you add a bit more of less WB pigment the color of your Microcement will be different.
If your Microcement is applied thicker or thinner, the color will be different
Each Microcement grain size have a slightly different color
If the Microcement dries too quickly (due to sun or heat) the color is different
If the Microcement had too much liquid B the color will be different
If the Wb pigment wasn’t well mixed in the Microcement there will be color difference.

How to prevent bubble in Microcement when mixing?

chevronBottom

It is essential to mix the Microcement slowly to ensure proper consistency and avoid air bubbles. Follow these steps:

Mixing:
Use an electric drill on the lowest power setting to mix Microcement.
Keep the mixing tool below the surface of the Microcement, avoiding rapid up-and-down motions.
Vent the Microcement Mixture:
Once the Microcement is well mixed, allow it to self-vent for up to 5 minutes before use. This step helps to release any trapped air and ensures a smooth, consistent Microcement texture.

How to store Microcement?

chevronBottom

The storage temperature of the Microcement should not be below 50°F. If Liquid B freezes, it cannot be used. Open bags of Microcement powder should be tightly sealed, as they can absorb moisture from the air, which may cause them to become unusable.

Why do I have bubbles in my Microcement and how to fix it?

chevronBottom

Bubbles in the Microcement can occur due to various factors, including: 

  • Microcement was applied on porous substrate.
  • Microcement mixture was too thick.
  • Microcement was applied on a wet substrate.
  • Incorrect waiting time between Microcement layers (either too long or too short)
    Unfortunately, once the Microcement has dried, it is not possible to remove the bubbles.To resolve the issue, we recommend the following:

Sand the Microcement Surface:

Sand the affected microcmeent area to smooth out the bubbles and irregularities.
Apply a Thin Coat of Liquid B:

Before applying a new layer of Microcement, apply a thin coat of Liquid B to seal the surface and prevent air from rising into the new layer.

Apply a New Layer of Microcement:

After preparing the surface, apply a fresh layer of Microcement to correct the appearance and ensure a smooth finish.

Can I apply Microcement to a wet substrate?

chevronBottom

No, you can’t apply Microcement to a wet substrate as it cause the Microcement to crack or have bubbles when the substrate dries.

How to apply EPODEX?
How to use EPODEX?

chevronBottom

EPODEX is the brand and not a specific product. The instructions for use of each EPODEX’s product is different.

How to apply Microcement on bathroom tiles?

chevronBottom

To apply Microcement to tiled walls, we recommend priming with our PUTTY PRIMER and then use our Microcement set for bathroom (wall option).

To apply Microcement to tiled floor, we recommend priming with our 2K LEVELING COMPOUND and then use our Microcement set for bathroom (floor option).

How long do I need to mix my Microcement of CONCRETE EFFECT?

chevronBottom

You need to mix your Microcement and CONCRETE EFFECT until the mixture of homogenous.

I have unmixed clumps in my Microcement and CONCRETE EFFECT when I apply it, what can I do?

chevronBottom

If you have small clumps inside your Microcement or CONCRETE EFFECT while applying, do not worry. Use your trowel and go over unmixed clumps of CONCRETE EFFECT and Microcement until they go away. 

Does the color changes when you apply PU on top of the Microcement?

chevronBottom

Our 2K PU Topcoat only slightly darken the color of Microcement. The color changes are more visible with the 2K PU Topcoat glossy than matte.

Can you apply Microcement on vinyl surfaces?

chevronBottom

No, you must remove the vinyl before applying Microcement.

What are the black marks on my Microcement?

chevronBottom

Black lines on Microcement are burns from using a wrong trowel. It is important to use a rounded trowel with a thickness of maximum 1/8“ when applying Microcement.

What is the layer thickness of the Microcement for floor?

chevronBottom

The total layer thickness of the Microcement for floor is approx. 1/8“.

What is the layer thickness of 1-layer Microcement large-grained?

chevronBottom

The layer thickness of 1 layer of the Microcement large-grained is 1/16“.

What is the layer thickness of 1-layer Microcement medium-grained?

chevronBottom

The layer thickness of 1 layer of the Microcement medium-grained is 1/16“.

Can I apply Concrete Effect in my shower?

chevronBottom

Yes, it is possible to apply the Concrete Effect with our PU sealant on walls in the shower. 

Is microcement more water resistant than concrete effect?

chevronBottom

Both Microcement and concrete effect are only resistant with the 2K PU Topcoat. With the 2K PU Topcoat both Microcement and Concrete Effect can be used in a shower for example. We do not recommend using Concrete Effect inside a pool. 

Can I put Microcement or Concrete Effect in my camper van? Can I put Microcement or Concrete Effect in my moving vehicle?

chevronBottom

No, we do not recommend applying Microcement or Concrete effect inside a vehicle as the vibration of the vehicle would cause movement in the Microcement/Concrete Effect resulting in cracks. 

Can I apply Concrete Effect on furniture?

chevronBottom

Yes, you can apply Concrete Effect on Furniture. Please note that Microcement is more resistant than Concrete effect and we recommend it for furniture subject to heavy tear and wear.- 

What is the drying time of the 2K BONDING PRIMER?

chevronBottom

Bonding Primer 2K is a two-component product and it dries in 8 to 24 hours and is fully cured after 7 days.

Do I need to sand painted tiles before applying microcement?

chevronBottom

No, it is not necessary to remove the paint on tiles before applying microcement. The 2K Leveling Compound and Putty Primer to prime and level the tiles before applying microcement, will stick to painted tiles.

Is Micrometal the same as the Microcement?

chevronBottom

No Microcement and Micrometal aren’t the same thing. Microcement is a decorative plaster for walls and floors with a concrete finish and Micrometal is a wall decorative plaster with a metallic finish.

Can I apply microcement on bitumen?

chevronBottom

No, we do not recommend applying microcement on top of bitumen because it is not structural nor load-bearing.

Can I use the 2K Levelling Compound on walls?

chevronBottom

No, the 2K Leveling compound can only be used on floors.

Do I need to sand between the microcement layers?

chevronBottom

You only need to sand between the microcement layers if you apply the next layer after more than 24h. If you apply the next layer microcement in less than 24h, you do not need to sand.

Can I use the 1K PRIMER as a primer for Microcement?

chevronBottom

No, the 1K PRIMER is not a suitable primer under Microcement or Concrete Effect.

Do you have more Microcement colors than the one on the website?

chevronBottom

We do not have any other Microcement sets than the ones on the website but it is possible to order the microcement without pigment and use any of our WB Pigment inside the microcement.

Do you have a Microcement sample set?

chevronBottom

Yes, we do have a Microcement sample set where you can select up to 10 colors to try it yourself.

What is the slip-resistance of Microcement?

chevronBottom

The slip-resistance of Microcement depends on the grain-size, the application technic and the sealant. For wet conditions, it is usually around R11 or R12 in the DIN 51130 classification.

Can I use spiked shoes to walk in microcement?

chevronBottom

No, we do not recommend walking on microcement with spikes shoes as it could alter the finish. 

Is the consumption volume of the microcement for the powder and the liquid B together?

chevronBottom

Yes, the consumption volume of the microcement is for the powder and the liquid B. 

Can I apply microcement on underfloor heating?

chevronBottom

Yes, it is possible to apply our microcement on underfloor heating.

What is the putty primer used for?

chevronBottom

The putty primer is made to level and primer irregular furniture or walls before applying microcement or a decorative plaster.

Do you have a calculator to calculate the required amount of microcement?

chevronBottom

No, we do not have a microcement calculator.

Do I need to sand tiles under the Putty Primer?

chevronBottom

We do recommend sanding the tiles before applying the putty primer.

Can I add glitter into the concrete effect?
Can I add glitter in the rock design?

chevronBottom

No, you can’t add glitter into the concrete effect. If you wish to have a glittery plaster, we recommend our Micrometal.

How to remove the Concrete Effect?

chevronBottom

The concrete effect can be sanded until smooth and painted over. 

What is the density of Liquid B for Microcement?

chevronBottom

The density of the liquid B for microcement is very similar to water.

Can I use DEEP PRIMER on metal?

chevronBottom

We do not recommend applying DEEP PRIMER on metal, as DEEP PRIMER is suitable for absorbent surfaces.

Can I apply putty primer on a floor?

chevronBottom

No, you can’t apply the putty primer on a floor.

What is the curing time of the 2K Levelling compound?

chevronBottom

The 2K Levelling Compound has a curing time of 24h.

If I want to color my 2K Levelling Compound, which color do I need? 

chevronBottom

You can use for the 2K Levelling Compound sand the EP Color Paste.

Wich epoxy resin can I use to seal Microcement Floors?

chevronBottom

We do not recomend to use epoxy resin to seal Microcement Floors

Wich epoxy resin can I use to seal Microcement Furniture?

chevronBottom

We do not recomend to use epoxy resin to seal Microcement Furniture

How much epoxy resin do I need to seal Microcement?

chevronBottom

We do not recomend to use epoxy resin to seal Microcement 

How much epoxy resin do I need to seal Microcement Walls?

chevronBottom

We do not recomend to use epoxy resin to seal Microcement Walls

How much epoxy resin do I need to seal Microcement Floors?

chevronBottom

We do not recomend to use epoxy resin to seal Microcement Floors

How much epoxy resin do I need to seal Microcement Furniture?

chevronBottom

We do not recomend to use epoxy resin to seal Microcement Furniture

Wich epoxy resin can I use to seal Microcement?

chevronBottom

We do not recomend to use epoxy resin to seal Microcement

Wich epoxy resin can I use to seal Microcement Walls?

chevronBottom

We do not recomend to use epoxy resin to seal Microcement Walls

How much WB pigment do I need to dye the microcement?

chevronBottom

We recommend adding 2% wb pigment to the microcement mixture (Microcement powder and Liquid B). It is important to calculate the amount of WB Pigment for the microcement mixture and not only the microcement powder. 

How is calculated the amount of WB Pigment in the concrete effect?

chevronBottom

The amount of WB pigment added into the Concrete effect is calculated for the Mixture (concrete effect+water). We recommend approx. 2% WB pigment into the Concrete effect+Water Mixture, orders are delivered with a little bit extra pigment to achieve a more intense color if wanted. We delivere 2x100g WB pigment for 11lbs Concrete effect and 0.5gal water, which is a mixing ratio of 2.8%. 

Can I use putty primer under tile paint?

chevronBottom

You can use putty primer under the tile paint on walls, but please note that tile paint only gives a new color and the different texture (tiles and putty primer) will remain visible.

How many coats of PU topcoat can I do buy in sqft?

chevronBottom

When buying the PU topcoat without microcement, the quantities are calculated for 1 coat. We recommend doubling the PU topcoat quantities when buying the PU topcoat separately. In the Microcement sets, the quantities PU topcoat are calculated for 2 coats. 

Can I apply a paint or varnish on bare microcement?

chevronBottom

Yes, you can apply a water-based or resin-based paint on top of the microcement without PU Topcoat. We recommend our PU Paint to paint over microcement without PU topcoat. Our metallic brush effect can also be painted on microcement if desired.

Do I need another primer on the putty primer before applying microcement?

chevronBottom

No, you do not need another primer on top of the Putty primer before applying microcement. 

I do not like the color of my microcement, can I paint over it?

chevronBottom

Yes, it is possible to paint over your microcement, no primer is required to paint over microcement. 

Is the consumption volume of microcement just the powder?

chevronBottom

No, the consumption volume of microcement represents the quantity of microcement powder and liquid b required per sqft.

How long after applying the Putty primer do I need to wait until applying microcement?

chevronBottom

We recommend waiting 24h after applying the Putty primer before applying the microcement.

Can I fill grout with microcement?

chevronBottom

It is important to level the grout before applying the microcement. The microcement shouldn’t be used to level a surface.

is it necessary to use mesh when coating a floor with microcement?

chevronBottom

No, it is only necessary to use fiberglass mesh to reinforced an unstable flooring or on existing expansion joint (if you do not wish to have the joint also in the microcement) when using microcement. Stable, nonmoving flooring do not require to be reinforced with fiberglass mesh before applying microcement. 

Can I use the microcement set for furniture for a bench or a countertop?

chevronBottom

Yes, the microcement set for furniture can be used used to coat a bench or countertop. The microcement set for furniture can be used for furniture subjected to load or heavy tear and wear. It is important that the furniture is stable before applying the microcement set for furniture.

What is the maximum depth you allowed with the 2k levelling compound?

chevronBottom

The maximum depth allowed with the 2k Leveling compound ist 1 3/16”.

What is the working time of the putty primer?

chevronBottom

The working time of the putty primer is approx. 30min.

What is the working time of the deep primer?

chevronBottom

The deep primer is ready to use liquid and doesn’t have a working time. 

What is the working time of the 2k bonding primer?

chevronBottom

The working time of the 2k bonding primer is approx. 90min. 

Can I have another color Microcement than the one shown on your website?

chevronBottom

It is possible to select any of our WB pigment and add it to our Microcement.

Is it normal that my large-grained Microcement looks grainy? Is it normal that my large-grained Microcement has black particles in it?

chevronBottom

It is normal that your Microcement large grain looks grainy and has small black dot, this is the normal look of the large grain size Microcement.

What is in the Microcement set for bathroom?

chevronBottom

The Microcement set for bathroom gives you the option to show a set for walls or floor in a medium grain size finish and already includes the 2K PU Topcoat. The primer isn’t include. We recommend buying the right Microcement primer separately.

What is in the Microcement set for tiles?

chevronBottom

The Microcement set for tiles allows your to select a set for tiled walls or tiled floor. Each Microcement set for tile includes the right primer for your Microcement (PUTTY PRIMER for tiled walls that will be coated with Microcement or 2K LEVELING COMPOUND for tiled floor that will be coated with Microcement) and the Microcement in the grain size finish of your choice. The 2K PU Topcoat is optional on the Microcement set for tiles page.

The most frequently asked questions about Exposed Concrete Rock Design Wall

What is the rock design wall?

chevronBottom

The rock design wall is a decorative technique with the CONCRETE EFFECT to achieve a rock-like finish on walls.

How to achieve the rock design wall?

chevronBottom
  1. The CONCRETE EFFECT is applied in 2 layers to achieve the rock design wall. Each layer of CONCRETE EFFECT requires approximately the same amount of material to achieve the rock design wall.
  2. We do not recommend mixing more than 5.5lbs of CONCRETE EFFECT at once, as the material thickens quickly. Processing Time of the CONCRETE EFFECT: approx. 30min.
  3. Mix the CONCRETE EFFECT Powder with water in a 5:2 mixing ratio (e.g. 5.5lbs Powder with 0.25gal water).
  4. Color the concrete by adding approx. 2% WB Pigment to it. (e.g. 1x 100g (3.5oz) WB Pigment to 5.5lbs EFFECT Powder and 0.25gal water).
  5. Apply a thin layer of the CONCRETE EFFECT using a trowel.
  6. Let the CONCRETE EFFECT at least 30min before applying the second layer to achieve the rock design wall.
  7. Mix fresh CONCRETE EFFECT for the rock design again and use 2 trowels to dab it onto the surface until it is fully textured.
  8. Smooth the texture using a clean trowel with light pressure. Move the trowel from top to bottom to achieve the rock design wall.
  9. Finally, lightly dab the surface with a bristly brush to create additional texture on your rock design wall.

What happens if I move the trowel from down to up instead of up to down when doing the rock design wall?

chevronBottom

By moving the trowel in another direction, you will achieve a different texture and the finish will not match the one seen on our website for the rock design wall.

Which types of trowels do I need do achieve the rock design wall?

chevronBottom

We recommend rounded trowels with a thickness of max. 1/8” when working with our CONCRETE EFFECT and the rock design wall.

How many layers do I need to achieve the rock design wall?

chevronBottom

We recommend applying 2 layers to achieve the rock design wall.

What is the difference between rock design wall and CONCRETE EFFECT?

chevronBottom

Rock design wall is a technic using the CONCRETE EFFECT.

Can I do the rock design on floors?

chevronBottom

No, we do not recommend using our rock design set on floors, this set is only for walls.

How much CONCRETE EFFECT do you need to make the rock design wall?

chevronBottom

11lbs CONCRETE EFFECT and 2x100g (3.5oz) WB Pigment are sufficient to cover 3m² when doing the rock design wall effect.

Can I use 1 trowel and a spatula to put on the second layer of CONCRETE EFFECT for rock design wall?

chevronBottom

Yes, you could use a trowel and dap the CONCRETE EFFECT onto a spatula instead of using 2 trowels when applying the second layer of CONCRETE EFFECT for the rock design wall. Using 2 trowels for the second layer of CONCRETE EFFECT on the rock design wall is faster than using 1 trowel and 1 spatula. 

How to apply the rock design wall to a large area?

chevronBottom

When applying the rock design on a large area, we recommend working from top to bottom in section as the CONCRETE EFFECT is quick setting.

What is the maximum time frame between the 2 layers CONCRETE EFFECT to achieve the rock design wall?

chevronBottom

We recommend waiting a min. of 30min before applying the second layer of CONCRETE EFFECT to achieve the rock design. The first layer of CONCRETE EFFECT should be dry before applying the second layer to achieve the rock design. There is no max. limit of time between the layer of CONCRETE EFFECT to achieve the rock design.

Should the 1st layer of CONCRETE EFFECT on the rock design wall cover the whole wall?

chevronBottom

Yes, the 1st layer of CONCRETE EFFECT should cover the whole wall and be opaque before applying the 2nd layer of CONCRETE EFFECT to achieve the rock design. 

Can I use the CONCRETE EFFECT rock design wall on tiles?

chevronBottom

Yes, it is possible to apply the rock design set with CONCRETE EFFECT directly on tiles, please note that it might require extra product to fill out the grout. It is also possible to fill out the grout of tiled walls with putty primer before using our rock design set.

Do I need a primer before my rock design wall set?

chevronBottom

No, priming isn’t required before using CONCRETE EFFECT. Please note that putty primer can be used to fill out the grout of tiles to minimize the amount of CONCRETE EFFECT afterwards.

What is the smallest size available for the rock design wall with CONCRETE EFFECT?

chevronBottom

The smallest rock design set available is 11lbs CONCRETE EFFECT for 32sqft.

Is the rock design also available for microcement?

chevronBottom

We recommend achieving the rock design wall with CONCRETE EFFECT instead of microcement. The look is easier achieved with CONCRETE EFFECT as it is a 1-component product. CONCRETE EFFECT is also easier to sand and fix if the rock design should be removed.

The most frequently asked questions about Micrometal

What is MICROMETAL?

chevronBottom

MICROMETAL is a metallic decorative plaster for walls.

What is the difference between MICROMETAL and metallic brush effect?

chevronBottom

MICROMETAL is a plaster and metallic brush effect is a paint.

How to apply MICROMETAL?

chevronBottom
  • Add the supplied metallic pigment to the MICROMETAL decorative plaster to color it and mix thoroughly.
  • Apply a thin layer of the colored MICROMETAL over the entire area using a trowel and let the MICROMETAL dry before continuing with the second layer MICROMETAL.
  • Use both trowels to dab the second layer MICROMETAL onto the surface until it is fully textured.
  • Smooth the textured MICROMETAL using a clean trowel with light pressure. Move the trowel from top to bottom. Let the MICROMETAL dry completely.
  • Pro tips: When using MICROMETAL on large areas, dab the second layer MICROMETAL in section from top to bottom and smooth out each section to prevent the MICROMETAL from drying completely.

What is the smallest sizes MICROMETAL available?

chevronBottom

The smallest size MICROMETAL available is 1.18gal.

How much MICROMETAL do I need per m²?

chevronBottom

You need approximatively 1.8oz MICROMETAL per sqft.

What is the pot life, processing time of MICROMETAL?

chevronBottom

MICROMETAL is air-drying, it doesn’t have a pot life as it is not curing by chemical reaction. The processing time of MICROMETAL depends on the room temperature, we recommend working at 70°F which will give you approx. 1h to dab the MICROMETAL on the surface and smooth it out. Using MICROMETAL at a higher temperature reduces the working time.

Can I mix in the metallic pigment inside my MICROMETAL close the bottle and use it later?

chevronBottom

Yes, you can add the metallic pigment into your MICROMETAL, mix it, close the lid, and use the MICROMETAL later.

In which sizes do MICROMETAL come in?

chevronBottom

The MICROMETAL comes in 1.18gal buckets only.

Can I use MICROMETAL on floors?

chevronBottom

No, MICROMETAL is only for walls.

What is the processing temperature of MICROMETAL?

chevronBottom

MICROMETAL can be used at temperature between 40°F and 95°F.

What are the advantages of MICROMETAL?

chevronBottom

MICROMETAL is resistant to mold and fungus.

Where can I apply MICROMETAL?

chevronBottom

MICROMETAL can be used on concrete, metal, plastic, wood, and other types of walls.

Can MICROMETAL be used indoors?

chevronBottom

Yes, MICROMETAL can be used indoors.

Can MICROMETAL be used outdoors?

chevronBottom

Yes, MICROMETAL can be used outdoors with our Polyurethane topcoat.

Can MICROMETAL be used in wet rooms? Can MICROMETAL be used in the shower?

chevronBottom

Yes, MICROMETAL can be used in wet rooms such as bathrooms and basements with our Polyurethane topcoat.

What tool do I need to apply MICROMETAL?

chevronBottom

We recommend applying MICROMETAL with a trowel.

Does MICROMETAL have a strong smell?

chevronBottom

No, MICROMETAL doesn’t have a strong smell. MICROMETAL has a low odour during application.

How much metallic pigment do I need to add into the MICROMETAL?

chevronBottom

We recommend adding 2.5% pigment into the MICROMETAL. Add 125g metallic pigment into the 1.18gal MICROMETAL bucket.

Do I need a primer under MICROMETAL?

chevronBottom

No, primer is not required under MICROMETAL. 

How should the substrate be prepared to apply MICROMETAL?

chevronBottom

The substrate on which you will apply MICROMETAL should be smooth, dry, free from dirt, release agents and unevenness. 

Can I apply MICROMETAL on tiles?

chevronBottom

To apply MICROMETAL on tiles or other uneven surfaces, we recommend to level with our Putty Primer before applying MICROMETAL.

How many layers of MICROMETAL do I need to apply?

chevronBottom

2 Layers of MICROMETAL are required to achieve the finish seen on our website.

What is the drying time of MICROMETAL?

chevronBottom

The drying time of MICROMETAL is 24h at 70°F. The drying time of MICROMETAL can be different depending on the sun exposure and room temperature.

What is MICROMETAL made of?

chevronBottom

MICROMETAL is an acrylic-based decorative plaster.

Can I paint on the MICROMETAL?

chevronBottom

We do not recommend applying MICROMETAL with a brush or roller.

Can I seal MICROMETAL to have a waterproof finish? Can I seal MICROMETAL to make it easier to clean and maintain?

chevronBottom

We recommend applying polyurethane resin on top of the dried MICROMETAL to make it waterproof and easy to clean and maintain. 

Can you dilute/thin MICROMETAL?

chevronBottom

No, MICROMETAL can’t be diluted/thinned.

Is MICROMETAL scratch resistant? Is MICROMETAL abrasion resistant?

chevronBottom

No, MICROMETAL is not resistant to abrasion or scratch. To achieve a scratch resistant surface you must apply polyurethane on top of MICROMETAL.

Is MICROMETAL open to diffusion? Is MICROMETAL breathable?

chevronBottom

MICROMETAL is open to diffusion unless polyurethane is applied as a topcoat.

Is MICROMETAL colorfast? Is the color of MICROMETAL long-lasting?

chevronBottom

Yes, MICROMETAL is colorfast.

How does the unpigmented MICROMETAL look like?

chevronBottom

The unpigmented MICROMETAL is white, slightly metallic when unpigmented. 

Is MICROMETAL UV-resistant?

chevronBottom

Yes, MICROMETAL is UV-resistant.

Is MICROMETAL solvent-free?

chevronBottom

Yes, MICROMETAL is solvent-free.

Is MICROMETAL VOC-free?

chevronBottom

We do not have any information regarding the VOC content of MICROMETAL.

Is MICROMETAL eco-friendly?

chevronBottom

Yes, MICROMETAL is environmentally friendly.

What is the density of MICROMETAL?

chevronBottom

MICROMETAL has a density of 9.18lb/gal.

How to clean the tools and accessories after using MICROMETAL?

chevronBottom

We recommend cleaning the tools and accessories with water immediately after using MICROMETAL.

How do you maintain a wall coated with MICROMETAL?

chevronBottom

We recommend dusting with microfibre cloth walls coated with MICROMETAL without PU topcoat. 

How do you clean walls coated with MICROMETAL and polyurethane?

chevronBottom

We recommend cleaning MICROMETAL with polyurethane topcoat with light surfactants (do not use acidic or chlorinated cleaners 
or alkaline solutions).

What is the pH value of MICROMETAL?

chevronBottom

The pH value of MICROMETAL is 7.9.

How to store MICROMETAL?

chevronBottom

We recommend storing MICROMETAL sealed at room temperature. Do not expose MICROMETAL to sunlight.

What is the shelf life of MICROMETAL before opening?

chevronBottom

The shelf life of MICROMETAL before opening is 12 months when stored properly.

What is the shelf life of MICROMETAL after opening?

chevronBottom

The shelf life of MICROMETAL after opening is 6 months when stored properly.

What is the maximum storage temperature of MICROMETAL?

chevronBottom

The maximal storage temperature of MICROMETAL is 75°F.

What is the minimum storage temperature of MICROMETAL?

chevronBottom

The minimal storage temperature of MICROMETAL is 50°F.

Do I need to apply the polyurethane topcoat on my MICROMETAL in wet rooms and outdoor?

chevronBottom

Yes, MICROMETAL outdoors or in wet rooms without polyurethane topcoat/sealant will not have a good resistance. 

Why does my MICROMETAL have cracks in it?

chevronBottom

Any unwanted irregularities can be smoothed or leveled while the material is still damp. Sun exposure and heat can cause MICROMETAL to crack.

Why does my MICROMETAL have color differences in it? Why do my different batches of MICROMETAL have different colors?

chevronBottom

Sun exposure and heat can cause MICROMETAL to have color variations.

Can I smooth out my MICROMETAL after drying?

chevronBottom

It is important to smooth out the MICROMETAL with a trowel while it is still damp. Once MICROMETAL is dried it can only be sanded.

In which colors is the micrometal available?

chevronBottom

The micrometal is available in satin gray, platinum silver, Havana bronze, shimmer gold, yellow gold, wine red, bronze red, coffee brown, bronze brown, olive green, intense anthracite, deep black, flame copper, lotus lilac, rose red, pacific turquoise, and sky blue. 

The most frequently asked questions about Polyurethane

What is the base of the 2K PU Topcoat?

chevronBottom

The 2K PU Topcoat is fully aliphatic polyurethane resin. 

What is the base of the 2K PU Paint?

chevronBottom

The 2K PU Paint is fully aliphatic polyurethane resin.

What is the mixing ratio of the 2K PU Paint?

chevronBottom

The 2K PU Paint has a mixing ratio of 3 to 1 for example, 42fl.oz. A-component Resin 2K PU Paint with 14fl.oz. B-component Hardener 2K PU Paint. 

How thick is the layer achieved by the 2K PU Topcoat?

chevronBottom

The 2K PU Topcoat reaches a layer thickness in average 70 µm. The consumption volume and layer thickness of the 2K PU Topcoat may vary depending on the substrate's porosity and absorption.

Where can I apply the 2K PU Topcoat?

chevronBottom

The 2K PU Topcoat can be applied to floors, walls, and furniture made of concrete, wood, metal, tiles, microcement, epoxy, concrete effect, and more. The 2K PU Topcoat is compatible on all clean, dry substrate, except some plastics.

What kind of preparation is needed for the 2K PU Topcoat?

chevronBottom

To use the 2K PU Topcoat, the substrate should be stable, dry, and free from dust, dirt, and release agents. Sanding is recommended before using the 2K PU Topcoat.

How many coats of 2K PU Topcoat do I need to apply?

chevronBottom

We recommend applying 2 coats of 2K PU Topcoat in a criss-cross motion to ensure that the surface is perfectly sealed.

What is the 2K PU Topcoat consumption volume per coat? 

chevronBottom

In average, 0.28fl.oz/sqft 2K PU Topcoat is required per coat. We recommend two coats of 2K PU Topcoat. The consumption volume of the 2K PU Topcoat may vary depending on the substrate's porosity and absorption.

What is the mixing ratio of 2K PU Topcoat?

chevronBottom

The 2K PU Topcoat should be mixed in a ratio of 2:1. For example, mix 28fl.oz 2K PU Topcoat A-component with 14fl.oz. 2K PU Topcoat B-component.

Where can I apply the 2K PU Topcoat?

chevronBottom

The 2K PU Topcoat is suitable on horizontal and vertical surfaces, both indoor and outdoor use.

At which temperatures can I apply the 2K PU Topcoat?

chevronBottom

The substrate and the ambient temperature must be minimum 40°F and maximum 85°F for the application of the 2K PU Topcoat. We recommend a temperature of 70°F when applying the 2K PU Topcoat.

How can I apply the 2K PU Topcoat?

chevronBottom

The 2K PU Topcoat can be applied with a brush, roller, or spray gun.

Does the 2K PU Topcoat has a strong smell? 

chevronBottom

Yes, the 2K PU Topcoat has a strong smell.  

Is there a maximum humidity level when working with 2K PU Topcoat?

chevronBottom

Yes, maximal air humidity when using the 2K PU Topcoat is 75%. 

Is the 2K PU Topcoat transparent? 

chevronBottom

Yes, the 2K PU Topcoat is transparent.

How long do I need to wait between the 2K PU Topcoat coats? 

chevronBottom

We recommend applying the second coat 2K PU Topcoat after min. 6h but not more than 20h. When working on a floor, you need to wait until the 2K PU Topcoat is walkable (approx. 12 hours) before applying the second coat.

What should I do if I apply the second coat 2K PU Topcoat after 20h?

chevronBottom

If you apply the second coat 2K PU Topcoat after more than 20h, we recommend sanding to increase adhesion between the coats.

What is pot life for the 2K PU Topcoat? 

chevronBottom

The pot life for the 2K PU Topcoat is 90 minutes at 80°F.

Which finish has the 2K PU Topcoat? 

chevronBottom

The 2K PU Topcoat is available in matte or glossy. 

How is the consistency of the 2K PU Topcoat? 

chevronBottom

The consistency of the 2K PU Topcoat is smooth. 

How long does it take until the 2K PU Topcoat is dust-free? 

chevronBottom

The 2K PU Topcoat is dust-free at 80°F and 60% humidity level in 60 minutes after application.

Is the 2K PU Topcoat thinnable? 

chevronBottom

Yes, the 2K PU Topcoat is thinnable with PU solvent (approximately 10%). We do not sell the PU solvent.

When is the 2K PU Topcoat touch dry /walkable? 

chevronBottom

The 2K PU Topcoat is touch dry/walkable after 12 hours. 

When is the 2K PU Topcoat loadable? 

chevronBottom

The 2K PU Topcoat is loadable after 72 hours. 

When is the 2K PU Topcoat fully cured? 

chevronBottom

The 2K PU Topcoat is fully cured after 6 days. 

What are the advantages of the 2K PU Topcoat? 

chevronBottom

The 2K PU Topcoat is UV-Resistant, Non-yellowing, elastic (non-cracking even on warping surfaces), scratch resistant, waterproof, chemical resistant, and highly durable.

Is the 2K PU Topcoat scratch/abrasion resistant? 

chevronBottom

Yes, the 2K PU Topcoat is scratch/abrasion resistant. A weight loss of 65mg was registered on the Taber abrasion test conducted on the 2K PU Topcoat after 6 days. (1000 rotations with a grinding wheel on 2.2lbs pressure)

Is the 2K PU Topcoat open to diffusion/ breathable? 

chevronBottom

No, the 2K PU Topcoat is not open to diffusion/ breathable.

Is the 2K PU Topcoat UV- Resistant? 

chevronBottom

Yes, the 2K PU Topcoat is UV-Resistant. 

Is the 2K PU Topcoat Solvent-Free? 

chevronBottom

No, the 2K PU Topcoat is not solvent-free. 

Could abrasion marks and shiny spots (so-called writing effect) appear on the 2K PU Topcoat? 

chevronBottom

No, the 2K PU Topcoat is resistant to abrasion marks. 

What is the viscosity of the 2K PU Topcoat? 

chevronBottom

The 2K PU Topcoat has a viscosity of 1200-1400 cP at 80°F. 

What is the density of the 2K PU Topcoat? 

chevronBottom

The density of the 2K PU Topcoat is 74.9 ± 3.1 lb/ft³at 80°F. 

How can I clean the tools after using the 2K PU Topcoat? 

chevronBottom

You can clean the tools immediately after using the 2K PU Topcoat with thinner. 

How can I clean and maintain the 2K PU Topcoat? 

chevronBottom

We recommend cleaning the fully cured 2K PU Topcoat with light surfactants. We do not recommend using acidic or chlorinated cleaners or alkaline solutions when cleaning the 2K PU Topcoat. Do not clean the 2K PU Topcoat before complete chemical curing.

How can I store the 2K PU Topcoat? 

chevronBottom

You can only store the 2K PU Topcoat in the original container, tightly closed, in a cool, frost-free place, and in the dark. Protect the 2K PU Topcoat from sunlight.

How long is the shelf life of the 2K PU Topcoat? 

chevronBottom

The shelf life of the 2K PU Topcoat before opening is 12 months. The shelf life can be significantly shortened if the storage conditions are not properly followed.

How long is the shelf life after opening of the 2K PU Topcoat?

chevronBottom

The shelf life after opening of the 2K PU Topcoat is 6 months. The shelf life can be significantly shortened if the storage conditions are not properly followed.

At which temperature should I store the 2K PU Topcoat? 

chevronBottom

Store the 2K PU Topcoat between min. 45°F and max. 80°F. 

What is the 2K PU Topcoat? 

chevronBottom

The 2K PU Topcoat is a transparent 2-components polyurethane topcoat. The 2K PU Topcoat is a universal topcoat, as it can be used on various substrates.

What is the 2K PU Paint?

chevronBottom

The 2K PU Paint is a colored 2-components polyurethane paint. The 2K PU Paint is a universal paint, as it can be used on various substrates.

Where can I apply the 2K PU Paint?

chevronBottom

The 2K PU Paint can be applied to floors, walls, and furniture made of concrete, wood, metal, tiles, and more. The 2K PU Paint is compatible on all clean, dry substrate, except some plastics.

Where can I apply the 2K PU Paint?

chevronBottom

The 2K PU Paint is suitable on horizontal and vertical surfaces, both indoor and outdoor use.

How can I apply the 2K PU Paint?

chevronBottom

You can apply the 2K PU Paint with a brush, roller or a spray gun.

What is the 2K PU Paint consumption volume per coat? 

chevronBottom

In average, 0.29fl.oz/sqft 2K PU Paint is required per coat. We recommend two coats of 2K PU Paint. The consumption volume of the 2K PU Paint may vary depending on the substrate's porosity and absorption.

Does the 2K PU Topcoat has a strong smell? 

chevronBottom

Yes, the 2K PU Topcoat has a strong smell.  

At which temperatures can I apply the 2K PU Paint?

chevronBottom

The substrate and the ambient temperature must be minimum 40°F and maximum 85°F for the application of the 2K PU Paint. We recommend a temperature of 70°F when applying the 2K PU Paint.

Is there a maximum humidity level when working with 2K PU Paint?

chevronBottom

Yes, maximal air humidity when using the 2K PU Paint is 75%. 

How much EP Pigment paste do I need to add to the 2K PU Paint? 

chevronBottom

We recommend adding 5% EP Color Paste to the 2K PU Paint mixture, e.g. 100g (3.5oz) EP Color paste to 56fl.oz 2K PU Paint (42fl.oz. A-component and 14fl.oz. B-component). 

What is the layer thickness of the 2K PU Paint?

chevronBottom

In average, the 2K PU Paint has a thickness of 70 µm. The consumption volume and layer thickness may vary depending on the substrate's porosity and absorption.

What kind of preparation is needed for the 2K PU Paint?

chevronBottom

To use the 2K PU Paint, the substrate should be stable, dry, and free from dust, dirt, and release agents. Sanding is recommended when using the 2K PU Paint.

How long do I need to wait between the 2K PU Paint coats? 

chevronBottom

We recommend applying the second coat 2K PU Topcoat after min. 3h but not more than 20h. When working on a floor, you need to wait until the 2K PU Topcoat is walkable (approx. 6 hours) before applying the second coat.

What is the pot life for the 2K PU Paint?

chevronBottom

The pot life for the 2K PU Paint is 90 minutes at 80°F.

Which finish has the 2K PU Paint?

chevronBottom

The 2K PU Paint is available in matte or glossy. 

How is the consistency of the 2K PU Paint?

chevronBottom

The consistency of the 2K PU Paint is smooth.

Is the 2K PU Paint thinnable?

chevronBottom

Yes, the 2K PU Paint is thinnable with PU solvent (5-10%).

How long does it take until the 2K PU Topcoat is dust-free? 

chevronBottom

The 2K PU Topcoat is dust-free at 80°F and 60% humidity level in 40 minutes after application.

When is the 2K PU Paint touch dry /walkable?

chevronBottom

The 2K PU Paint is touch dry/walkable after 6 hours.

When is the 2K PU Paint loadable?

chevronBottom

The 2K PU Paint is loadable after 24 hours.

How long does it take until the 2K PU Paint is fully cured?

chevronBottom

The 2K PU Paint is fully cured after 6 days.

What are the advantages of the 2K PU Paint?

chevronBottom

The 2K PU Paint is UV-Resistant, Non-yellowing, elastic (non-cracking even on warping surfaces), scratch resistant, waterproof, chemical resistant, and highly durable.

Is the 2K PU Paint scratch/abrasion resistant?

chevronBottom

Yes, the 2K PU Topcoat is scratch/abrasion resistant. A weight loss of 65mg was registered on the Taber abrasion test conducted on the 2K PU Paint after 6 days. (1000 rotations with a grindin wheel on 2.2lbs pressure)

Is the 2K PU Paint open to diffusion/ breathable?

chevronBottom

No, the 2K PU Paint is not open to diffusion/breathable.

Is the 2K PU Paint colorfast? 

chevronBottom

Yes, the 2K PU Paint is colorfast. 

Which color is the untinted 2K PU Paint? 

chevronBottom

The 2K PU Paint is pre-tinted in white. 

Is the 2K PU Paint UV- resistant?

chevronBottom

Yes, the 2K PU Paint is UV-Resistant.

Is the 2K PU Paint solvent-free?

chevronBottom

No, the 2K PU Paint is not solvent-free.

Could abrasion marks and shiny spots (so-called writing effect) appear on the 2K PU Paint?

chevronBottom

No, the 2K PU Paint is resistant to abrasion marks.

What is the viscosity of the 2K PU Paint?

chevronBottom

The 2K PU Paint has a viscosity of 400-500 cP at 70°F. 

What is the density of the 2K PU Paint?

chevronBottom

The density of the 2K PU Paint is 74.9 ± 3.12 lb/ft³ at 70°F. 

How can I clean the tools after using the 2K PU Paint?

chevronBottom

You can clean the tools immediately after using the 2K PU Paint with thinner.

How can I clean and maintain the 2K PU Paint?

chevronBottom

We recommend cleaning the fully cured 2K PU Paint with light surfactants. We do not recommend using acidic or chlorinated cleaners or alkaline solutions when cleaning the 2K PU Paint. Do not clean the 2K PU Paint before complete chemical curing.

How can I store the 2K PU Paint? 

chevronBottom

You can only store the 2K PU Paint in the original container, tightly closed, in a cool, frost-free place, and in the dark. Protect the 2K PU Paint from sunlight.

How long is the shelf life of the 2K PU Paint? 

chevronBottom

The shelf life of the 2K PU Paint before opening is 12 months. The shelf life can be significantly shortened if the storage conditions are not properly followed.

How long is the shelf life after opening of the 2K PU Paint?

chevronBottom

The shelf life after opening of the 2K PU Paint is 6 months. The shelf life can be significantly shortened if the storage conditions are not properly followed.

At which temperature should I store the 2K PU Topcoat? 

chevronBottom

Store the 2K PU Paint between min. 45°F and max. 80°F. 

How long do I have to wait to put the 2K PU Topcoat on my epoxy resin?

chevronBottom

We recommend waiting until the epoxy resin is fully cured before applying the 2K PU Topcoat.

Can I use the 2K PU Topcoat glossy on my epoxy resin?

chevronBottom

Yes, you can apply the glossy 2K PU Topcoat on cured epoxy resin.

How can I apply the 2K Topcoat glossy on top of the matte?

chevronBottom

Yes, you can apply the glossy 2K PU Topcoat on top of the 2K PU Topcoat matte.

How can I apply the 2K Topcoat matte on top of the glossy?

chevronBottom

Yes, you can apply the matte 2K PU Topcoat on top of the 2K PU Topcoat glossy.

Is the 2K PU Topcoat as smooth as the epoxy resin?

chevronBottom

Yes, the 2K PU Topcoat will give a smooth finish, similar to epoxy resin.

Do I have to put a mask to use the 2K PU Topcoat/2K PU Paint? 

chevronBottom

We recommend wearing nitrile gloves (Class 3 for short-term use and Class 5 for longer or repeated contact) when using our 2K PU Topcoat or 2K PU Paint. We also recommend wearing a respiratory mask of class M3 or higher while mixing and processing the 2K PU Topcoat or 2K PU Paint.

Could I put food on the 2K PU Topcoat after complete curing?

chevronBottom

Yes, it is possible to put the 2K PU Topcoat in contact with food after full chemical curing. 

Could I put food on the 2K PU Paint after complete curing?

chevronBottom

Yes, it is possible to put the 2K PU Paint in contact with food after full chemical curing.

Do you sell the PU solvent for the 2K PU Topcoat?

chevronBottom

Unfortunately, we don’t sell the solvent for the 2K PU Topcoat. In general, the 2K PU Topcoat doesn’t need to be diluted.

Do you sell the PU solvent for the 2K PU Paint?

chevronBottom

Unfortunately, we don’t sell the solvent for the 2K PU Paint. In general, the 2K PU Paint doesn’t need to be diluted.

What is the heat resistance of the 2K PU Topcoat? 

chevronBottom

The heat resistance is the 2K PU Topcoat is 175°F.

What is the heat resistance of the 2K PU Paint?

chevronBottom

The heat resistance is the 2K PU Paint is 175°F.

Can I add microglass beads into the 2K PU Topcoat? How to achieve a non-slip finish with the 2K PU Topcoat? 

chevronBottom

Yes, you can add 1% microglass beads into the 2K PU Topcoat to achieve a non-slip finish. For example, add 15g Microglass beads into 42fl.oz. 2K PU Topcoat mixture (28fl.oz. A-component and 14fl.oz. B-component). Adding microglass beads can alter the transparency of the 2K PU topcoat. Adding microglass beads into the glossy 2K PU Topcoat can mattify the 2K PU Topcoat.

Can I add microglass beads into the 2K PU Paint? How to achieve a non-slip finish with the 2K PU Paint? 

chevronBottom

Yes, you can add 1% microglass beads into the 2K PU Paint to achieve a non-slip finish. For example, add 15g(0.5oz) Microglass beads into 56fl.oz. 2K PU Paint mixture (42fl.oz A-component and 14fl.oz. B-component). Adding microglass beads can alter the color of the 2K PU Paint. Adding microglass beads into the glossy 2K PU Topcoat can mattify the 2K PU Paint.

Can I apply an epoxy paint on the 2K PU Paint? 

chevronBottom

Yes, you can apply epoxy paint on top of the 2K PU Paint, but this doesn’t have any advantages as the 2K PU Paint is UV resistant and non-yellowing.

Can I pour epoxy resin on the 2K PU Topcoat?

chevronBottom

Yes, you can apply epoxy resin on top of the 2K PU Topcoat, but this doesn’t have any advantages as the 2K PU Topcoat is UV resistant and non-yellowing.

Can I pour epoxy resin on the 2K PU Paint?

chevronBottom

Yes, you can apply epoxy resin on top of the 2K PU Paint, but this doesn’t have any advantages as the 2K PU Paint is UV resistant and non-yellowing.

Can I apply the 2K PU Paint on epoxy paint? 

chevronBottom

Yes, you can apply the 2K PU Paint on epoxy paint. We recommend cleaning and sanding the epoxy paint before applying the 2K PU Paint.

Can I apply the 2K PU Paint on epoxy resin? 

chevronBottom

Yes, you can apply the 2K PU Paint on epoxy resin. We recommend waiting until the epoxy resin is fully cured and sanding before applying the 2K PU Paint.

Can I apply the 2K PU Topcoat on epoxy resin? 

chevronBottom

Yes, you can apply the 2K PU Topcoat on epoxy resin. We recommend waiting until the epoxy resin is fully cured and sanding before applying the 2K PU Topcoat.

Can I apply the 2K PU Topcoat on acrylic paint?

chevronBottom

Yes, you can apply the 2K PU Topcoat on acrylic paint. We recommend waiting until the paint is fully dry before applying the 2K PU Topcoat.

Is the 2K PU Topcoat resistant to chlore? 

chevronBottom

Yes, 2K PU Topcoat is resistant to chlore. You can use it in a pool. To ensure the longevity of your 2K PU Topcoat always keep the water pH between 7.2-7.6.

Is the 2K PU Paint resistant to chlore?

chevronBottom

Yes, 2K PU Paint – Pool Paint is resistant to chlore. To ensure the longevity of your 2K PU Paint – Pool Paint always keep the water pH between 7.2-7.6.

Can I use Pool Paint in any type of pool?

chevronBottom

Yes, the Pool Paint can be used in any type of pool. The Pool Paint can be used in chlorine, saltwater, and mineral pools indoors and outdoors.

Can I apply the 2K PU Paint on my epoxy resin floor? Does the 2K PU Paint cover the previous color?  

chevronBottom

Yes, you can apply the 2K PU Paint on top of your old epoxy resin floor. The 2K PU Paint is opaque and will cover the old epoxy resin flooring. 

Is the 2K PU Paint available in bright colors?

chevronBottom

No, the 2K PU Paint is pre-tinted in white and therefore only available in white and pastel colors.

Can I add EP Color Paste to the 2K PU Topcoat?

chevronBottom

We do not recommend adding EP Color Paste to the 2K PU Topcoat, as the color will always be see-through. You’ll not achieve an opaque coating by adding EP Color Paste into the 2K PU Topcoat.  

Which type of roller can I use for applying the 2K PU Topcoat? 

chevronBottom

The type of roller used to apply the 2K PU Topcoat depends on the substrate. We recommend using a foam roller on very smooth, non-absorbent surfaces and a lint-free paint roller on irregular, absorbent surfaces. 

Which type of roller can I use for applying the 2K PU Paint?

chevronBottom

The type of roller used to apply the 2K PU Paint depends on the substrate. We recommend using a foam roller on very smooth, non-absorbent surfaces and a lint-free paint roller on irregular, absorbent surfaces.

Is it possible to apply the 2K PU Paint on the microcement to cover it? 

chevronBottom

Yes, you can apply the 2K PU Paint on top of microcement if you wish to change cover the microcement.

Can I paint over stone carpet with 2K PU Paint? 

chevronBottom

It is possible to use the 2K PU Paint to paint over a stone carpet. If you want to achieve a smooth surface, we recommend filling the stone carpet with PU Filler before painting over with 2K PU Paint.

Could I put the 2K PU topcoat on a painting? 

chevronBottom

Yes, you can use the 2K PU Topcoat to protect a painting or a mural.

Can the 2K PU Paint be used as a sealing slurry? 

chevronBottom

No, the 2K PU Paint can’t be used as a sealing slurry. The 2K PU Paint will not stop the water rising by capillarity. If water rises by capillarity, the 2K PU Paint will peel off.

Can the 2K PU Topcoat be used as a sealing slurry?

chevronBottom

No, the 2K PU Topcoat can’t be used as a sealing slurry. The 2K PU Topcoat will not stop the water rising by capillarity. If water rises by capillarity, the 2K PU Topcoat will peel off. 

What will happen if I apply the 2K PU Topcoat on a wet substrate? What will happen if I apply the 2K PU Topcoat on a damp substrate?

chevronBottom

If you apply the 2K PU Topcoat on a wet or damp substrate, the 2K PU Topcoat will peel off.

What will happen if I apply the 2K PU Paint on a wet substrate? What will happen if I apply the 2K PU Paint on a damp substrate?

chevronBottom

If you apply the 2K PU Paint on a wet or damp substrate, the 2K PU Paint will peel off.

Could I put some glitter/metallic pigment in the 2K PU topcoat? 

chevronBottom

While it is possible to add metallic pigment into the 2K PU Topcoat, please note that adding metallic pigment into the 2K PU Topcoat will add a shimmer to the 2K PU Topcoat you won’t achieve a full metallic look like you would with epoxy resin.

Could I put some glitter/metallic pigment in the 2K PU Paint? 

chevronBottom

We do not recommend adding metallic pigment to the 2K PU Paint as it is pre-tinted in white and the metallic pigment won’t be visible.

Will be the epoxy resin yellow with the 2K PU Topcoat on it? 

chevronBottom

Yes, applying the 2K PU Topcoat on top of epoxy resin will not stop the yellowing completely. Applying the 2K PU Topcoat on top of epoxy resin will reduce and slow-down yellowing.

Can I cut on the 2K PU Topcoat? 

chevronBottom

Cutting on the PU Topcoat can result in microplastic on the cutlery and your food.

How can I give a glossy finish to a scratched surface? 

chevronBottom

You can apply our 2K PU topcoat with the glossy finish on a scratched surface. The 2K PU Topcoat will hide the superficial scratches and allow you to achieve a glossy surface easily.

Can I apply your 2K PU Topcoat or 2K PU Paint on top of an old PU Coating?

chevronBottom

Yes, it is possible to apply our polyurethane (2K PU Topcoat or 2K PU Paint) on top of an old PU paint. We recommend sanding and cleaning the old PU Paint before applying our 2K PU paint or 2K PU Topcoat.

Can I put your 2K PU Topcoat or 2K PU Paint on a warping or moving surface?  

chevronBottom

Yes, our 2K PU Paint and 2K PU Topcoat are elastic and can be applied to moving or warping surfaces without reinforcement. 2K PU Paint or 2K PU Topcoat can be applied inside van or on warping wood for example.

Which spray gun can be used to apply 2K PU topcoat? What nozzle size?

chevronBottom

When spraying the 2K PU Topcoat, it is possible to use HVLP (High Volume, Low Pressure), conventional air spray or airless spray gun. We recommend using a 1/16” to 5/64” spray nozzle for the 2K PU Topcoat. A 3/64” to 1/16” spray nozzle can be used to spray the 2K PU Topcoat when diluted with PU solvent.

Which spray gun can be used to apply 2K PU Paint? What nozzle size?

chevronBottom

When spraying the 2K PU Paint, it is possible to use HVLP (High Volume, Low Pressure), conventional air spray or airless spray gun. We recommend using a 1/16” to 5/64” spray nozzle for the 2K PU Paint. A 3/64” to 1/16” spray nozzle can be used to spray the 2K PU Paint when diluted with PU solvent.

I want to put stickers on my 2K PU Paint. Is it possible? Can I use the 2K PU Topcoat to protect it?  

chevronBottom

Yes, it is possible to add stickers on the 2K PU Paint. If you wish to protect the stickers with 2K PU Topcoat, we recommend testing it on one sticker to confirm compatibility.

I want to put stickers on my epoxy resin. Is it possible? Can I use the 2K PU Topcoat to protect it?  

chevronBottom

Yes, it is possible to add stickers on the epoxy resin. If you wish to protect the stickers with 2K PU Topcoat, we recommend testing it on one sticker to confirm compatibility.

Can the 2K PU Paint be sprayed on asphalt?

chevronBottom

Yes, the 2K PU Paint and the 2K PU Topcoat can be sprayed on asphalt, concrete, wood, and more.

Can I waterproof my pool with the Pool paint?

chevronBottom

No, the 2K PU Paint – Pool Paint can’t be used as a sealing slurry. Your pool must be waterproof before painting it with our 2K PU Paint – Pool Paint. 

Can I use the 2K PU Paint for my pool in order to carry out the waterproofing?

chevronBottom

No, you can’t use the 2K PU Paint to waterproof your surface. The surface must be waterproof before applying the 2K PU Paint. 

Can I apply the 2K PU Paint on glass? 

chevronBottom

Yes, you can apply our 2K PU Paint on glass, but the glass must be sanded and cleaned before applying our 2K PU Paint on it.

Can I apply 2K PU Topcoat on glass? 

chevronBottom

Yes, you can apply our 2K PU Topcoat on glass, but the glass must be sanded and cleaned before applying our 2K PU Topcoat on it.

Can I use the 2K PU Topcoat on photovoltaic panel?

chevronBottom

It is never recommended to apply a coating on top of a photovoltaic panel as it can reduce the panel’s efficiency, as well as interfering with the thermal expansion and heat dissipation. If you don’t mind your panel being less efficient and other possible complications, you can apply our 2K PU Topcoat on top of a photovoltaic panel as the 2K PU Topcoat will adhere to the surface.

Is the 2K PU Paint resistant to plasticizers? 

chevronBottom

Yes, 2K PU Paint is resistant to plasticizers. It allows contact with various types of plastic and rubber (such as wheels) without causing any discoloration or damage to the coating.

Is the 2K PU Topcoat resistant to plasticizers? 

chevronBottom

Yes, 2K PU Topcoat is resistant to plasticizers. It allows contact with various types of plastic and rubber (such as wheels) without causing any discoloration or damage to the coating.

Can I put the 2K PU topcoat on a 1K Paint? 

chevronBottom

Yes, it is possible to apply the 2K PU Topcoat on top of the 1K Paints such as Metallic Brush effect, Acrylic Protect, etc.

Can I put the 2K PU Paint on a 1K Paint?

chevronBottom

Yes, it is possible to apply the 2K PU Paint on top of the 1K Paints such as Metallic Brush effect, Acrylic Protect, etc.

Can I pour the 2K PU Topcoat? 

chevronBottom

No, you can’t pour the 2K PU Topcoat, but you can apply more layers. The thickness is in average 70µm for one coat. 

Can I pour the 2K PU Paint?

chevronBottom

No, you can’t pour the 2K PU Paint, but you can apply more layers. The thickness is in average 100µm for one coat. 

Can I use the 2K PU Paint for my boat? 

chevronBottom

Yes, you can use the 2K PU Paint for your boat, it’s suitable for a contact with sea water and freshwater.

Can I use the 2K PU Topcoat for my boat?

chevronBottom

Yes, you can use the 2K PU Topcoat for your boat, it’s suitable for a contact with sea water and freshwater.

Can I apply the epoxy resin with fiber glass to repair my boat and after curing can I protect the epoxy resin with a layer of 2K PU Paint? 

chevronBottom

Yes, it is possible to apply the 2K PU Paint or 2K PU Topcoat on top of epoxy resin and fiberglass.

How to apply the 2K PU Topcoat?

chevronBottom

 Instructions For Use 2K PU Topcoat

  1. Ensure the substrate is stable, clean, dry, and free from any substances that may prevent proper adhesion. We recommend increasing the adhesion by sanding.
  2. Mix the resin 2K PU Topcoat A-component and the hardener 2K PU Topcoat B-component in a 2 to 1 mixing ratio (e.g. 28fl.oz. resin 2K PU Topcoat A-component with 14fl.oz. hardener PU Topcoat B-component).
  3. Stir through the edge and bottom of the mixing cup as the 2K PU Topcoat components will settle there. Ideally, pour into a clean mixing cup and mix again until the mixture is streak-free. This ensures that the resin A-component and hardener B-component are completely mixed together.
  4. Pour the 2K PU Topcoat mixture into a paint tray and apply it thinly with a roller in a criss-cross pattern.
  5. Let the first coat 2K PU Topcoat cure and apply the second coat in the same way. We recommend applying the second coat 2K PU Topcoat after min. 6h but not more than 20h.
    Pro Tip for Flooring: Do not wear rubber-soled shoes while sanding, cleaning, after cleaning, or during the application of the 2K PU Topcoat, as rubber microparticles may cause an uneven finish. Rubber-soled shoes can be worn once the second coat of 2K PU Topcoat is cured. Wait until the 2K PU Topcoat is walkable (approx. 12 hours) before applying the second coat.

How to apply the 2K PU Paint?

chevronBottom

Instructions For Use 2K PU Paint

  1. Ensure the substrate is stable, clean, dry, and free from any substances that may prevent proper adhesion. We recommend increasing the adhesion by sanding.
  2. Shake both 2K PU Paint components individually before use. Then, mix the resin A-component and the hardener B-component in a 3 to 1 mixing ratio (e.g. 42fl.oz. resin A-component 2K PU Paint with 14fl.oz. hardener B-component 2K PU Paint). Add 5% EP Color Paste to the resin-hardener 2K PU Paint mixture to color it (e.g. 100g (3.5oz) EP Color Paste to 56fl.oz. resin-hardener 2K PU Paint mixture).
  3. Stir through the edge and bottom of the mixing cup as the 2K PU Paint will settle there. Ideally, pour into a clean mixing cup and mix again until the mixture is streak-free. This ensures that the resin A-component and hardener B-component are completely mixed together.
  4. Pour the 2K PU Paint mixture into a paint tray and apply it thinly with a roller in a criss-cross pattern.
  5. Let the first coat cure and apply the second coat in the same way. We recommend applying the second coat after min. 3h but not more than 20h.
    Pro Tip for Flooring: Do not wear rubber-soled shoes while sanding, cleaning, after cleaning, or during the application of the 2K PU Paint, as rubber microparticles may cause an uneven finish. Rubber-soled shoes can be worn once the second coat of 2K PU Paint is cured. Wait until the 2K PU Paint is walkable (approx. 6 hours) before applying the second coat.

 

How to apply the Pool Paint?

chevronBottom

Instructions For Use 2K PU Paint – Pool Paint

  1. Ensure the pool is sealed, stable, clean, dry, and free from any substances that may prevent proper adhesion. We recommend increasing the adhesion by sanding.
  2. Shake both 2K PU Paint components individually before use. Then, mix the resin A-component and the hardener B-component in a 3 to 1 mixing ratio (e.g. 42fl.oz. resin A-component 2K PU Paint with 14fl.oz. hardener B-component 2K PU Paint). Add 5% EP Color Paste to the 2K PU Paint resin-hardener mixture to color it (e.g. 100g (3.5oz) EP Color Paste to 56fl.oz. resin-hardener 2K PU Paint mixture).
  3. Stir through the edge and bottom of the mixing cup as the 2K PU Paint compoenents will settle there. Ideally, pour into a clean mixing cup and mix again until the mixture is streak-free. This ensures that the resin A-component and hardener B-component are completely mixed together.
  4. Pour the mixture into a paint tray and apply it thinly with a roller in a criss-cross pattern.
  5. Let the first coat of 2K PU Paint cure and apply the second coat in the same way. We recommend applying the second coat of 2K PU Paint after min. 3h but not more than 20h.
  6. We recommend coating the walls before coating the bottom of the pool.
    Pro Tip for Flooring: Do not wear rubber-soled shoes while sanding, cleaning, after cleaning, or during the application of the 2K PU Paint, as rubber microparticles may cause an uneven finish. Rubber-soled shoes can be worn once the second coat of 2K PU Paint is cured. Wait until the 2K PU Paint is walkable (approx. 6 hours) before applying the second coat.

Can I use PU Topcoat as a transparent paint on natural stone?

chevronBottom

Yes, our PU Topcoat can be used as a transparent paint on natural stone.

Can I use PU Paint as a colored paint on natural stone?

chevronBottom

Yes, our PU Paint can be used as a transparent paint on natural stone.

Do you have any resin that I can apply with a roller very thinly?

chevronBottom

Yes, our PU Topcoat and PU Paint can be applied with a roller thinly. 

Can I use the polishing paste on polyurethane resin?

chevronBottom

Yes, it is possible to use the polishing paste to polish our polyurethane.

How to sand polyurethane resin, PU Topcoat, PU Paint?

chevronBottom

If you wish to sand to remove the polyurethane resin, we recommend using a coarse grit of P80-P120. If you wish only to sand before applying a new layer of polyurethane, we recommend using a grit size of P400, it is not necessary to use a finer grit size between the layers. If you wish to sand and polish the polyurethane after curing, we recommend wet sanding after completechemical curing. To sand and polish polyurethane resin, start with a P400-600 grit size. You can also start with a P800 grit if your polyurethane is smooth. Work your way up gradually up to P3000 as you would for epoxy resin.  

Do I need to double the quantities of PU Topcoat and PU Paint to apply two coats?

chevronBottom

Yes, we recommend doubling the quantities to apply two coats of PU paint or PU Topcoat when bought separately. 

Do I need to sand between the layers PU Topcoat or PU paint?

chevronBottom

No, it is not necessary to sand between the layers of PU Topcoat or PU Paint. We recommend waiting minimum 6h and maximum 20h at 70°F between the PU layers. If you wait longer than 20h, we do recommend sanding lightly between the layers of PU using a P400 grit.

What will happen to the PU Topcoat and PU Paint if the pH level of my pool is out of the 7.2-7.6 range?

chevronBottom

If the pH level of your pool is lower than 7.2, the PU paint and PU Topcoat will peel off. If the pH level of your pool is over 7.6, the PU Paint and PU Topcoat will whiten. 

Is the 2K PU Topcoat UV Resistant? 

chevronBottom

Yes, the 2K PU Topcoat is UV-resistant. The 2K PU Topcoat will not yellow. 

Which paint is the most resistant one to apply to an outdoor floor, such as a terrace?

chevronBottom

Our PU Paint is our most resistant flooring paint that can be applied outdoors. It is possible to add microglass beads into the PU paint to achieve a non-slip finish. Please note that adding microglass beads in the PU paint will change the color of the PU paint.

Can I order your 2K PU Topcoat alone?

chevronBottom

Yes, it is possible to order the 2K PU Topcoat only.

What Is the consumption volume for 2 coats of 2K PU Topcoat? 

chevronBottom

We always recommend applying 2 coats of 2K PU Topcoat. For both coats of PU Topcoat, you will need 0.56fl.oz./sqft (0.28fl.oz/sqft per coat). 

Do you have a calculator to calculate the required amount of polyurethane?

chevronBottom

No, we do not have a polyurethane calculator.

Which paint can I use to paint a radiator/heater?

chevronBottom

We recommend either our 2K PU Paint to paint a radiator or heater.

Which paint can I apply in a bathtub or sink?

chevronBottom

To paint a bathtub or sink, we recommend using our 2K PU PAINT.

Do you have colored paint for outdoor tiles?

chevronBottom

Yes, our 2K PU Paint can be used to paint outdoor tiles.

Do you have a transparent paint for outdoor tiles?

chevronBottom

Yes, our 2K PU Topcoat can be used as transparent paint on outdoor tiles.

Which paint to use to keep the natural look of wood?

chevronBottom

We recommend our 2K PU Topcoat as a transparent paint on wood.

Do you have any product to waterproof a pool?

chevronBottom

No, we do not have any product to waterproof a pool.

Do you have a primer and paint for a PVC shower drain trap?

chevronBottom

We do not have any product to paint PVC and other plastics with frequent water contact.  

What is the smallest PU Paint quantity available?

chevronBottom

The smallest PU paint quantity available is 42fl.oz (28fl.oz. PU Paint A-component and 14fl.oz. PU Paint B-Component) .

What is the smallest PU Topcoat quantity available?

chevronBottom

The smallest PU paint quantity available Is 56fl.oz (42fl.oz. PU Topcoat A-component and 14fl.oz. PU Topcoat B-Comonent) .

Is the PU Paint colors standard RAL colors?

chevronBottom

The EP color paste added into the PU Paint are standard RAL colors but the PU Paint is pre-tintend and white and all colors added into the PU Paint are pastel and not identical to the RAL catalogue.

Is the PU Paint pre-tinted?

chevronBottom

The PU Paint is pre-tinted in white, to obtain another shade EP Color paste must be added into the PU Paint.

Do you need to apply the PU Topcoat on top of the PU Paint to protect it?

chevronBottom

No, you do not need to apply the PU Topcoat on top of the PU Paint to protect it.

Can I apply the PU topcoat on top of wall paint?

chevronBottom

Yes, it is possible to apply our PU topcoat on top of a water-based paint such as, a wall paint or our 1k primer and metallic brush effect.

Can I apply the PU topcoat to a slope?

chevronBottom

Yes, the PU topcoat is applied with a foam roller in thin layers and can be applied to slope. 

Can I apply the PU paint to a slope?

chevronBottom

Yes, the PU paint is applied with a foam roller in thin layers and can be applied to slope. 

Is the A-component of the 2K PU paint very liquid?

chevronBottom

The A-component of the 2K PU Paint is a thick liquid. The matte A-component 2k PU paint is thicker than the glossy A-component of the 2K PU paint. 

Is the A-component of the 2K PU topcoat very liquid?

chevronBottom

The A-component of the 2K PU Topcoat is a thick liquid. The matte A-component 2k PU topcoat is thicker than the glossy A-component of the 2K PU topcoat. 

Is the B-component of the 2K PU paint very liquid?

chevronBottom

The B-component of the 2K PU Paint is a liquid. The matte B-component 2k PU paint is a bit thicker than the glossy B-component of the 2K PU paint. 

Is the B-component of the 2K PU topcoat very liquid?

chevronBottom

The B-component of the 2K PU Topcoat is a liquid. The matte B-component 2k PU topcoat is a bit thicker than the glossy B-component of the 2K PU topcoat. 

Can I use the 2K PU Paint to prevent water from sinking inside my concrete floor?

chevronBottom

Yes, you can use the 2K PU Paint to prevent water from going through the concrete but the 2K PU Paint can’t be used to prevent water from rising from under the concrete. 

Can I use the 2K PU Topcoat to prevent water from sinking inside my concrete floor?

chevronBottom

Yes, you can use the 2K PU Topcoat to prevent water from going through the concrete but the 2K PU Topcoat can’t be used to prevent water from rising from under the concrete. 

Is the PU Paint available in matte and glossy?

chevronBottom

Yes, the PU Paint is available in both matte and glossy finish.

Is the PU Topcoat available in matte and glossy?

chevronBottom

Yes, the PU topcoat is available in both matte and glossy finish.

What is the working time of the PU topcoat?

chevronBottom

The working time of the PU topcoat is approximately 30min at 70°F.

What is the working time of the PU paint?

chevronBottom

The working time of the PU paint is approximately 20min at 70°F.

Which paint can I use to paint my stairs?

chevronBottom

Indoors, you can use our concrete paint 2K or PU Paint to paint stairs. Outdoors, we recommend using our PU Paint to paint stairs. Our PU Topcoat can be used to paint stairs, if a transparent coat is wanted.

Which resin do I need if I want something resistant to UV rays so it doesn’t turn yellow?

chevronBottom

If you want a transparent resin that never yellows, we recommend our 2K PU topcoat. The 2K PU Topcoat is 100% resistant to UV-rays and doesn’t yellow. 

Can I apply the 2K PU topcoat on top of epoxy resin to stop the yellowing?

chevronBottom

You can apply the 2K PU topcoat on top of epoxy resin to help slow down the yellowing of the epoxy resin but no, applying the 2K PU topcoat on top of epoxy resin will not prevent the epoxy resin from yellowing. 

Can I use any roller with PU Paint?

chevronBottom

It is important to use a solvent-resistant roller when working with our PU Paint.

Can I use any roller with PU Topcoat?

chevronBottom

It is important to use a solvent-resistant roller when working with our PU Topcoat.

Why do the PU Paint colors look different than the EP Color paste pure?

chevronBottom

The PU Paint is pre-tinted in white and therefore all EP Color paste added into the PU Paint are lighter. 

Is it possible to have a really intense black or red color with the PU Paint?

chevronBottom

No, it is not possible to achieve a really back or intense red color with the PU Paint, as the base is pre-tinted in white. 

How to calculate the mixing ratio if I add the pigment in the A-component before mixing in the B-component?

chevronBottom

If you are mixing the pigment inside the A-component before adding the hardener B-component, you need to slightly adjust the mixing ratio to take the pigment’s weight into consideration.

Can i use PU paint on marble? 

chevronBottom

yes, you can use pu paint on marble.

Can i use PU topcoat on marble?

chevronBottom

Yes, you can use pu topcoat on marble.

Which resin for a white flooring?

chevronBottom

We recommend using our 2K PU Paint to achieve a white flooring.

Which resin can I use for wooden stairs?

chevronBottom

We recommend using our 2K PU Paint or 2K PU topcoat to coat wooden stairs. Our Concrete paint 2k can also be used to coat wooden stairs indoors.

Do you have a sealer to apply on top of the exposed concrete to make it waterproof?

chevronBottom

Yes, you can use our PU Topcoat on top of the exposed concrete set to make it waterproof.

Do you have a sealer to apply on top of the rock design wall to make it waterproof?

chevronBottom

Yes, you can use our PU Topcoat on top of the rock design wall set to make it waterproof.

Which product can I use to paint a bathtub?

chevronBottom

We recommend using our PU Paint to paint a bathtub. Our PU topcoat can be used if you wish to apply a clear coat on your bathtub.

Which paint do you recommend to paint windows sill?

chevronBottom

For windows sill, we recommend using our PU Paint.

Which paint can I use to paint my sink?

chevronBottom

We recommend using our PU Paint to paint a sink. Our PU topcoat can be used if you wish to apply a clear coat on your sink.

Can I paint a shower tray made of cast marble?

chevronBottom

We recommend using our PU paint to paint a shower tray made of marble. 

Can I paint a shower tray?

chevronBottom

We recommend using our PU paint to paint a shower tray. Please note that if your shower tray is made of plastic, we recommend sanding and doing a small test with the PU paint to test compatibility.

Which resin for a white flooring?

chevronBottom

We recommend using our 2K PU Paint to achieve a white flooring.

Which resin can I use for wooden stairs?

chevronBottom

We recommend using our 2K PU Paint or 2K PU topcoat to coat wooden stairs. Our Concrete paint 2k can also be used to coat wooden stairs indoors.

The most frequently asked questions about Concrete Paint

What is CONCRETE PAINT 2K?

chevronBottom

CONCRETE PAINT 2K is a 2-components epoxy resin-based paint for indoor use.

When should I use CONCRETE PAINT 2K?

chevronBottom

CONCRETE PAINT 2K is the best choice for high-traffic, heavily used, or water-exposed surfaces (but not permanent water contact) indoors. CONCRETE PAINT 2K is designed for absorbing concrete, stone, or screed surfaces, garages, basements, warehouses, and industrial halls floors and walls exposed to heavy wear and tear, areas with water contact (e.g., bathrooms, laundry rooms), and surfaces requiring a waterproof, highly durable coating.
CONCRETE PAINT 2K can be used as flooring paint, flooring sealant, wall paint, concrete paint, cement paint, screed paint, plaster paint, and stone paint indoors.

Is CONCRETE PAINT 2K suitable for outdoor use?

chevronBottom

CONCRETE PAINT 2K is only suitable for indoors. 

How should I apply CONCRETE PAINT 2K?

chevronBottom

Instructions for Use CONCRETE PAINT 2K

  1. Before using CONCRETE PAINT 2K, the temperature of the room and the substrate should be at least +45°F. The CONCRETE PAINT 2K itself should be at least +65°F.
  2. Before painting with CONCRETE PAINT 2K the substrate should be clean, dry, and free of any substance that may prevent the paint's adhesion.
  3. Mix resin CONCRETE PAINT 2K (A-component) with hardener CONCRETE PAINT 2K (B-component) in a ratio of 4:1 (e.g., 4gal resin : 1gal hardener). Optionally, the mixture CONCRETE PAINT 2K can be diluted by adding 20% water. Please note that adding water into the concrete paint will impact the coverage.
  4. To dye the CONCRETE PAINT 2K resin-hardener mixture, add approximately 5% WB PIGMENT to it. (e.g. 100g (3.5oz) WB PIGMENT for 50fl.oz. (40fl.oz. A+10fl.oz. B) CONCRETE PAINT 2K)
  5. Stir through the edge and bottom of the mixing cup as the CONCRETE PAINT 2K will settle there. Ideally, pour into a clean mixing cup and mix again until the CONCRETE PAINT 2K is streak-free. This ensures that the resin A-component and hardener B-component are completely mixed together.
  6. To prevent the CONCRETE PAINT 2K from thickening too quickly, pour the mixed and colored CONCRETE PAINT 2K into a paint tray immediately after mixing.
  7. Apply the CONCRETE PAINT 2K to the desired surface using a foam roller in a criss-cross pattern.
  8. Wait at least 12-48 hours before applying the second coat of CONCRETE PAINT 2K.
  9. Allow the last coat of CONCRETE PAINT 2K to dry and harden.

Do I need to apply multiple coats of Concrete  Paint?
How many coats of Concrete  Paint are necessary?

chevronBottom

For proper coverage and durability, two coats of 2k Concrete Paint are necessary. In some cases, especially with old concrete, a third coat of concrete paint might be needed. 

How much CONCRETE PAINT 2K do I need per sqfr?

chevronBottom

The consumption volume of CONCRETE PAINT 2K is in average 0.72oz/sqft per coat, we recommend 2 coats. The porosity of the substrate can influence the consumption volume of CONCRETE PAINT 2K.  

How long should I wait between CONCRETE PAINT 2K coats?

chevronBottom

The waiting time between coats of CONCRETE PAINT 2K is at least 12 hours and no more than 48 hours. If you wait longer than 48h between your layers of CONCRETE PAINT 2K, you must sand the first layer CONCRETE PAINT 2K before applying a new layer of CONCRETE PAINT 2K. 

How long does it take for the CONCRETE PAINT 2K to dry?

chevronBottom

The CONCRETE PAINT 2K can be walked on after 24h when applied and let to cure at  70°F with a humidity level of 65%.
The CONCRETE PAINT 2K is lightly loadable after approximatively 2days when applied and let to cure at  70°F with a humidity level of 65%.

The CONCRETE PAINT 2K is fully loadable after 7days when applied and let to cure at  70°F with a humidity level of 65%.

At temperatures below 65°F, the chemical reaction of the CONCRETE PAINT 2K is significantly delayed, which prolongs the curing time and impacts the technical properties of the CONCRETE PAINT 2K.
The risk of optical defects such as whitening and carbamate formation also increases when using CONCRETE PAINT 2K under 65°F.

How dry does the concrete needs to be to be painted with 2k concrete paint?

chevronBottom

Your concrete should not have a humidity level higher than 4% before painting with 2k concrete paint. 

How to paint concrete paint and have one homogeneous surface?

chevronBottom

2k Concrete paint must be applied wet-on-wet on continuous surfaces and carefully worked in to avoid overlaps.

How to prevent tear and wear on flooring? 

chevronBottom

Coatings on floor surfaces are subject to wear depending on usage. The intensity and visibility of optical impairments depend on the chosen color shade. The technical functionality of the floor surfaces is not affected by this. Components of organic substances (e.g., coffee, tea, red wine, plant residues, etc.) and chemicals such as disinfectants and acids can lead to color changes in the coating.
When exposed to abrasion (e.g., from sand, metal shavings, or chair casters), light scratches and grooves may form on the surface. These optical changes do not affect functionality. Light or brilliant color shades may show dirt and signs of use more easily than darker and muted shades.

Do you apply the concrete paint with a foam or a paint roller?

chevronBottom

You can apply the 2k concrete paint with a foam or paint roller, we recommend a paint roller when working on concrete.

There are loose fibre/nap fibre on my paint roller, how can I remove them?

chevronBottom

Pre-Wash the Roller – Before first use, rinse the paint roller with water, then let it dry completely. Pre-washing the paint roller helps remove loose fibres from the paint roller.
Use Painter's Tape – Wrap painter’s tape around the paint roller and peel it off to remove any loose fibres from the roller before painting.
Avoid Excessive Pressure – Apply even pressure while rolling to prevent fibres from pulling out.

I have leftover concrete paint can I use it for something else?

chevronBottom

Yes, our 2k concrete paint can be used to paint other surfaces than concrete. 

What is the recommended working temperature with CONCRETE PAINT 2K?

chevronBottom

The recommended working temperature when using CONCRETE PAINT 2K (substrate temperature, room temperature, CONCRETE PAINT 2K temperature) is 70°F.

What is the maximum working temperature with CONCRETE PAINT 2K?

chevronBottom

The maximum working temperature when using CONCRETE PAINT 2K (substrate temperature, room temperature, CONCRETE PAINT 2K temperature) is 75°F. Do not CONCRETE PAINT 2K dry and cure at more than 75°F.

What is the minimum working temperature of the CONCRETE PAINT 2K?

chevronBottom

The minimum working temperature when using CONCRETE PAINT 2K (substrate temperature, room temperature) is 45°F but your CONCRETE PAINT 2K components must be at least 65°F. Working with CONCRETE PAINT 2K or letting CONCRETE PAINT 2K dry under 45°F can cause drying problem. 

What is the recommended humidity level when working with CONCRETE PAINT 2K?

chevronBottom

The recommended humidity level when working with CONCRETE PAINT 2K is 65%.

What is the maximum humidity level when working with CONCRETE PAINT 2K?

chevronBottom

The maximum humidity level when working with CONCRETE PAINT 2K is 80%.

What is the pot life or working time of the CONCRETE PAINT 2K?

chevronBottom

The CONCRETE PAINT 2K has a working time of 40min at 70°F.
The CONCRETE PAINT 2K has a working time of 25min at 80°F. 
After the working time it is no longer possible to use the CONCRETE PAINT 2K.

How many sqft can I paint with 1lb CONCRETE PAINT 2k?

chevronBottom

It is possible to paint 22sqft with 1lb CONCRETE PAINT 2K. If the surface you are painting is rough or highly absorbent, you will need more CONCRETE PAINT 2K.

What is the finish of your concrete paint?

chevronBottom

Our concrete paint has a satin finish except the ultra white 2k concrete paint which is matte.

How much WB PIGMENT do you need to add to CONCRETE PAINT 2K?

chevronBottom

We recommend adding 5% WB PIGMENT into the CONCRETE PAINT 2K. For example, 40fl.oz. CONCRETE PAINT 2K A-component, with 10fl.oz. CONCRETE PAINT 2K B-component and 100g (3.5oz) WB PIGMENT.

What accessories are included in the CONCRETE PAINT 2K accessory set?

chevronBottom

The following accessories are included in the CONCRETE PAINT 2K accessory set: 

  • 1x Flat Brush – 3
  • 1x Paint Roller 10 with Handle
  • 1x Stir Stick
  • 1x Paint Tray 12×13
  • 1x Nitrile Gloves
  • 1x Masking Tape 1 1/4 x 164ft
  • 1x Mixing Bucket 8 litres
  • 1x Plastic Drop Cloth – Large – 495sqft

Can I apply your CONCRETE PAINT 2K on top of old concrete paint?

chevronBottom

No, we do not recommend applying our CONCRETE PAINT 2K on top of an old concrete paint. CONCRETE PAINT 2K might not stick well to the old paint, we recommend sanding to remove the old paint before applying the CONCRETE PAINT 2K. 

What will happen if I apply your CONCRETE PAINT 2K outside in the sun?

chevronBottom

We do not recommend applying CONCRETE PAINT 2K outside as the CONCRETE PAINT 2K will bleach out in the sun and eventually peel off. CONCRETE PAINT 2K is only recommended for indoor use.

How can I remove the CONCRETE PAINT 2K?

chevronBottom

Uncured CONCRETE PAINT 2K can be removed with acetone. Cured CONCRETE PAINT 2K can only be removed by sanding. 

Can I spray your CONCRETE PAINT 2K with a spray gun?

chevronBottom

Yes, you can spray our CONCRETE PAINT 2K. Our CONCRETE PAINT 2K can be thinned with up to 5% water and applied using a spray gun. Please note that to achieve proper coverage with a spray gun, more layers CONCRETE PAINT 2K will be needed.
Please note that our 2K paints are curing by chemical process. It is important to mix small quantity and clean immediately the after use to prevent the product from curing inside the spray gun. 

Is your CONCRETE PAINT 2K heat resistant?

chevronBottom

Our CONCRETE PAINT 2K is heat resistant up to 140°F.

Can I apply your CONCRETE PAINT 2K on underfloor heating?

chevronBottom

Yes, you can apply CONCRETE PAINT 2K on underfloor heating. We recommend turning on the heating once the CONCRETE PAINT 2K is no longer tacky and letting it on for 7days.

Do you have color samples of your concrete paint
Do you have a catalogue of your concrete paint?

chevronBottom

No, we do not have a catalogue or samples of our concrete paint. All the pictures and videos on our website show the concrete paint in the most accurate way possible. 

Can I order another color of concrete paint than the one online?

chevronBottom

It is possible to order our concrete paint without pigment and add the WB PIGMENT of your choice.

Can you make a custom color of concrete paint? Can I have the concrete paint pre-colored?

chevronBottom

Unfortunately, it is not possible to have a custom color ready made at our warehouse but it is possible to mix different WB pigment to achieve a custom concrete paint 2k color. 

Why doesn't the color of my concrete paint look like the picture on the website?

chevronBottom

While we do our best to provide accurate representations of our concrete paint colors online, the shade you receive may appear slightly different in person. This can be due to several factors, including differences in screen settings and lighting.

Additionally, the final appearance of the paint can vary depending on the substrate (the surface it's applied to) and the lighting conditions in the room. Natural and artificial light can both affect how the color is perceived, so the paint may look different depending on the time of day or the intensity of the light.

Why does my CONCRETE PAINT 2K not have good coverage?

chevronBottom

To ensure proper coverage with the CONCRETE PAINT 2K, it is important to mix the individual components well before mixing them together. The fillers and binders in the CONCRETE PAINT 2K A component can settle at the bottom of the container over time, leaving the top layer mostly water. We recommend mixing the CONCRETE PAINT 2K A component upside down for a while and shaking it well before mixing it with CONCRETE PAINT 2K component B in a 4:1 ratio. The following questions can help us find out the cause of the problem:
On what type of concrete did you apply the concrete paint 2k?
What preparation did you do before applying the concrete paint 2k?
Was the surface pre-treated before applying the concrete paint 2k?
At what temperature was the concrete paint 2k applied and left to dry ?
How much concrete paint 2k was used, and how many square metres were covered?
How many coats of concrete paint 2k were applied, and how long between each coat?
What was the room’s humidity level when you applied and left the concrete paint 2k cure?

Do you have transparent concrete paint?

chevronBottom

Our CONCRETE PAINT 2K are milky due to the binders and fillers and are not suitable as transparent coatings. Our 2K PU Topcoat can be used as a transparent topcoat on concrete.

Why does my CONCRETE PAINT 2K scratch easily?

chevronBottom

If CONCRETE PAINT 2K scratches easily, it can be a sign that the CONCRETE PAINT 2K didn’t cure properly or that the substrate wasn’t stable/ well prepared. It is also important to not wait too long between the layers of CONCRETE PAINT 2K. The following questions can help us find out the cause of the problem:
On what type of concrete did you apply the CONCRETE PAINT 2K?
What preparation did you do before applying the CONCRETE PAINT 2K?
Was the surface pre-treated before applying the CONCRETE PAINT 2K?
At what temperature was the CONCRETE PAINT 2K applied and left to dry ?
How much CONCRETE PAINT 2K was used, and how many sqft were covered?
How many coats of CONCRETE PAINT 2K were applied, and how long between each coat?
What was the room’s humidity level when you applied and left the CONCRETE PAINT 2K cure?

Why does my CONCRETE PAINT 1K scratch easily?

chevronBottom

Our CONCRETE PAINT 1K is not as scratch resistant as our CONCRETE PAINT 2K. It is not made for heavy wear and tear. For high traffic areas, we recommend using our CONCRETE PAINT 2K.

Why is my CONCRETE PAINT 1K peeling off? Why isn’t my CONCRETE PAINT 1K sticking to the concrete?

chevronBottom

If CONCRETE PAINT 1K peels off, it can be a sign that the substrate, where the CONCRETE PAINT 1K was applied, wasn’t stable/ well prepared. It is also important to not wait too long between the layers of CONCRETE PAINT 1K to avoid peeling issues. The CONCRETE PAINT 1K is also not compatible with plasticizers. The following questions can help us find out the cause of the problem:

On what type of concrete did you apply the CONCRETE PAINT 1K?
What preparation did you do before applying the CONCRETE PAINT 1K?
Was the surface pre-treated before applying the CONCRETE PAINT 1K?
At what temperature was the CONCRETE PAINT 1K applied and left to dry?
When did the peeling of CONCRETE PAINT 1K occur?

Why is my CONCRETE PAINT 2K peeling off? Why isn’t my CONCRETE PAINT 2K sticking to the concrete?

chevronBottom

If CONCRETE PAINT 2K peels off, it can be a sign that the substrate, where the CONCRETE PAINT 2K was applied, wasn’t stable/ well prepared. It is also important to not wait too long between the layers of CONCRETE PAINT 2K to avoid peeling issues. The CONCRETE PAINT 1K is also not compatible with high level of plasticizers. The following questions can help us find out the cause of the problem:

On what type of concrete did you apply the CONCRETE PAINT 2K?
What preparation did you do before applying the CONCRETE PAINT 2K?
Was the surface pre-treated before applying the CONCRETE PAINT 2K?
At what temperature was the CONCRETE PAINT 2K applied and left to dry?
How much CONCRETE PAINT 2K was used, and how many sqft were covered?
How many coats of CONCRETE PAINT 2K were applied, and how long between each coat?
What was the room’s humidity level when you applied and left the CONCRETE PAINT 2K cure?
When did the peeling of CONCRETE PAINT 2K occur?

Can I come to St petersburg to look at your concrete paint?

chevronBottom

While it is possible to come pick up your order at our warehouse and office in St Petersburg, we do not have a showroom where you can see the different colors of concrete paint.

How long will the concrete paint stay on my concrete?

chevronBottom

Our concrete paints are made to last, we can’t tell you how long it last but with proper care and proper application the paint will last for years.

When will I need to repaint, my concrete painted with concrete paint?

chevronBottom

Our concrete paints are made to last, we can’t tell you how long it last but with proper care and proper application the paint will not require touch up quickly.

Do I need a varnish, sealer on top of my concrete paint?

chevronBottom

No, you do not need to seal the concrete paint.

How do I clean my CONCRETE PAINT 2K?

chevronBottom

CONCRETE PAINT 2K is an water-based epoxy resin paint. We recommend regularly dusting the surface coated with CONCRETE PAINT 2K and, cleaning with water and a mild surfactant.

Can I add more/ less hardener to my CONCRETE PAINT 2K?

chevronBottom

No, you must always follow the right mixing ratio or the CONCRETE PAINT 2K will not cure properly. Adding more hardener in the CONCRETE PAINT 2K will not result in the paint curing faster.

What is the mixing ratio for 2K Concrete Paint?

chevronBottom

The CONCRETE PAINT 2K mixing ratio is 4:1 (A:B), by weight. Always use a scale to measure the correct amount of product you are mixing for accuracy. 
Using a precise scale ensures the best results and avoids issues with curing.

What container sizes are available for Concrete paint?

chevronBottom

CONCRETE PAINT 2K Component A 40fl.oz., 1gal, 2gal
CONCRETE PAINT 2K Component B: 10fl.oz., 0.25gal

Do I need to buy pigment separately for the Concrete paint?

chevronBottom

No, if your chosen color requires pigment, it will automatically be included in your order of concrete paint 2k.

Does concrete paint have a strong smell?

chevronBottom

No, our concrete paint is low in VOCs, meaning minimal odour compared to solvent-based paints.

Can concrete paint be used to fill in cracks and give a smooth result?

chevronBottom

No, the concrete paint is not made to fill in cracks and give a smooth finish. The concrete paint is a paint to give a new color, it will keep the structure of your floor.

Is your concrete paint slip-resistant?

chevronBottom

Our concrete paint is only applied thinly and will keep the structure of the existing floor. A surface painted with concrete paint will not be more slippery.

Can I use concrete paint to seal my floor&/walls?

chevronBottom

No, our concrete paint isn’t made to seal the floors and walls. Our concrete paint is open to diffusion.

Can I put your concrete paint in my pool?

chevronBottom

No, our concrete paint isn’t recommended in pools or area with permanent water contact.

Will CONCRETE PAINT 2K in my garage help with stains?

chevronBottom

Yes, our CONCRETE PAINT 2K is easy to clean and the oil, or liquid that could stain the concrete will take longer to soak in, giving you time to remove it.

Can I use CONCRETE PAINT on something else than concrete?

chevronBottom

The CONCRETE PAINT is an all-rounder and adheres to all open-pored substrates. You can apply CONCRETE PAINT on wood, stone, concrete, and more.

Can I use concrete paint as a filler or plaster?

chevronBottom

No, the concrete paint is paint and not a filler or plaster. If you are looking for a decorative plaster, we recommend taking a look at our microcement or concrete effect. Please note that the concrete effect is only suitable on walls, while microcement can be applied on both walls and floors.

What is the most cost-effective way to paint a garage?

chevronBottom

The most cost-effective product to paint a garage is our concrete paint 2K or our 2k pu paint.

Can I apply the concrete paint 2K on vinyl?

chevronBottom

No, we do not recommend applying our concrete paint 2K on a vinyl or PVC floor.

Can I apply the concrete paint 2K on a wooden floor?

chevronBottom

Yes, it would be possible to apply the concrete paint 2K on a wooden floor.

Is the concrete paint compatible with other substrate than concrete?

chevronBottom

Yes, our concrete paint can be applied to a variety of substrate, for example, wood, metal, etc. 

Can I apply concrete paint on stairs?

chevronBottom

Yes, concrete paint 2k can be used to paint stairs. 

Is CONCRETE PAINT 2K a Decorative plaster?

chevronBottom

No, CONCRETE PAINT 2K is a paint and not a decorative plaster.

Do I need a topcoat on top of the CONCRETE PAINT 2K?

chevronBottom

No, it is not necessary to apply a topcoat on CONCRETE PAINT 2K. If you want to protect the concrete paint 2K, you can apply the 2K PU TOPCOAT but this is not a necessary step. 

Can I add microglass beads inside the concrete paint 2K to achieve a slip-resistant finish?

chevronBottom

It is possible to add microglass beads into the concrete paint 2K to increase slip-resistance. Please note that adding microglass beads will change the color of the concrete paint. 

Is the concrete paint 2K slippery?

chevronBottom

No, the concrete paint 2K isn’t slippery, it keeps the same slip-resistance as the substrate.

Do you have a concrete paint catalog?

chevronBottom

No, we do not have a concrete paint catalog.

Can I do a marble effect with concrete paint?

chevronBottom

It is not possible to achieve a marble effect with concrete paint.

What is the most cost-effective way to paint a garage?

chevronBottom

The most cost-effective product to paint a garage is our concrete paint 2K or our PU paint.

Should I apply another product before applying concrete paint 2k?

chevronBottom

No, concrete paint 2k is not compatible with primers and many paints. We do not recommend applying another product under the concrete paint 2k. 

Is concrete paint 2k open to diffusion?

chevronBottom

Yes, concrete paint 2k is open to diffusion. 

The most frequently asked questions about Tile Paint

Can I use TILE PAINT on tiled floors/stairs?

chevronBottom

For floors, use our TILE PAINT 2K for better durability and resistance.

Can I use TILE PAINT on wet areas like inside a shower?
Can I use 2K TILE PAINT in showering/wet areas?

chevronBottom

For tiled areas in contact with water or in area with heavy tear and wear, use our TILE PAINT 2K for better durability and resistance.

Can I use TILE PAINT on smooth surfaces like plastic or metal?

chevronBottom

Yes, our 2K TILE PAINT can be applied to other smooth, non-absorbent surfaces like metal, plastic, and marble, it is important to sand the surface to ensure proper adhesion before applying our 2K TILE PAINT.

Can I use TILE PAINT inside a pool, can I put TILE PAINT with permanent water contact?

chevronBottom

No, our 2K TILE PAINT isn’t suitable to permanent water contact area such as a pool. We recommend using our Swimming pool paint 2k PU paint for tiled pools.

Is this paint suitable for outdoor use?

chevronBottom

TILE PAINT 2K is not suitable for outdoors, we recommend using our 2k PU paint. 

How should I apply TILE PAINT 2K?

chevronBottom

Here’s how to apply your 2K TILE PAINT:

  1. Sand the tiles before painting them with TILE PAINT 2K.
  2. Tape off areas you don’t want to paint with TILE PAINT 2K.
  3. Clean and degrease the tiles before painting them with TILE PAINT 2K with EPODEX PRE-CLEANER. Remove any silicone joint before painting with TILE PAINT 2K.
  4. Mix the TILE PAINT 2K resin (A) and TILE PAINT 2K hardener (B) in a 4:1 ratio (e.g., 20fl.oz. resin a-component TILE PAINT 2K : 5fl.oz. hardener b-component TILE PAINT 2K). We do not recommend mixing more than 20fl.oz. resin a-component TILE PAINT 2K with 20fl.oz. hardener b-component TILE PAINT 2K at once, as the TILE PAINT 2K is very reactive and cures fast.
  5. Mix the TILE PAINT 2K well. Color your TILE PAINT 2K with the supplied WB PIGMENT. Only our ultra white TILE PAINT 2K is precolored and do not require to be dyed with WB PIGMENT.
  6. Apply the TILE PAINT 2K in a criss-cross pattern with a roller and let the TILE PAINT 2K dry for about 12 hours at 70°F before applying the next coat of TILE PAINT 2K.
  7. Apply at least two coats of TILE PAINT 2K for full coverage.
  8. Optionally, Use the EPODEX grout pen once the paint is dry to retrace the painted grout. 

Do I need to apply multiple coats of TILE PAINT?
How many coats of TILE PAINT are necessary?

chevronBottom

Two coats of TILE PAINT are recommended for proper coverage and durability.

How much TILE PAINT 2K do I need per square meter?

chevronBottom

The consumption of TILE PAINT 2K is 0.7oz/sqft per coat. The quantities on our TILE PAINT 2K page are calculated for 1 coat.

How long should I wait between TILE PAINT 2K coats?

chevronBottom

The waiting time between the TILE PAINT 2K coats is at least 12 hours and no more than 48 hours at 70°F with a relative humidity of 65%. If you exceed 48 hours between your TILE PAINT 2K coats, you must sand the first coat of TILE PAINT 2K before applying the 2nd coat of TILE PAINT 2K to ensure proper bonding.

How long does it take for the TILE PAINT 2K to dry?

chevronBottom

The TILE PAINT 2K needs 12hours at 70°F with a relative humidity of 65% to be touch dry.
A floor paint with TILE PAINT 2K is walkable after at least 24h at 70°F with a relative humidity of 65%. 
The TILE PAINT 2K is completely dry and cure after 7 days at 70°F with a relative humidity of 65%. 
The TILE PAINT 2K needs longer to dry if the temperature is lower than 70°F and if the humidity level is high.

What is the minimum working temperature of the TILE PAINT 2K?

chevronBottom

We do not recommend working with the TILE PAINT 2K or letting the TILE PAINT 2K dry and cure under 60°F. Your TILE PAINT 2K components must be at least 65°F.

What is the recommended working temperature of the TILE PAINT 2K?

chevronBottom

The recommended working and drying/curing temperatures when using our TILE PAINT 2K is 70°F.

What is the maximum working temperature of the TILE PAINT 2K?

chevronBottom

We do not recommend using or letting dry/cure our TILE PAINT 2K over 75°F.

What is the recommended humidity level, relative humidity percentage when using TILE PAINT 2K

chevronBottom

The recommended relative humidity percentage when using our TILE PAINT 2K or letting our TILE PAINT 2K dry/cure is 65%.

How long can I keep the unopened TILE PAINT 2K?

chevronBottom

When the TILE PAINT 2K is unopened and stored at room temperature in the dark, it can be kept 1 year. Storing the TILE PAINT 2K at warm or colder temperatures or exposed to sunlight can reduce its shelf life.

How long can I keep the opened TILE PAINT 2K?

chevronBottom

If your TILE PAINT 2K is opened, close the lid tightly and store it at room temperature in the dark. After opening the TILE PAINT 2K can be kept 6 months. Storing the TILE PAINT 2K at warm or colder temperatures or exposed to sunlight can reduce its shelf life.

Do I need to sand my tiles before applying TILE PAINT?

chevronBottom

We recommend degreasing, sanding, and cleaning the tiles before painting them with TILE PAINT 2K.

How fine do I need to sand my tile before applying TILE PAINT?

chevronBottom

We recommend using a coarse sanding paper to sand the tiles (P80-P120). It is important to sand the tiles uniformly and that superficial scratches from sanding are visible.

Can I need a primer on my tiles before applying 2k TILE PAINT?

chevronBottom

No, we do not recommend applying a primer before painting the tiles with our 2K TILE PAINT. Only sand and degrease the tiles with our pre-cleaner before painting it with 2K TILE PAINT. 

Do I need to sand my glossy tiles until they are matte before painting with 2K TILE PAINT?

chevronBottom

No, you do not need to sand your glossy tiles until its matte. It is important to sand the tiles uniformly until superficial scratches from sanding are visible.

Can I apply your TILE PAINT 2K on top of old TILE PAINT?

chevronBottom

No, we do not recommend applying our TILE PAINT 2K on top of an old TILE PAINT. TILE PAINT 2K might not stick well to the old paint, we recommend sanding to remove the old paint before applying the TILE PAINT 2K. 

What will happen if I apply your TILE PAINT 2K outside in the sun?

chevronBottom

We do not recommend applying TILE PAINT 2K outside as the TILE PAINT 2K will bleach out in the sun and eventually peel off. TILE PAINT 2K is only recommended for indoor use or covered outdoor.

How to protect the areas that I don’t want to paint?

chevronBottom

We recommend putting masking tape and using a plastic drop cloth to protect areas you do not want to paint.

When to remove the masking tape when I use paint?

chevronBottom

Remember to remove the masking tape while the paint is still wet. Removing the masking tape once the paint is fully dry will cause part of the paint to chip. 

Can I paint on top of the tile grout with 2k TILE PAINT?

chevronBottom

Yes, you can paint with 2k TILE PAINT on top of traditional tile grout.

Can I paint with 2k TILE PAINT on silicone?

chevronBottom

No, our 2k TILE PAINT doesn’t stick to silicone. We recommend removing silicone joint before painting with 2k TILE PAINT. 

Can I paint with TILE PAINT on acrylic joint?

chevronBottom

Yes, you can paint on acrylic joint with our 2k TILE PAINT.

Can I paint with TILE PAINT 2K next to silicone? Why do I need to remove the silicone before using TILE PAINT 2K?

chevronBottom

 It is not recommended to paint with TILE PAINT 2K next to a silicone joint, the TILE PAINT 2K will separate from the silicone leaving and empty unpainted space. Failing to remove the silicone joint before painting with TILE PAINT 2K will cause adhesion problem on the edges and water might get behind the TILE PAINT 2K, causing it to peel off.

How can I remove the TILE PAINT 2K?

chevronBottom

Uncured TILE PAINT 2K can be removed with acetone. Cured TILE PAINT 2K can only be removed by sanding. 

Can I use TILE PAINT 2K to seal my tiles? Can I use TILE PAINT 2K to block humidity?

chevronBottom

No, the TILE PAINT 2K can’t be used to seal tiles. TILE PAINT 2K is open to diffusion, which means that water coming from behind the tiles can still come up and water standing a long time on top of the TILE PAINT 2K will eventually soak in the tiles. 

Can I use TILE PAINT 2K to fill cracks in my tiles?

chevronBottom

No, TILE PAINT 2K can’t be used to fill in cracks and gaps. The TILE PAINT 2k is a rolled-on paint and not a filling material.

Can I spray your TILE PAINT 2K with a spray gun?

chevronBottom

No, we do not recommend spraying the TILE PAINT 2K. 

Can I have the ultra white TILE PAINT in glossy?

chevronBottom

For a glossy white tile paint, we recommend using our 2K pu Paint in white.

Can I have the pastel TILE PAINT in glossy?

chevronBottom

For glossy pastel colored tile paint, we recommend using our 2K PU Paint.

Can I have the TILE PAINT in matte?

chevronBottom

For a matte TILE PAINT, we recommend our TILE PAINT ultra white or pastel. Our 2K PU paint in matte can also be used on tiles.

What is the finish, gloss level of your TILE PAINT 2K?

chevronBottom

The TILE PAINT 2K has a satin finish, except the TILE PAINT 2K ultra white and pastel which have a matte finish.

Is your TILE PAINT 2K heat resistant

chevronBottom

Our TILE PAINT 2K is heat resistant up to 140°F.

Can I apply your TILE PAINT 2K on underfloor heating?

chevronBottom

Yes, you can apply TILE PAINT 2K on underfloor heating. We recommend turning on the heating once the TILE PAINT 2K is no longer tacky and letting it on for 7days.

Do you have color samples of your TILE PAINT?
Do you have a catalogue of your TILE PAINT

chevronBottom

No, we do not have a catalogue or samples of our TILE PAINT. All the pictures and videos on our website show the TILE PAINT in the most accurate way possible. 

Can I order another color of TILE PAINT than the one online?

chevronBottom

It is possible to order our TILE PAINT without pigment and add the WB PIGMENT of your choice.

Can you make a custom color of TILE PAINT? Can I have the TILE PAINT pre-colored?

chevronBottom

Unfortunately, it is not possible to have a custom color made at our warehouse, but it is possible for you to mix different WB pigment to achieve a custom shade of tile paint 2k.  

Why does my TILE PAINT does not look like the color on the website?

chevronBottom

Our team is easy cutting-edge technology to disply the colors as accurately as possible.  Yet, the shade may appear slightly different in person. This can be due to several factors, including differences in screen settings and lighting.

Additionally, the final appearance of the paint can vary depending on the substrate (the surface it's applied to) and the lighting conditions in the room. Natural and artificial light can both affect how the color is perceived, so the paint may look different depending on the time of day or the intensity of the light. To help you visualise all our shade in different settings, our team has put together short videos showing every single shade under different lighting conditions.

Why doesn’t my TILE PAINT 2K have good coverage?

chevronBottom

A coverage problem with the TILE PAINT 2K can have different causes. The following questions are useful to determine the reason why the TILE PAINT 2K isn’t covering well:

  • Do you have any paint left?
  • How did you mix the A component?
  • How was the TILE PAINT 2K stored before usage?

The fillers and binders in the TILE PAINT 2K A component can settle at the bottom of the container over time, leaving the top layer mostly water. We recommend turning the TILE PAINT 2K A component upside down for a while and shaking it well before mixing it with TILE PAINT 2K component B in a 4:1 ratio.

Do you have transparent TILE PAINT?

chevronBottom

All our unpigmented TILE PAINT 1K and TILE PAINT 2K are milky due to the binders and fillers and are not suitable as transparent coatings. We recommend using our 2K PU Topcoat if you wish to paint your tiles with a transparent paint.

Why does my TILE PAINT 2K scratches easily?

chevronBottom

A scratch resistance problem with TILE PAINT 2K can have different causes. The following questions are useful to determine the reason why the TILE PAINT 2K is scratching easily:

  • On what type of tiles did you apply the TILE PAINT 2K?
  • What preparation did you do before applying the TILE PAINT 2K?
  • Was the surface pre-treated before applying the TILE PAINT 2K?
  • At what temperature was the TILE PAINT 2K applied and left to dry?
  • How much TILE PAINT 2K was used, and how many square metres were covered?
  • How many coats of TILE PAINT 2K were applied, and how long between each coat?
  • What was the room’s humidity level when you applied and left the TILE PAINT 2k cure?
    The TILE PAINT 2K can scratch easily if it doesn’t reach complete chemical curing. 

Why is my TILE PAINT 2K peeling off the tiles? Why is my TILE PAINT 2K not sticking to the tiles?

chevronBottom

An adherence problem with TILE PAINT 2K can have different causes. The following questions are useful to determine the reason why the TILE PAINT 2K isn’t sticking to the tiles:

On what type of tile did you apply the TILE PAINT 2K?
What preparation did you do before applying the TILE PAINT 2K?
Was the surface pre-treated before applying the TILE PAINT 2K?
At what temperature was the TILE PAINT 2K applied and left to dry?
How much TILE PAINT 2K was used, and how many square metres were covered?
How many coats of TILE PAINT 2K were applied, and how long between each coat?
What was the room’s humidity level when you applied and left the tile pait 2k cure?
The TILE PAINT 2K can peel off if the substrate wasn’t properly sanded and cleaned or if the TILE PAINT 2K is applied to silicone joints.

I have leftover TILE PAINT; can I use it for something else?

chevronBottom

Yes, our TILE PAINT can be used on other surfaces than tiles.

Can I get a smaller quantity of paint?

chevronBottom

Unfortunately, only the quantities you see on our website are available. We do not have smaller quantities

Can I receive my paint order in small bottles only?

chevronBottom

All orders are packed with the biggest size bottle/jerry available to achieve this quantity. It is not possible to change the size of the container for your order. If you wish to receive your order in smaller quantities, we kindly ask that you order several small packages. We know that the price of many small quantities is higher than the price of one large quantity and we can’t offer a discount on an order with many small quantities and smaller packaging cost more money to produce and ship. The cost of each bottle and labels must be taken into consideration. Furthermore, smaller containers often do not fit into 1 parcel which also increases the price of shipping which we are paying for. 

I ordered TILE PAINT Pastel, why is my WB PIGMENT not pastel?

chevronBottom

The WB PIGMENT aren’t pastel, if you order a pastel TILE PAINT, you will receive a normal WB PIGMENT and a pastel TILE PAINT base. It should be written pastel on your TILE PAINT.

I mixed the 2k tile paint and now it is hard. What can I do?

chevronBottom

Once the 2k tile paint has cured there is nothing you can do to make it liquid again. 

Can I mix all the 2k tile paint and use it later?

chevronBottom

No, you can’t mix the 2k tile paint in advance. As soon as the resin A-component and the hardener A-component of the 2k tile paint are mixed there is a chemical reaction taking place and the product gets hard. Only mix a little 2k tile paint at once. 

Will the mixed 2k tile paint get hard if I close the bottle tight?

chevronBottom

Yes, the 2k tile paint will get hard if you mix it and close the lid tightly. The mixed 2k tile paint starts to react as soon as the components are mixed no matter how they are stored.

Why is my 2k tile paint getting hard after mixing?

chevronBottom

When mixing the resin, A-component and the hardener B-component a chemical reaction called polymerisation takes place to form a solid plastic. As stated on our website the resin and hardener of the 2k tile paint reacts quickly, it is very important to only mix a small quantity at the time. 

Can I dye the resin a-component of the 2k tile paint before adding the hardener b-component?

chevronBottom

Yes, you can either dye the 2k tile paint resin-hardener mixture or dye the A-component of your TILE PAINT 2K in advance. If you dye the A-component of your TILE PAINT 2K in advance, you must take that into consideration when mixing in the B-component. 

How do I get the same color 2k tile paint in different mixture?

chevronBottom

It is important to add the same amount of WB PIGMENT into your 2k tile paint, we recommend weighting in the proportion to always achieve the same color. 

What happens if I mix too much WB PIGMENT in my TILE PAINT pastel?

chevronBottom

If you add more WB PIGMENT in your pastel 2k TILE PAINT, the color will be darker than seen on our website.

I don’t like the color of my TILE PAINT can I change it?

chevronBottom

It is possible to order WB PIGMENT alone, if you wish to have another color of TILE PAINT.

How long do I need to mix the 2k tile paint?

chevronBottom

It is not possible to say exactly how long the 2k tile paint needs to be mixed as it depends on the speed and the way it is mixed. It is important to mix the 2k tile paint until the mixture is homogenous.

Do I need to mix the individual components of my 2k tile paint before mixing it together?

chevronBottom

Yes, we recommend mixing the individual 2k tile paint components before mixing it together.

Why isn’t my paint the same color as my last order?

chevronBottom

If you are having issues with the color of your paint being different, we kindly ask that you contact us per Email with pictures of paint and your order number.

I got the wrong WB PIGMENT with my order what should I do?

chevronBottom

If you received the wrong WB PIGMENT, we kindly ask that you contact us per E-mail with pictures of paint and your order number.

Can I add metallic pigment in my TILE PAINT?

chevronBottom

No, we do not recommend adding metallic pigment into the TILE PAINT.

Can I add other pigment than WB PIGMENT in my TILE PAINT?

chevronBottom

No, we do not recommend adding another pigment than our WB PIGMENT into the TILE PAINT.

Can I come to St petersburg to look at the TILE PAINT?

chevronBottom

While it is possible to come pick up your order at our warehouse and office in St petersburg, we do not have a showroom where you can see the different colors of TILE PAINT.

How long will the TILE PAINT stay on my tiles?

chevronBottom

Our TILE PAINTs are made to last; we can’t tell you exactly how long it last but with proper care and proper application the paint will last for years.

When will I need to repaint my tiles painted with TILE PAINT?

chevronBottom

Our TILE PAINTs are made to last; we can’t tell you how long it last but with proper care and proper application the paint will not require touch up quickly.

How many grout pens do I need? How many feet can I draw with the grout pen?

chevronBottom

It is not possible to say exactly how many grout pens you will need, as it depends on the grout size and the pression apply to the tip while using the grout pen. The grout pen set is usually enough for a small bathroom.

How do I get straight line with the grout pen?

chevronBottom

We recommend using a ruler to achieve straight lines with the grout pen.

How much WB PIGMENT do I need to add to my TILE PAINT 2K?

chevronBottom

We recommend adding 5% WB PIGMENT to the TILE PAINT 2K for example add 100g (3.5oz) WB PIGMENT to 48fl.oz. (38fl.oz. A + 10fl.oz B) TILE PAINT 2K.

What is included in the TILE PAINT 2K accessory set?

chevronBottom

Here is what is included in the TILE PAINT 2K accessory set: 

  • 1x Nitrile Gloves
  • 1x Masking Tape 2” x 164ft
  • 2x Sandpaper P180 and Sanding Block
  • 1x PRE-CLEANER Degreaser & Cleaner
  • 1x Stir Stick
  • 1x Flat Brush 2”
  • 2x Foam Rollers 4” + handle
  • 1x Foam Roller 10” + handle
  • 1x Mixing Bucket 3.1gal
  • 1x Sanding Block - Made of Cork
  • 1x Scraper grid 11 1/32 x 15 5/32
  • 1x Plastic Drop Cloth - Large - 495sqft

Do I need a varnish, sealer on top of my TILE PAINT?

chevronBottom

No, you do not need to seal the 2k TILE PAINT.

How do I clean my TILE PAINT 2K?

chevronBottom

We recommend cleaning the TILE PAINT 2K with light surfactants cleaning agents.

Do I apply my TILE PAINT with a brush or a roller?

chevronBottom

We recommend, painting thinly the 2k TILE PAINT with a brush in the corners or in the grout where it is hard to reach. Make sure to use a roller afterwards to roll on the 2k TILE PAINT on the whole area and even out of thickness of the brush. Do not paint first with a brush, let dry and the paint on the 2k TILE PAINT with a roller.

Why doesn’t the WB PIGMENT alone look like the picture of tile paint on the website?

chevronBottom

This is normal the WB PIGMENT alone doesn’t have the same color as the dyed paint nor the dry 2k tile paint. The true color will only be visible once the 2k tile paint is dry.

Why is my WB PIGMENT not pastel?

chevronBottom

We do not have Pastel WB PIGMENT, if you ordered a pastel paint, your base 2k tile paint should have the word pastel on it

Can you send me pre-colored 2k tile paint?

chevronBottom

Unfortunately, we do not have pre-colored paint except for ultra white 2k tile paint.

Why do I need to mix the TILE PAINT 2K myself?

chevronBottom

When mixing the resin, A-component and the hardener B-component a chemical reaction called polymerisation takes place to form a solid plastic. This is why you need to mix the paint yourself and we can’t deliver a pre-mixed 2k tile paint.  As stated on our website the resin and hardener of the 2k tile paint reacts quickly, it is very important to only mix a small quantity at the time. 

Why doesn’t the wet paint look like the color on the website?

chevronBottom

The color of the paint will change once the paint has dried.

Why isn’t the color of the tile paint in the bucket the same as seen on the website?

chevronBottom

It is important to add your color activator (WB Pigment) into the 2k tile paint and stir it well. The color of the 2k tile paint paint in the bucket isn’t representative of the color after drying. The color of the paint will change once the 2k tile paint has dried.

Why is the color of the wet tile paint paint different than the color of the dry paint?

chevronBottom

Wet paint is glossier than dry paint and reflects light differently. The water contained in the wet paint evaporates while drying, also changing the color of the paint, revealing its true color.

I can’t sand my tiles they are too hard; can I paint them with TILE PAINT anyway?

chevronBottom

If your tiles are too hard, we recommend using coarse diamond sanding paper before painting it with 2k TILE PAINT. The tiles must be sanded well before applying the 2k TILE PAINT or the 2k TILE PAINT can peel off.

How do I know if I sanded my tiles enough?

chevronBottom

The tiles should feel rough after sanding, there should be visible superficial scratches on the tile, sand again any parts that doesn’t feel rough or doesn’t have visible superficial scratches. Failing to sand the tiles properly (also in the corner) can cause the 2k TILE PAINT to not stick properly.

Will the TILE PAINT cover the sanding scratches?

chevronBottom

Yes, the 2k TILE PAINT will cover the sanding marks left by P80 and finer grit. 

Can I dilute my TILE PAINT 2K?

chevronBottom

We do not recommend diluting the TILE PAINT 2K as this will impact the coverage.

Do I need to wear a mask while applying TILE PAINT 2K?

chevronBottom

We recommend wearing a FFP2 mask while mixing and using our TILE PAINT 2K.

Can I open the window after applying the TILE PAINT?

chevronBottom

We do not recommend opening a window until the 2k TILE PAINT has dried/cured. 

Where can I trash my left-over TILE PAINT?

chevronBottom

Never pour the components of your 2k TILE PAINT down the drain or in the rainwater. The 2k TILE PAINT container can be disposed of at your local recycling centre.

Can I add more/ less hardener to my TILE PAINT 2K?

chevronBottom

No, you must always follow the right mixing ratio or the TILE PAINT 2K will not cure properly. Adding more hardener in the TILE PAINT 2K will not result in the paint curing faster.

Can I buy a pastel WB PIGMENT for my TILE PAINT?

chevronBottom

There is no pastel WB PIGMENT. To achieve a pastel paint, you must use the pastel base of the 2k tile paint.

What is the mixing ratio for 2K TILE PAINT?

chevronBottom

The mixing ratio of TILE PAINT 2K is 4:1 (A: B) for example 20fl.oz. A-component TILE PAINT 2K and 5fl.oz. B-component TILE PAINT 2K. Always use a scale to measure the correct amount of product you are mixing for accuracy. Using a precise scale ensures the best results and avoids issues with curing.

How long can I use the mixed TILE PAINT 2K before it becomes unusable?
What is the pot life of the TILE PAINT 2K?
How long does TILE PAINT 2K lasts?

chevronBottom

The pot life and processing time of 38oz TILE PAINT 2K at 70°F is 90 minutes. 

What container sizes are available for TILE PAINT 2K?

chevronBottom

Component A TILE PAINT 2K: 38fl.oz., 1gal
Component B TILE PAINT 2K: 10fl.oz., 38fl.oz.

Do I need to buy pigment separately for the paint?

chevronBottom

No, if your chosen color requires pigment, it will automatically be included in your order.

Do I need to add WB PIGMENT into my ultra white paint?

chevronBottom

The tile paint ultra white is pre-tinted.

Does this paint have a strong smell?

chevronBottom

No, our 2k TILE PAINT is low in VOCs, meaning minimal odour compared to solvent-based paints.

What should I do with the silicone in the grouts before applying the 2K TILE PAINT?

chevronBottom

2k tile paints are epoxy resin-based and do not adhere to silicone. All silicone joints should be removed before applying our 2k tile paint. We recommend re-sealing the joints with acrylic (either before or after applying the paint, depending on the desired result).

How can I remove the TILE PAINT once it has dried?

chevronBottom

You can remove the 2k TILE PAINT With the solvent acetone. You will need to "soak" the tiles several times with acetone. You can place damp rags on them vertically, let it sit for a few hours, and repeat as needed when it evaporates and dries. The 2k tile paint can then be removed like a sticker or scraped off with a spatula. If the joints are absorbent, you will need more acetone and more time, as it may penetrate deeper. The 2k tile paint can also be sanded off.

How many square feet does one PRE-CLEANER cover?

chevronBottom

It is individual and depends on how much you apply and how much you spray on the same surface, but one bottle of pre-cleaner is sufficient for normal use for approximately 107 square feet.

Is the B-component hardener of the TILE PAINT 2K Brilliant, TILE PAINT 2K ultra white and TILE PAINT 2K pastel the same?

chevronBottom

Yes, the TILE PAINT 2K hardener B-component is the same for the TILE PAINT 2K A-component brilliant, ultra white and pastel.

Is your TILE PAINT 2K UV-resistant?

chevronBottom

No, our TILE PAINT 2K isn’t UV-resistant and can’t be used for uncovered outdoor areas.

Is TILE PAINT 2K a resin?

chevronBottom

Yes, TILE PAINT 2K is an epoxy resin-based paint.

Does our TILE PAINT has mould-resistant/antibacterial properties?

chevronBottom

Our 2k TILE PAINTs are open to diffusion which means that no mould will form behind the paint. Our paint can be used without problem in areas with high humidity, but we do recommend our epoxy-based TILE PAINT 2K inside the shower and on floors as it is more resistant to moisture and tear and wear. Our 2k TILE PAINTs aren’t antibacterial.

What are the steps to apply TILE PAINT? Do I need something else than the TILE PAINT?

chevronBottom

We recommend sanding and degreasing the tile before applying our 2k TILE PAINT. It is important to NOT use primer under the 2k TILE PAINT. A sealant on top of the 2k TILE PAINT is also not necessary. 

Which tile paint do you recommend for floors? I need the tile paint to be durable and resistant to chemicals.

chevronBottom

For painting indoor tiled floors that need to be durable and resistant to chemicals, I recommend our TILE PAINT 2K.

Can you add something into the 2k tile paint to make it non-slip? Can I add microglass beads inside the 2k tile paint?

chevronBottom

You can add microglass beads inside our 2k tile paint to achieve a non-slip finish. Depending on the desired non-slip finish, you can add between 5g and 35g to 2.2lbs of 2k tile paint.

Which sanding paper do I need for tile paint?

chevronBottom

Before painting with 2K TILE PAINT we recommend using 80 grit for high-gloss tiles and P150 grit for matt tiles.

Do you have samples of the TILE PAINT?

chevronBottom

No, we do not have samples of the TILE PAINT.

Do you have a catalog with the colors of TILE PAINT?

chevronBottom

No, we do not have a catalog with the colors of TILE PAINT.

Can I use your Tile paint on something else than tiles?

chevronBottom

Yes, our Tile Paint can be used on material other than tiles. Please note that our Tile Paint doesn’t stick to silicone and plastics.

How long do I need to wait until I can shower after painting with TILE PAINT 2K?

chevronBottom

We recommend, waiting 3 days before using the shower after painting with TILE PAINT 2K: We recommend waiting at least 7 days before cleaning the shower.

Can I add microglass beads inside the tile paint 2K to achieve a slip-resistant finish?

chevronBottom

It is possible to add microglass beads into the tile paint 2K to increase slip-resistance. Please note that adding microglass beads will change the color of the tile paint. 

Is the tile paint 2K slippery?

chevronBottom

No, the tile paint 2K isn’t slippery, it keeps the same slip-resistance as the substrate.

Do you have a tile paint catalog?

chevronBottom

No, we do not have a tile paint catalog.

Can I do a marble effect with tile paint?

chevronBottom

It is not possible to achieve a marble effect with tile paint.

Can I use crackle glaze over your tile paint?

chevronBottom

We didn’t test the compatibility of crackle glaze on our tile paint. We do not recommend using crackle glaze over tile paint 2K. 

Is tile paint 2k open to diffusion?

chevronBottom

Yes, tile paint 2k is open to diffusion. 

Which paint can I use on a PVC floor?

chevronBottom

We do not recommend any of our paint on a flexible PVC floor. On rigid PVC, it is possible to sand and apply our tile paint 2k. 

What is the VOC contains of the tile paint 2k?

chevronBottom

The ready to use tile paint 2k is VOC free.

The most frequently asked questions about Other Paints

What is Metallic Brush Effect?

chevronBottom

The Metallic Brush Effect is a high-quality decorative metallic paint for walls and floors, ideal for achieving a modern or industrial look. The metallic brush effect paint creates a textured finish with metallic reflections, is durable, washable, odourless, and solvent-free, with a satin finish for a sophisticated touch.

What is included in the metallic brush effect paint, do I need to order the primer extra with the effect paint?

chevronBottom

The metallic brush effect set for walls includes the primer 1k with WB pigment, and the metallic brush effect paint with the metallic pigment. You do not need to order extra products when ordering the metallic brush effect to achieve the effect seen on the website.

The metallic brush effect set for floors, includes the primer 1k with WB pigment, the metallic brush effect paint with the metallic pigment and the polyurethane to protect the floor. You do not need to order extra products when ordering the metallic brush effect to achieve the effect seen on the website.

What is included in the metallic brush effect effect paint accessory set for walls?

chevronBottom

The metallic brush effect effect paint for walls accessory set includes:

  • 1x Paint Roller 10″ with handle
  • 1x Foam Roller 4″ with handle
  • 1x Paint Tray 12X13″
  • 1x Masking Tape1 1/4″X164ft
  • 2x Stir Stick
  • 1x Nitrile Gloves
  • 1x Plastic Drop Cloth – Large – 495sqft

What is the minimum working temperature of your paint?

chevronBottom

Our 1k primer, metallic brush effect, effect paint must be applied at minimum 45°F (substrate, room and paint temperature). Applying our paint under the minimum working temperature can cause problem with the coverage and drying.

How much WB pigment do you need to add into the paint?

chevronBottom

Add 10% WB pigment into the Primer 1k that is not already tinted in gray.
Do not add WB pigment into the metallic brush effect paint.

In which sizes are your paint available?

chevronBottom

Primer 1K is available in 50fl.oz. and 0.95gal.
Metallic brush effect is available in 33fl.oz. and 91.2fl.oz..

Do I need a primer under my metallic brush effect paint?

chevronBottom

The 1K Primer should be applied under the metallic brush effect paint to achieve the effect seen on the website. 

Is your metallic brush effect paint glossy or matt?

chevronBottom

Our metallic brush effect paint has a satin finish.

What is the consumption volume of your paint?
How many square feet can I coat with the paint?

chevronBottom

PRIMER 1K: approx. 0.4oz/sqft
Metallic brush effect paint: approx. 0.45oz/sqft

Can I dilute your 1K Primer and metallic brush effect paint to spray it?

chevronBottom

We do not recommend to spray paint our metallic brush effect paint.
You can spray paint our 1K Primer to spray it, you can add up to 5% water. 

How do I need to store the paint?

chevronBottom

We recommend storing our paints in a cool, dry and frost-free area. The storage temperature of our paint should not exceed 75°F. 

How long can I store the paint?

chevronBottom

You can store the unopened paint for up to 1 year and the opened paint for 6 months under perfect conditions. If the storage conditions aren’t respected the shelf-life of our paints can be reduced.

I ordered paint what is the WB pigment for?

chevronBottom

The WB pigment is used to dye your 1K Primer in the desired color.

Do you have transparent paint?

chevronBottom

Our Metallic brush effect paint and 1K Primer are  milky due to the binders and fillers and are not suitable as transparent coatings. For transparent coatings, we recommend our 2K PU Topcoat.

Will metallic brush effect, effect paint hides the imperfection of my floor?

chevronBottom

No, metallic brush effect paint will not hide the imperfection of your floor, nor level it. Metallic brush effect is a paint and will only give a new color to your floor.

Can I use metallic brush effect on tiles?

chevronBottom

We do not recommend applying metallic brush effect on tiles. The metallic brush effect will not hide the texture and grout of the tiles.

Can I have a glossy white paint?

chevronBottom

We recommend our 2K PU Paint when a glossy white paint is needed. 

I want another paint color than the one on your website, can I mix them?

chevronBottom

Each paint can be customised by adding extra WB pigment, allowing for a wide range of color options and offering greater flexibility in your color choice. It is also possible to select our untinted paint and shop the WB pigment individually. It is also possible to mix different WB pigment together to achieve a custom color.

Are EPODEX’s paint UV resistant?

chevronBottom

Our 1K Primer and metallic brush efffect are UV resistant, which means they won’t cracked when applied in the sun outdoor. Please note that the color might change outdoor, the WB pigment in the 1K Primer, specially colors like red might get brighter with time. 

How can I have the same color in different paint base (for example, 1k primer and limewash paint)? 

chevronBottom

The same WB pigment can appear differently in various paint bases due to differences in composition, such as binders and fillers. To ensure a consistent color across different surfaces, we recommend using the same base paint throughout.

Do you have a transparent paint?

chevronBottom

Yes, our 2K PU Topcoat can be used as transparent paint. 2K PU Topcoat is a universal topcoat and it can be applied to floors, walls, furniture, etc.

What type of paint is the metallic brush effect?

chevronBottom

Metallic brush effect is an acrylic-based paint.

What type of paint is the primer 1k?

chevronBottom

Primer 1K is an acrylic-based paint.

What type of paint is the micrometal?

chevronBottom

Micrometal is an acrylic-based plaster.

Is the unpigmented metallic brush effect transparent?

chevronBottom

Metallic brush effect unpigmented isn’t transparent, it is milky white.

How to mix paint? 

chevronBottom

We recommend mixing EPODEX’s paint thoroughly using a stirrer with a cordless drill. Start by mixing the paint at 450 rpm for approx. 3 minutes. For larger quantities of paint, you may gradually increase the speed. Thinner paints such as tile paint 2k can be mixed at a speed up to 1000 rpm. Thicker paints such as exterior paint can be mixed to a speed up to 1800 rpm.

Can I mix WB pigment with metallic pigment?

chevronBottom

We do not recommend mixing WB pigment and metallic pigment as both are opaque and the effect won’t be visible.

Can I apply Metallic Brush Effect on tiled floors?

chevronBottom

Yes, it is possible to apply Metallic Brush Effect Flooring set on tiles but you need to level the floor first otherwise the grout will remain visible.

Do you have a catalog of paint cart showing the color of your paint?

chevronBottom

No, we do not have any catalog of paint card showing the color or our paints.

Do you have a calculator to calculate the required amount of paint?

chevronBottom

No, we do not have a paint calculator.

How many coats of Effect paint do I need to apply?

chevronBottom

We recommend applying 1 coat of 1K Primer and once dry applying 1coat of effect paint. To achieve the finish seen on our website, the effect paint shouldn’t be applied to provide full coverage.

What is the layer thickness of the 1K Primer?

chevronBottom

The thickness of one coat of 1K Primer is approximatively 50μm

Which pigment do I need for the 1K Primer?

chevronBottom

You can only add our WB Pigment to our 1K Primer.

What color is the 1K Primer in the metallic brush effect set in the color light platinum silver?

chevronBottom

The 1K Primer in the metallic brush effect set in the color light platinum silver is WB Pigment RAL 7035 light grey.

What color is the 1K Primer in the metallic brush effect set in the color dark platinum silver?

chevronBottom

What color is the 1K Primer in the metallic brush effect set in the color dark platinum silver is WB Pigment RAL 7016 anthracite grey.

What color is the 1K Primer in the metallic brush effect set in the color bronze brown?

chevronBottom

What color is the 1K Primer in the metallic brush effect set in the color bronze brown is WB Pigment RAL 7016 anthracite grey.

What color is the 1K Primer in the metallic brush effect set in the color bronze red?

chevronBottom

What color is the 1K Primer in the metallic brush effect set in the color bronze red is WB Pigment RAL 7016 anthracite grey.

What color is the 1K Primer in the metallic brush effect set in the color Havana bronze?

chevronBottom

What color is the 1K Primer in the metallic brush effect set in the color Havana bronze is WB Pigment RAL 7016 anthracite grey.

What color is the 1K Primer in the metallic brush effect set in the color Intense anthracite?

chevronBottom

What color is the 1K Primer in the metallic brush effect set in the color intense anthracite is WB Pigment RAL 7016 anthracite grey.

What color is the 1K Primer in the metallic brush effect set in the color Satin grey

chevronBottom

What color is the 1K Primer in the metallic brush effect set in the color satin grey is WB Pigment RAL 7016 anthracite grey.

What color is the 1K Primer in the metallic brush effect set in the color Shimmer gold?

chevronBottom

What color is the 1K Primer in the metallic brush effect set in the color shimmer gold is WB Pigment RAL 7016 anthracite grey.

What color is the 1K Primer in the metallic brush effect set in the color Flame copper?

chevronBottom

What color is the 1K Primer in the metallic brush effect set in the color flame copper is WB Pigment RAL 7016 anthracite grey.

What color is the 1K Primer in the metallic brush effect set in the color dark carbon red?

chevronBottom

What color is the 1K Primer in the metallic brush effect set in the color dark carbon red is WB Pigment RAL 7016 anthracite grey.

What color is the 1K Primer in the metallic brush effect set in the color dark olive green?

chevronBottom

What color is the 1K Primer in the metallic brush effect set in the color dark olive green is WB Pigment RAL 7016 anthracite grey.

What color is the 1K Primer in the metallic brush effect set in the color Olympic blue?

chevronBottom

What color is the 1K Primer in the metallic brush effect set in the color Olympic blue is WB Pigment RAL 7016 anthracite grey.

What color is the 1K Primer in the metallic brush effect set in the color pacific turquoise?

chevronBottom

What color is the 1K Primer in the metallic brush effect set in the color pacific turquoise is WB Pigment RAL 7016 anthracite grey.

What color is the 1K Primer in the metallic brush effect set in the color violet blue?

chevronBottom

What color is the 1K Primer in the metallic brush effect set in the color violet blue is WB Pigment RAL 7016 anthracite grey.

What color is the 1K Primer in the metallic brush effect set in the color light carbon red?

chevronBottom

What color is the 1K Primer in the metallic brush effect set in the color light carbon red is WB Pigment RAL 3004 purple red.

What color is the 1K Primer in the metallic brush effect set in the color bright olive green?

chevronBottom

What color is the 1K Primer in the metallic brush effect set in the color bright olive green is WB Pigment RAL 6010 grass green.

How many WB pigment do I need to add into metallic brush effect?

chevronBottom

Do not add WB pigment into the metallic brush effect.

How much WB pigment do I need to add into the 1K Primer?

chevronBottom

We recommend adding 10% WB Pigment into the 1K Primer. It is possible to add more WB Pigment into the 1K Primer. 

How much metallic pigment do I need to add into the Metallic brush effect?

chevronBottom

We recommend adding 3% metallic pigment into the metallic brush effect. 

I ordered ultra white paint but I changed my mind and would like a color, can I add some pigment into the paint?

chevronBottom

Yes, it is possible to add WB Pigment into your ultra white paint to achieve a pastel color, please not that it is not possible to achieve a saturated color by adding WB pigment into the ultra white paint. 

The most frequently asked questions about Lime Wash

Can I apply Limewash Paint with a roller?

chevronBottom

No, we do not recommend applying the Limewash Paint with a roller. 

Can I use any brush to apply the Limewash Paint?

chevronBottom

Yes, but for best result, we recommend using a fine bristle brush. Medium or large bristle brush may leave visible brush strokes. 

Can I apply limewash on a gray wall?

chevronBottom

Applying limewash on a wall that is another color than white will change the final color of the limewash.

Can I apply limewash outdoors?

chevronBottom

To apply limewash outdoors, it is important to seal It with our 2K PU Topcoat. Without sealing limewash with 2K PU topcoat it is not suitable for outdoors.

Can I apply limewash in the shower?

chevronBottom

To apply limewash in the shower, it is important to seal It with our 2K PU Topcoat. Without sealing limewash with 2K PU topcoat it is not suitable for the shower.

Can I apply limewash in the bathroom?

chevronBottom

Yes, limewash can be applied in the bathroom. It is important to seal the limewash in areas exposed to water, such as in the shower. 

Can I use limewash on my floor?

chevronBottom

Our limewash is made to be painted on walls and ceiling. It would be possible to apply limewash on the floor and seal it with our 2K PU topcoat. 

Can I use limewash on render?

chevronBottom

Yes, you can use limewash on render.

Can I use limewash on raw render or unpainted render?

chevronBottom

If you are applying limewash on white raw render, you do not need to prime it first with Interior paint. We recommend using spray mist or a brush with water to slightly moisten the raw render before applying the limewash. Moisten raw render allows the limewash paint to be easily applied without drying too quickly.

Painting limewash directly on raw render that isn’t white is possible, it will alter the final color. To achieve the limewash color seen on the website on raw render that isn’t white, we recommend first priming with Interior paint polar white and following the procedure for limewash on painted surfaces.

Can I use limewash on painted render?

chevronBottom

Yes, it is possible to apply limewash to painted render, to do so, follow the procedure for painting limewash on already painted surfaces.

Can I apply limewash on bricks?

chevronBottom

Yes, it is possible to apply limewash on bricks. 

Can I use limewash on raw bricks or unpainted bricks?

chevronBottom

If you are applying limewash on white raw bricks, you do not need to prime it first with Interior paint. We recommend using spray mist or a brush with water to slightly moisten the raw bricks before applying the limewash. Moisten raw bricks allows the limewash paint to be easily applied without drying too quickly.

Painting limewash directly on raw bricks that isn’t white is possible, it will alter the final color. To achieve the limewash color seen on the website on raw bricks that isn’t white, we recommend first priming with Interior paint polar white and following the procedure for painted surfaces.

Can I use limewash on painted bricks?

chevronBottom

Yes, it is possible to apply limewash to painted bricks, to do so, follow the procedure for painting limewash on already painted surfaces.

Can I use limewash on raw plaster/gypsum or unpainted plaster/gypsum?

chevronBottom

If you are applying limewash on white raw plaster/gypsum, you do need to prime it first with Interior paint polar white.

If you are painting limewash on unpainted lime plaster or unpainted clay plaster, it is also possible to skip priming with interior paint polar white. Please note that painting limewash without priming on unpainted lime plaster or unpainted clay plaster might alter the finish color.

Can I use limewash on painted drywall/plasterboards?

chevronBottom

Yes, it is possible to apply limewash to painted drywall/plasterboards, to do so, follow the procedure for painting limewash on already painted surfaces.

Can I use limewash on raw drywall/plasterboards or unpainted drywall/plasterboards?

chevronBottom

If you are applying limewash on white raw drywall/plasterboards, you do need to prime it first with Interior paint polar white. 

Can I use limewash on painted drywall/plasterboards?

chevronBottom

Yes, it is possible to apply limewash to painted drywall/plasterboards, to do so, follow the procedure for painting limewash on already painted surfaces.

Can I use limewash on raw mixed/repaired surfaces or unpainted mixed/repaired surfaces?

chevronBottom

If you are applying limewash on white raw mixed/repaired surfaces, you do need to prime it first with Interior paint polar white. 

Can I use limewash on painted mixed/repaired surfaces?

chevronBottom

Yes, it is possible to apply limewash to painted mixed/repaired surfaces, to do so, follow the procedure for painting limewash on already painted surfaces.

Can I paint limewash on metal?

chevronBottom

No, we do not recommend painting limewash on metals.

Can I use limewash on raw terracotta or unpainted terracotta?

chevronBottom

If you are applying limewash on white raw terracotta, you do not need to prime it first with Interior paint. We recommend using spray mist or a brush with water to slightly moisten the raw terracotta before applying the limewash. Moisten raw terracotta allows the limewash paint to be easily applied without drying too quickly.

Painting limewash directly on raw terracotta that isn’t white is possible, it will alter the final color.

Can I use limewash on painted terracotta?

chevronBottom

Yes, it is possible to apply limewash to painted terracotta, to do so, follow the procedure for painting limewash on already painted surfaces. Please note that we can’t tell you the longevity of the limewash on already painted terracotta.

Can I use limewash on raw wallpaper or unpainted wallpaper?

chevronBottom

If you are applying limewash on white raw wallpaper, you do need to prime it first with Interior paint polar white. 

Can I use limewash on painted wallpaper?

chevronBottom

Yes, it is possible to apply limewash to painted wallpaper, to do so, follow the procedure for painting limewash on already painted surfaces.

Can I apply limewash on fabrics?

chevronBottom

Yes, it is possible to apply limewash on fabrics such as calico and linen. Painting limewash directly on fabrics that aren’t white is possible, it will alter the final color.

Can I use limewash on raw wood or unpainted wood?

chevronBottom

If you are applying limewash on white raw wood, you do need to prime it first with Interior paint polar white. 

Can I use limewash on painted wood?

chevronBottom

Yes, it is possible to apply limewash to painted wood, to do so, follow the procedure for painting limewash on already painted surfaces.

Can I use limewash on raw stones or unpainted stones?

chevronBottom

If you are applying limewash on white raw stones, you do not need to prime it first with Interior paint. We recommend using spray mist or a brush with water to slightly moisten the raw stones before applying the limewash. Moisten raw stones allows the limewash paint to be easily applied without drying too quickly.

Painting limewash directly on raw stones that isn’t white is possible, it will alter the final color. To achieve the limewash color seen on the website on raw stones that isn’t white, we recommend first priming with Interior paint polar white and following the procedure for painted surfaces.

Can I use limewash on painted stones?

chevronBottom

Yes, it is possible to apply limewash to painted stones, to do so, follow the procedure for painting limewash on already painted surfaces.

Can I use limewash on raw concrete or unpainted concrete?

chevronBottom

If you are applying limewash on white raw concrete, you do need to prime it first with Interior paint polar white. Applying lime wash on raw concrete without priming might alter the final color.

Can I use limewash on painted concrete?

chevronBottom

Yes, it is possible to apply limewash to painted concrete, to do so, follow the procedure for painting limewash on already painted surfaces.

Can I apply limewash on painted surfaces?

chevronBottom

Yes, it is possible to apply limewash on painted surfaces.

How to apply limewash? 

chevronBottom
  1. Ensure that the surface to be painted with limewash is clean, and free of imperfections.
  2. Cover/cover areas not to be painted with a plastic drop cloth and masking tape.
  3. Prime the substrate with our Interior Paint Polar White before painting with limewash if needed. Depending on the substrate and the result wanted priming with Interior paint polar white before applying the limewash can be skipped.
  4. Let the Polar White Interior Paint dry before painting with limewash. Before painting with limewash and after priming, the substrate should be uniform, matt, and white.
  5. Pour 1gal water in a mixing jug, add 4.4lbs Limewash Powder and 100g(3.5oz) WB Pigment to color the mixture.  
  6. Mix the limewash mixture thoroughly with a whisk until the powder is completely dissolved and let the mixture sit for 5 minutes before painting.
  7. Before painting and regularly while painting with limewash, remix the limewash mixture with the whisk to prevent material from settling at the bottom of the mixing jug.
  8. Apply the first coat Limewash Paint with a fine bristle brush. Do not overload the brush and shake off excess paint before painting with limewash paint.
  9. Apply the Limewash Paint in a criss-cross motion going over the same sections many times over until the limewash paint is perfectly distributed. Start painting the limewash in a corner, first cover part of the edges by dragging the brush across in a sweeping motion. Then, work the first limewash section near that edge to blend it in. Work each limewash section wet in wet and feather the edges to blend each limewash section together.
  10. Let the first layer limewash dry min. 3h before continuing with the second layer limewash. Please note that the first layer limewah serves as the base color and does not reflect the result.
  11. Clean your brush with water between the limewash layers and apply the next lime wash layer(s) in the same way.

How to fix an excess of limewash paint?

chevronBottom

Let the layer limewash paint which has lime bloom from over painting dry for 24h and then reapply a new layer using less limewash paint.

Can I apply only 1 coat of limewash paint?

chevronBottom

Yes, if you like the result of the limewash paint after 1 coat you do not need to apply the 2nd coat. To achieve, the typical limewash paint look 2 coats are normally necessary.

How many coats of limewash paint do I need to apply?

chevronBottom

We recommend applying at least 2 coats of limewash paint to achieve the effect seen on the website.

Can I apply more than 2 coats of limewash paint?

chevronBottom

Yes, it is possible to apply more than 2 coats of limewash paint.

Can I fix only part of limewash without repainting the whole wall?

chevronBottom

Yes, we recommend using a rough sponge to roughen the edges in a natural “cloud” shape where you need to fix the limewash. Apply the limewash to the area to be fixed and feather out the edges to blend it with the rest of the substrate.

How to avoid excess paint and brush stokes when painting with limewash paint?

chevronBottom

To avoid overapplying Limewash Paint, regularly check the surface in the glare of the light. Look across the wall at an angle to spot visible brush strokes, streaks, or areas with excess limewash paint.

Why does my limewash looks white and feels powdery after drying?

chevronBottom

The limewash paint will look white and feel powdery (called lime bloom) after drying if too much limewash paint has been applied.

Can I use limewash in different colors?

chevronBottom

Yes, it Is possible to combine colors to achieve an ombre look with limewash paint. To softly blend different limewash colors together, we recommend using a brush with only water to blend the different limewash colors. 

Do I need to use the “cloud” technic when working with limewash paint?

chevronBottom

No, it is possible to use other technics when working with limewash paint to achieve a different finish. For example, limewash paint can be applied using the drag down technic, where the brush is passed only from up to down. Limewash paint applied with the drag down technic gives a natural rain-washed finish. 

What is the mixing ratio of Limewash powder with water?

chevronBottom

We recommend a mixing ratio of 4.4lbs Limewash powder with 1gal water to achieve the effect seen on our website.

Can I add more water to the limewash powder?

chevronBottom

Yes, it is possible to add more water into the limewash paint, but this will affect the opacity of the limewash paint.

Can I add less water to the limewash powder?

chevronBottom

Yes, it is possible to add less water into the limewash paint, but please note that the limewash paint will be opaquer.

How much WB Pigment do I need to add into the Limewash Paint?

chevronBottom

We recommend adding 100g(3.5oz) WB Pigment to the 4.4lbs limewash powder and 1gal water mixture.

Can I add more WB Pigment to the limewash paint?

chevronBottom

Yes, it is possible to add more WB Pigment into the Limewash Paint but this will change the color of the limewash paint. 

Can I add less WB Pigment to the limewash paint?

chevronBottom

Yes, it is possible to add less WB pigment into the limewash paint but this will affect the opacity and color.

Can I add metallic pigment in the limewash paint?

chevronBottom

No, we do not recommend adding Metallic Pigment into the limewash paint. 

What is limewash powder?

chevronBottom

Limewash powder is a mineral-based powder made with enhanced calcium carbonate.

What is the area of application of limewash powder?

chevronBottom

Limewash paint is made to be used on indoor walls and ceilings.

What is the minimum temperature to apply limewash paint?

chevronBottom

We recommend applying limewash paint at min. 40°F.

How long should I wait between the limewash paint coats?

chevronBottom

We recommend waiting at least 3h between the limewash paint coats.

What is the advantages of limewash paint?

chevronBottom

Limewash paint is Breathable, Absorbs CO2 while curing, Humidity Regulator, and Free of Harmful Chemicals.

Is limewash resistant to abrasion and scratches?

chevronBottom

No, limewash paint is not resistant to abrasion and scratches.

Is limewash paint water-resistant?

chevronBottom

No, limewash paint is not water-resistant.

Is limewash paint VOC-free?

chevronBottom

No, limewash paint is not completely VOC-free it is has a very low VOC contain (less than 1%)

What is the Ph Value of the limewash paint?

chevronBottom

The limewash paint has a Ph Value of >10.5.

How to clean the limewash paint after drying?

chevronBottom

We recommend cleaning surfaces painted with limewash using a dry cloth for dusting.

What is the minimum storage temperature of the limewash paint?

chevronBottom

The minimum storage temperature of the limewash paint is 35°F.

What is the maximum storage temperature of the limewash paint?

chevronBottom

The maximum storage temperature of the limewash paint is 105°F.

What is the shelf life of the limewash paint?

chevronBottom

The limewash paint has a shelf life of 12months before opening and 6months after opening. The shelf life can be significantly shortened if the storage conditions are not properly followed.

Are the pigment included with the limewash paint?

chevronBottom

Yes, upon selecting a colored limewash, the WB pigment to color the limewash are included. 

The most frequently asked questions about Accessories

Do I need special equipment to use the RTV silicone?

chevronBottom

No, the RTV silicone cures at room temperature and doesn’t require any special equipment.

Do you have any silicone mold?

chevronBottom

No, we do not have ready to use mold but we do have RTV silicone to make your own mold.

Do you have spiked shoes?

chevronBottom

Yes, we do have spiked slip-on shoes with dull spikes.

How big are the spikes on your spiked shoes?

chevronBottom

The spikes on our spiked shoes are 18mm long.

How big how your spiked shoes?

chevronBottom

The spiked shoes measure 355mm long and 175mm wide.

How many spikes are on your spiked shoes?

chevronBottom

Each spiked shoes has 16 spikes.

How to use the rtv silicone molding?

chevronBottom

Instructions for Use
Mix the RTV Silicone Rubber A-component with the RTV Silicone Rubber B-component in a 1 to 1 mixing ratio (e.g. 0.21gal A-component with 0.21gal B-component) for 3 to 5minutes.
Let the RTV silicone mixture defoam for 30 to 50 minutes. 
Place the object you wish to mold into the defoamed silicone rubber.
Wait 6 to 8h (at 75-80°F) before removing the object from the cured silicone rubber. 
Use the cured silicone rubber as a negative form mold.

What is the difference between the polish, and the carnauba wax?

chevronBottom

The polish is a liquid polish used to polish epoxy resin and other resins. The carnauba wax is a all-rounder wax to polish and protect epoxy resin, word, cars, etc. 

Can I use another cleaner than EPODEX Pre-Cleaner to clean and degrease tiles?

chevronBottom

Yes, it is possible to use another cleaner than EPODEX Pre-Cleaner to clean and degrease your tiles, but you must ensure that the tiles are perfectly clean before painting.

What is the processing temperature of the epoxy glue?

chevronBottom

The processing temperature of the epoxy glue is 40°F to 200°F. 

How big are the tooth on the surface squeegee?

chevronBottom

The Surface Squeegee 10” with Pole Holder and the Surface Squeegee 20”with Pole Holder teeth are 1/8” deep and 1/8” wide.

For what is the EPODEX Pre-Cleaner used?

chevronBottom

EPODEX’s Pre-cleaner is used to clean and degrease surfaces such as tiles, plastic etc. before painting. 

Can the EPODEX Pre-Cleaner be used to remove green deposits, algae, lichens, and fungi outdoors?

chevronBottom

No, the EPODEX Pro-Cleaner is only to remove grease and not to remove green deposits.

Is your carnauba wax liquid?

chevronBottom

Yes, our carnauba wax is a liquid wax that can be used on cured epoxy resin, polyurethane resin, car, furniture, wood, metal, glass, and more.

Can I use carnauba wax on epoxy resin?

chevronBottom

Yes, you can use carnauba wax on epoxy resin.

Do you have a waterproof joint?

chevronBottom

No, we do not have any caulk or oder product to waterproof a joint.

Is the carnauba wax 100% pure carnauba?

chevronBottom

No, the EPODEX carnauba wax is a mixture and is not made of 100% pure carnauba.

Is the carnauba wax food safe?

chevronBottom

No, the EPODEX Carnauba wax is not food safe.

Do you sell edge trim?

chevronBottom

No, we do not sell edge trim.

Do you sell tape/masking tape to mark out where the resin should be applied on the floor?

chevronBottom

Yes, we sell a masking tape for epoxy resin floor. We recommend to put it off before the epoxy resin is hard otherwise you will not be able to put it off.

What is the difference between the masking tape and the separating tape?

chevronBottom

The separating tape is made to line a frame and prevent the epoxy from adhering. It is not possible to remove the separating tape after use. The masking tape is made to limit an area and be removed after use. 

Do you have silicone for mould making? Do you have RTV silicone?

chevronBottom

Yes, we do have RTV silicone for mould making.

I can’t find the RTV silicone?

chevronBottom

You can find the RTV silicone under the accessories category on our website.

Is it possible to reuse the 2.1galmixing bucket after using it for epoxy resin?

chevronBottom

Yes, it is possible to reuse the 8L mixing bucket after using it for epoxy resin. Please note that the 8L mixing bucket is is not as flexible as our smaller mixing cups and getting the cured epoxy resin out might be more difficult.

Is it possible to reuse the 3.1gal mixing bucket after using it for epoxy resin?

chevronBottom

Yes, it is possible to reuse the 12L mixing bucket after using it for epoxy resin. Please note that the 12L mixing bucket is is not as flexible as our smaller mixing cups and getting the cured epoxy resin out might be more difficult.

Do you have color samples?

chevronBottom

No, we do not have color samples.

Are the roller you are selling solvent-resistant?

chevronBottom

No, our rollers aren’t solvent resistant.

What is Pre-Cleaner?

chevronBottom

The Pre-Cleaner is a cleaning and degreasing product to clean tiles before painting or coating them. 

The most frequently asked questions about Pigment

Why did I get the WB Pigment Mocca when I ordered Mocca pastel?
Why did I get the WB Pigment Mocca when I ordered Mocca pastel+?

chevronBottom

This is normal the WB Pigment is never in pastel. The WB Pigment Mocca is added to the pastel based paint to achieve the shade Mocca pastel. The WB Pigment Mocca is added to the pastel+ based paint to achieve the shade Mocca pastel+.

Why did I get the WB Pigment Nougat when I ordered Nougat pastel?
Why did I get the WB Pigment Nougat when I ordered Nougat pastel+?

chevronBottom

This is normal the WB Pigment is never in pastel. The WB Pigment Nougat is added to the pastel based paint to achieve the shade Nougat pastel. The WB Pigment Nougat is added to the pastel+ based paint to achieve the shade Nougat pastel+.

Why did I get the WB Pigment Pastel yellow when I ordered Pastel yellow+?
Why did I get the WB Pigment Pastel yellow when I ordered Pastel yellow II?

chevronBottom

This is normal the WB Pigment is never in pastel+ or pastel II. The WB Pigment Pastel yellow is added to the pastel based paint to achieve the shade Pastel yellow+. The WB Pigment Pastel yellow is added to the pastel+ based paint to achieve the shade Pastel yellow II.

Why did I get the WB Pigment Pastel orange when I ordered Pastel orange+?
Why did I get the WB Pigment Pastel orange when I ordered Pastel orange II?

chevronBottom

This is normal the WB Pigment is never in pastel+ or pastel II. The WB Pigment Pastel orange is added to the pastel based paint to achieve the shade Pastel orange+. The WB Pigment Pastel orange is added to the pastel+ based paint to achieve the shade Pastel orange II.

Why did I get the WB Pigment Pastel violet when I ordered Pastel violet+?
Why did I get the WB Pigment Pastel violet when I ordered Pastel violet II?

chevronBottom

This is normal the WB Pigment is never in pastel+ or pastel II. The WB Pigment Pastel violet is added to the pastel based paint to achieve the shade Pastel violet+. The WB Pigment Pastel violet is added to the pastel+ based paint to achieve the shade Pastel violet II.

Why did I get the WB Pigment Cream white when I ordered Cream white pastel?
Why did I get the WB Pigment Cream white when I ordered Cream white pastel+?

chevronBottom

This is normal the WB Pigment is never in pastel. The WB Pigment Cream white is added to the pastel based paint to achieve the shade Cream white pastel. The WB Pigment Cream white is added to the pastel+ based paint to achieve the shade Cream white pastel+.

Why did I get the WB Pigment Grey white when I ordered Grey white pastel?
Why did I get the WB Pigment Grey white when I ordered Grey white pastel+?

chevronBottom

This is normal the WB Pigment is never in pastel. The WB Pigment Grey white is added to the pastel based paint to achieve the shade Grey white pastel. The WB Pigment Grey white is added to the pastel+ based paint to achieve the shade Grey white pastel+.

Why did I get the WB Pigment Pure white when I ordered Pure white pastel?
Why did I get the WB Pigment Pure white when I ordered Pure white pastel+?

chevronBottom

This is normal the WB Pigment is never in pastel. The WB Pigment Pure white is added to the pastel based paint to achieve the shade Pure white pastel. The WB Pigment Pure white is added to the pastel+ based paint to achieve the shade Pure white pastel+.

Why did I get the WB Pigment Pistachio when I ordered Pistachio pastel?
Why did I get the WB Pigment Pistachio when I ordered Pistachio pastel+?

chevronBottom

This is normal the WB Pigment is never in pastel. The WB Pigment Pistachio is added to the pastel based paint to achieve the shade Pistachio pastel. The WB Pigment Pistachio is added to the pastel+ based paint to achieve the shade Pistachio pastel+.

Why did I get the WB Pigment Macaron when I ordered Macaron pastel?
Why did I get the WB Pigment Macaron when I ordered Macaron pastel+?

chevronBottom

This is normal the WB Pigment is never in pastel. The WB Pigment Macaron is added to the pastel based paint to achieve the shade Macaron pastel. The WB Pigment Macaron is added to the pastel+ based paint to achieve the shade Macaron pastel+.

Why did I get the WB Pigment Cappuccino when I ordered Cappuccino pastel?
Why did I get the WB Pigment Cappuccino when I ordered Cappuccino pastel+?

chevronBottom

This is normal the WB Pigment is never in pastel. The WB Pigment Cappuccino is added to the pastel based paint to achieve the shade Cappuccino pastel. The WB Pigment Cappuccino is added to the pastel+ based paint to achieve the shade Cappuccino pastel+.

Why did I get the WB Pigment Frozen when I ordered Frozen pastel?
Why did I get the WB Pigment Frozen when I ordered Frozen pastel+?

chevronBottom

This is normal the WB Pigment is never in pastel. The WB Pigment Frozen is added to the pastel based paint to achieve the shade Frozen pastel. The WB Pigment Frozen is added to the pastel+ based paint to achieve the shade Frozen pastel+.

Why did I get the WB Pigment Flamingo when I ordered Flamingo pastel?
Why did I get the WB Pigment Flamingo when I ordered Flamingo pastel+?

chevronBottom

This is normal the WB Pigment is never in pastel. The WB Pigment Flamingo is added to the pastel based paint to achieve the shade Flamingo pastel. The WB Pigment Flamingo is added to the pastel+ based paint to achieve the shade Flamingo pastel+.

Why did I get the WB Pigment Peach when I ordered Peach pastel?
Why did I get the WB Pigment Peach when I ordered Peach pastel+?

chevronBottom

This is normal the WB Pigment is never in pastel. The WB Pigment Peach is added to the pastel based paint to achieve the shade Peach pastel. The WB Pigment Peach is added to the pastel+ based paint to achieve the shade Peach pastel+.

Why did I get the WB Pigment Lemon when I ordered Lemon pastel?
Why did I get the WB Pigment Lemon when I ordered Lemon pastel+?

chevronBottom

This is normal the WB Pigment is never in pastel. The WB Pigment Lemon is added to the pastel based paint to achieve the shade Lemon pastel. The WB Pigment Lemon is added to the pastel+ based paint to achieve the shade Lemon pastel+.

Why did I get the WB Pigment Finca when I ordered Finca pastel?
Why did I get the WB Pigment Finca when I ordered Finca pastel+?

chevronBottom

This is normal the WB Pigment is never in pastel. The WB Pigment Finca is added to the pastel based paint to achieve the shade Finca pastel. The WB Pigment Finca is added to the pastel+ based paint to achieve the shade Finca pastel+.

Why did I get the WB Pigment Orient when I ordered Orient pastel?
Why did I get the WB Pigment Orient when I ordered Orient pastel+?

chevronBottom

This is normal the WB Pigment is never in pastel. The WB Pigment Orient is added to the pastel based paint to achieve the shade Orient pastel. The WB Pigment Orient is added to the pastel+ based paint to achieve the shade Orient pastel+.

Why did I get the WB Pigment Malve when I ordered Malve pastel?
Why did I get the WB Pigment Malve when I ordered Malve pastel+?

chevronBottom

This is normal the WB Pigment is never in pastel. The WB Pigment Malve is added to the pastel based paint to achieve the shade Malve pastel. The WB Pigment Malve is added to the pastel+ based paint to achieve the shade Malve pastel+.

Why did I get the WB Pigment Powder when I ordered Powder pastel?
Why did I get the WB Pigment Powder when I ordered Powder pastel+?

chevronBottom

This is normal the WB Pigment is never in pastel. The WB Pigment Powder is added to the pastel based paint to achieve the shade Powder pastel. The WB Pigment Powder is added to the pastel+ based paint to achieve the shade Powder pastel+.

Why did I get the WB Pigment Pearl when I ordered Pearl pastel?
Why did I get the WB Pigment Pearl when I ordered Pearl pastel+?

chevronBottom

This is normal the WB Pigment is never in pastel. The WB Pigment Pearl is added to the pastel based paint to achieve the shade Pearl pastel. The WB Pigment Pearl is added to the pastel+ based paint to achieve the shade Pearl pastel+.

Why did I get the WB Pigment Sky when I ordered Sky pastel?
Why did I get the WB Pigment Sky when I ordered Sky pastel+?

chevronBottom

This is normal the WB Pigment is never in pastel. The WB Pigment Sky is added to the pastel based paint to achieve the shade Sky pastel. The WB Pigment Sky is added to the pastel+ based paint to achieve the shade Sky pastel+.

Why did I get the WB Pigment Ocean when I ordered Ocean pastel?
Why did I get the WB Pigment Ocean when I ordered Ocean pastel+?

chevronBottom

This is normal the WB Pigment is never in pastel. The WB Pigment Ocean is added to the pastel based paint to achieve the shade Ocean pastel. The WB Pigment Ocean is added to the pastel+ based paint to achieve the shade Ocean pastel+.

Why did I get the WB Pigment Aqua when I ordered Aqua pastel?
Why did I get the WB Pigment Aqua when I ordered Aqua pastel+?

chevronBottom

This is normal the WB Pigment is never in pastel. The WB Pigment Aqua is added to the pastel based paint to achieve the shade Aqua pastel. The WB Pigment Aqua is added to the pastel+ based paint to achieve the shade Aqua pastel+.

Why did I get the WB Pigment Nordic when I ordered Nordic pastel?
Why did I get the WB Pigment Nordic when I ordered Nordic pastel+?

chevronBottom

This is normal the WB Pigment is never in pastel. The WB Pigment Nordic is added to the pastel based paint to achieve the shade Nordic pastel. The WB Pigment Nordic is added to the pastel+ based paint to achieve the shade Nordic pastel+.

Why did I get the WB Pigment Maui when I ordered Maui pastel?
Why did I get the WB Pigment Maui when I ordered Maui pastel+?

chevronBottom

This is normal the WB Pigment is never in pastel. The WB Pigment Maui is added to the pastel based paint to achieve the shade Maui pastel. The WB Pigment Maui is added to the pastel+ based paint to achieve the shade Maui pastel+.

Why did I get the WB Pigment Sand when I ordered Sand pastel?
Why did I get the WB Pigment Sand when I ordered Sand pastel+?

chevronBottom

This is normal the WB Pigment is never in pastel. The WB Pigment Sand is added to the pastel based paint to achieve the shade Sand pastel. The WB Pigment Sand is added to the pastel+ based paint to achieve the shade Sand pastel+.

Why did I get the WB Pigment Denim when I ordered Denim pastel?
Why did I get the WB Pigment Denim when I ordered Denim pastel+?

chevronBottom

This is normal the WB Pigment is never in pastel. The WB Pigment Denim is added to the pastel based paint to achieve the shade Denim pastel. The WB Pigment Denim is added to the pastel+ based paint to achieve the shade Denim pastel+.

Why did I get the WB Pigment Industry when I ordered Industry pastel?
Why did I get the WB Pigment Industry when I ordered Industry pastel+?

chevronBottom

This is normal the WB Pigment is never in pastel. The WB Pigment Industry is added to the pastel based paint to achieve the shade Industry pastel. The WB Pigment Industry is added to the pastel+ based paint to achieve the shade Industry pastel+.

Why did I get the WB Pigment Midnight when I ordered Midnight pastel?
Why did I get the WB Pigment Midnight when I ordered Midnight pastel+?

chevronBottom

This is normal the WB Pigment is never in pastel. The WB Pigment Midnight is added to the pastel based paint to achieve the shade Midnight pastel. The WB Pigment Midnight is added to the pastel+ based paint to achieve the shade Midnight pastel+.

Why did I get the WB Pigment Maritim when I ordered Maritim pastel?
Why did I get the WB Pigment Maritim when I ordered Maritim pastel+?

chevronBottom

This is normal the WB Pigment is never in pastel. The WB Pigment Maritim is added to the pastel based paint to achieve the shade Maritim pastel. The WB Pigment Maritim is added to the pastel+ based paint to achieve the shade Maritim pastel+.

Why did I get the WB Pigment Spa when I ordered Spa pastel?
Why did I get the WB Pigment Spa when I ordered Spa pastel+?

chevronBottom

This is normal the WB Pigment is never in pastel. The WB Pigment Spa is added to the pastel based paint to achieve the shade Spa pastel. The WB Pigment Spa is added to the pastel+ based paint to achieve the shade Spa pastel+.

Why did I get the WB Pigment Spring when I ordered Spring pastel?
Why did I get the WB Pigment Spring when I ordered Spring pastel+?

chevronBottom

This is normal the WB Pigment is never in pastel. The WB Pigment Spring is added to the pastel based paint to achieve the shade Spring pastel. The WB Pigment Spring is added to the pastel+ based paint to achieve the shade Spring pastel+.

Why did I get the WB Pigment Sage when I ordered Sage pastel?
Why did I get the WB Pigment Sage when I ordered Sage pastel+?

chevronBottom

This is normal the WB Pigment is never in pastel. The WB Pigment Sage is added to the pastel based paint to achieve the shade Sage pastel. The WB Pigment Sage is added to the pastel+ based paint to achieve the shade Sage pastel+.

Why did I get the WB Pigment Forest when I ordered Forest pastel?
Why did I get the WB Pigment Forest when I ordered Forest pastel+?

chevronBottom

This is normal the WB Pigment is never in pastel. The WB Pigment Forest is added to the pastel based paint to achieve the shade Forest pastel. The WB Pigment Forest is added to the pastel+ based paint to achieve the shade Forest pastel+.

Why did I get the WB Pigment Taupe when I ordered Taupe pastel?
Why did I get the WB Pigment Taupe when I ordered Taupe pastel+?

chevronBottom

This is normal the WB Pigment is never in pastel. The WB Pigment Taupe is added to the pastel based paint to achieve the shade Taupe pastel. The WB Pigment Taupe is added to the pastel+ based paint to achieve the shade Taupe pastel+.

Why did I get the WB Pigment Chrome when I ordered Chrome pastel?
Why did I get the WB Pigment Chrome when I ordered Chrome pastel+?

chevronBottom

This is normal the WB Pigment is never in pastel. The WB Pigment Chrome is added to the pastel based paint to achieve the shade Chrome pastel. The WB Pigment Chrome is added to the pastel+ based paint to achieve the shade Chrome pastel+.

Why did I get the WB Pigment Cotton when I ordered Cotton pastel?
Why did I get the WB Pigment Cotton when I ordered Cotton pastel+?

chevronBottom

This is normal the WB Pigment is never in pastel. The WB Pigment Cotton is added to the pastel based paint to achieve the shade Cotton pastel. The WB Pigment Cotton is added to the pastel+ based paint to achieve the shade Cotton pastel+.

Why did I get the WB Pigment Cashmere when I ordered Cashmere pastel?
Why did I get the WB Pigment Cashmere when I ordered Cashmere pastel+?

chevronBottom

This is normal the WB Pigment is never in pastel. The WB Pigment Cashmere is added to the pastel based paint to achieve the shade Cashmere pastel. The WB Pigment Cashmere is added to the pastel+ based paint to achieve the shade Cashmere pastel+.

Why did I get the WB Pigment Champagne when I ordered Champagne pastel?
Why did I get the WB Pigment Champagne when I ordered Champagne pastel+?

chevronBottom

This is normal the WB Pigment is never in pastel. The WB Pigment Champagne is added to the pastel based paint to achieve the shade Champagne pastel. The WB Pigment Champagne is added to the pastel+ based paint to achieve the shade Champagne pastel+.

Why did I get the WB Pigment Sunlight when I ordered Sunlight pastel?
Why did I get the WB Pigment Sunlight when I ordered Sunlight pastel+?

chevronBottom

This is normal the WB Pigment is never in pastel. The WB Pigment Sunlight is added to the pastel based paint to achieve the shade Sunlight pastel. The WB Pigment Sunlight is added to the pastel+ based paint to achieve the shade Sunlight pastel+.

Why did I get the WB Pigment Vanilla when I ordered Vanilla pastel?
Why did I get the WB Pigment Vanilla when I ordered Vanilla pastel+?

chevronBottom

This is normal the WB Pigment is never in pastel. The WB Pigment Vanilla is added to the pastel based paint to achieve the shade Vanilla pastel. The WB Pigment Vanilla is added to the pastel+ based paint to achieve the shade Vanilla pastel+.

Why did I get the WB Pigment Swedish Red when I ordered Swedish Red pastel?
Why did I get the WB Pigment Swedish Red when I ordered Swedish Red pastel+?

chevronBottom

This is normal the WB Pigment is never in pastel. The WB Pigment Swedish Red is added to the pastel based paint to achieve the shade Swedish Red pastel. The WB Pigment Swedish Red is added to the pastel+ based paint to achieve the shade Swedish Red pastel+.

Why did I get the WB Pigment Lavender when I ordered Lavender pastel?
Why did I get the WB Pigment Lavender when I ordered Lavender pastel+?

chevronBottom

This is normal the WB Pigment is never in pastel. The WB Pigment Lavender is added to the pastel based paint to achieve the shade Lavender pastel. The WB Pigment Lavender is added to the pastel+ based paint to achieve the shade Lavender pastel+.

Why did I get the WB Pigment Signal Yellow when I ordered Signal Yellow pastel?
Why did I get the WB Pigment Signal Yellow when I ordered Signal Yellow pastel+?

chevronBottom

This is normal the WB Pigment is never in pastel. The WB Pigment Signal Yellow is added to the pastel based paint to achieve the shade Signal Yellow pastel. The WB Pigment Signal Yellow is added to the pastel+ based paint to achieve the shade Signal Yellow pastel+.

Why did I get the WB Pigment Brown Beige when I ordered Brown Beige pastel?
Why did I get the WB Pigment Brown Beige when I ordered Brown Beige pastel+?

chevronBottom

This is normal the WB Pigment is never in pastel. The WB Pigment Brown Beige is added to the pastel based paint to achieve the shade Brown Beige pastel. The WB Pigment Brown Beige is added to the pastel+ based paint to achieve the shade Brown Beige pastel+.

Why did I get the WB Pigment Ivory when I ordered Ivory pastel?
Why did I get the WB Pigment Ivory when I ordered Ivory pastel+?

chevronBottom

This is normal the WB Pigment is never in pastel. The WB Pigment Ivory is added to the pastel based paint to achieve the shade Ivory pastel. The WB Pigment Ivory is added to the pastel+ based paint to achieve the shade Ivory pastel+.

Why did I get the WB Pigment Ochre Yellow when I ordered Ochre Yellow pastel?
Why did I get the WB Pigment Ochre Yellow when I ordered Ochre Yellow pastel+?

chevronBottom

This is normal the WB Pigment is never in pastel. The WB Pigment Ochre Yellow is added to the pastel based paint to achieve the shade Ochre Yellow pastel. The WB Pigment Ochre Yellow is added to the pastel+ based paint to achieve the shade Ochre Yellow pastel+.

Why did I get the WB Pigment Flame Red when I ordered Flame Red pastel?
Why did I get the WB Pigment Flame Red when I ordered Flame Red pastel+?

chevronBottom

This is normal the WB Pigment is never in pastel. The WB Pigment Flame Red is added to the pastel based paint to achieve the shade Flame Red pastel. The WB Pigment Flame Red is added to the pastel+ based paint to achieve the shade Flame Red pastel+.

Why did I get the WB Pigment Purple Red when I ordered Purple Red pastel?
Why did I get the WB Pigment Purple Red when I ordered Purple Red pastel+?

chevronBottom

This is normal the WB Pigment is never in pastel. The WB Pigment Purple Red is added to the pastel based paint to achieve the shade Purple Red pastel. The WB Pigment Purple Red is added to the pastel+ based paint to achieve the shade Purple Red pastel+.

Why did I get the WB Pigment Rose when I ordered Rose pastel?
Why did I get the WB Pigment Rose when I ordered Rose pastel+?

chevronBottom

This is normal the WB Pigment is never in pastel. The WB Pigment Rose is added to the pastel based paint to achieve the shade Rose pastel. The WB Pigment Rose is added to the pastel+ based paint to achieve the shade Rose pastel+.

Why did I get the WB Pigment Traffic Red when I ordered Traffic Red pastel?
Why did I get the WB Pigment Traffic Red when I ordered Traffic Red pastel+?

chevronBottom

This is normal the WB Pigment is never in pastel. The WB Pigment Traffic Red is added to the pastel based paint to achieve the shade Traffic Red pastel. The WB Pigment Traffic Red is added to the pastel+ based paint to achieve the shade Traffic Red pastel+.

Why did I get the WB Pigment Traffic Purple when I ordered Traffic Purple pastel?
Why did I get the WB Pigment Traffic Purple when I ordered Traffic Purple pastel+?

chevronBottom

This is normal the WB Pigment is never in pastel. The WB Pigment Traffic Purple is added to the pastel based paint to achieve the shade Traffic Purple pastel. The WB Pigment Traffic Purple is added to the pastel+ based paint to achieve the shade Traffic Purple pastel+.

Why did I get the WB Pigment Telemagenta when I ordered Telemagenta pastel?
Why did I get the WB Pigment Telemagenta when I ordered Telemagenta pastel+?

chevronBottom

This is normal the WB Pigment is never in pastel. The WB Pigment Telemagenta is added to the pastel based paint to achieve the shade Telemagenta pastel. The WB Pigment Telemagenta is added to the pastel+ based paint to achieve the shade Telemagenta pastel+.

Why did I get the WB Pigment Ultramarine Blue when I ordered Ultramarine Blue pastel?
Why did I get the WB Pigment Ultramarine Blue when I ordered Ultramarine Blue pastel+?

chevronBottom

This is normal the WB Pigment is never in pastel. The WB Pigment Ultramarine Blue is added to the pastel based paint to achieve the shade Ultramarine Blue pastel. The WB Pigment Ultramarine Blue is added to the pastel+ based paint to achieve the shade Ultramarine Blue pastel+.

Why did I get the WB Pigment Azure Blue when I ordered Azure Blue pastel?
Why did I get the WB Pigment Azure Blue when I ordered Azure Blue pastel+?

chevronBottom

This is normal the WB Pigment is never in pastel. The WB Pigment Azure Blue is added to the pastel based paint to achieve the shade Azure Blue pastel. The WB Pigment Azure Blue is added to the pastel+ based paint to achieve the shade Azure Blue pastel+.

Why did I get the WB Pigment Light Blue when I ordered Light Blue pastel?
Why did I get the WB Pigment Light Blue when I ordered Light Blue pastel+?

chevronBottom

This is normal the WB Pigment is never in pastel. The WB Pigment Light Blue is added to the pastel based paint to achieve the shade Light Blue pastel. The WB Pigment Light Blue is added to the pastel+ based paint to achieve the shade Light Blue pastel+.

Why did I get the WB Pigment Sky Blue when I ordered Sky Blue pastel?
Why did I get the WB Pigment Sky Blue when I ordered Sky Blue pastel+?

chevronBottom

This is normal the WB Pigment is never in pastel. The WB Pigment Sky Blue is added to the pastel based paint to achieve the shade Sky Blue pastel. The WB Pigment Sky Blue is added to the pastel+ based paint to achieve the shade Sky Blue pastel+.

Why did I get the WB Pigment Turquoise Blue when I ordered Turquoise Blue pastel?
Why did I get the WB Pigment Turquoise Blue when I ordered Turquoise Blue pastel+?

chevronBottom

This is normal the WB Pigment is never in pastel. The WB Pigment Azure Blue is added to the pastel based paint to achieve the shade Azure Blue pastel. The WB Pigment Azure Blue is added to the pastel+ based paint to achieve the shade Azure Blue pastel+.

Why did I get the WB Pigment Moss green when I ordered Moss green pastel?
Why did I get the WB Pigment Moss green when I ordered Moss green pastel+?

chevronBottom

This is normal the WB Pigment is never in pastel. The WB Pigment Moss green is added to the pastel based paint to achieve the shade Moss green pastel. The WB Pigment Moss green is added to the pastel+ based paint to achieve the shade Moss green pastel+.

Why did I get the WB Pigment Grass Green when I ordered Grass Green pastel?
Why did I get the WB Pigment Grass Green when I ordered Grass Green pastel+?

chevronBottom

This is normal the WB Pigment is never in pastel. The WB Pigment Grass Green is added to the pastel based paint to achieve the shade Grass Green pastel. The WB Pigment Grass Green is added to the pastel+ based paint to achieve the shade Grass Green pastel+.

Why did I get the WB Pigment Yellow green when I ordered Yellow green pastel?
Why did I get the WB Pigment Yellow green when I ordered Yellow green pastel+?

chevronBottom

This is normal the WB Pigment is never in pastel. The WB Pigment Yellow green is added to the pastel based paint to achieve the shade Yellow green pastel. The WB Pigment Yellow green is added to the pastel+ based paint to achieve the shade Yellow green pastel+.

Why did I get the WB Pigment Pure green when I ordered Pure green pastel?
Why did I get the WB Pigment Pure green when I ordered Pure green pastel+?

chevronBottom

This is normal the WB Pigment is never in pastel. The WB Pigment Pure green is added to the pastel based paint to achieve the shade Pure green pastel. The WB Pigment Pure green is added to the pastel+ based paint to achieve the shade Pure green pastel+.

Why did I get the WB Pigment Silver Grey when I ordered Silver Grey pastel?
Why did I get the WB Pigment Silver Grey when I ordered Silver Grey pastel+?

chevronBottom

This is normal the WB Pigment is never in pastel. The WB Pigment Silver Grey is added to the pastel based paint to achieve the shade Silver Grey pastel. The WB Pigment Silver Grey is added to the pastel+ based paint to achieve the shade Silver Grey pastel+.

Why did I get the WB Pigment Olive Grey when I ordered Olive Grey pastel?
Why did I get the WB Pigment Olive Grey when I ordered Olive Grey pastel+?

chevronBottom

This is normal the WB Pigment is never in pastel. The WB Pigment Olive Grey is added to the pastel based paint to achieve the shade Olive Grey pastel. The WB Pigment Olive Grey is added to the pastel+ based paint to achieve the shade Olive Grey pastel+.

Why did I get the WB Pigment Iron grey when I ordered Iron grey pastel?
Why did I get the WB Pigment Iron grey when I ordered Iron grey pastel+?

chevronBottom

This is normal the WB Pigment is never in pastel. The WB Pigment Iron grey is added to the pastel based paint to achieve the shade Iron grey pastel. The WB Pigment Iron grey is added to the pastel+ based paint to achieve the shade Iron grey pastel+.

Why did I get the WB Pigment Anthracite grey when I ordered Anthracite grey pastel?
Why did I get the WB Pigment Anthracite grey when I ordered Anthracite grey pastel+?

chevronBottom

This is normal the WB Pigment is never in pastel. The WB Pigment Anthracite grey is added to the pastel based paint to achieve the shade Anthracite grey pastel. The WB Pigment Anthracite grey is added to the pastel+ based paint to achieve the shade Anthracite grey pastel+.

Why did I get the WB Pigment Concrete Grey when I ordered Concrete Grey pastel?
Why did I get the WB Pigment Concrete Grey when I ordered Concrete Grey pastel+?

chevronBottom

This is normal the WB Pigment is never in pastel. The WB Pigment Concrete Grey is added to the pastel based paint to achieve the shade Concrete Grey pastel. The WB Pigment Concrete Grey is added to the pastel+ based paint to achieve the shade Concrete Grey pastel+.

Why did I get the WB Pigment Pubble Grey when I ordered Pubble Grey pastel?
Why did I get the WB Pigment Pubble Grey when I ordered Pubble Grey pastel+?

chevronBottom

This is normal the WB Pigment is never in pastel. The WB Pigment Pubble Grey is added to the pastel based paint to achieve the shade Pubble Grey pastel. The WB Pigment Pubble Grey is added to the pastel+ based paint to achieve the shade Pubble Grey pastel+.

Why did I get the WB Pigment Platinum Grey when I ordered Platinum Grey pastel?
Why did I get the WB Pigment Platinum Grey when I ordered Platinum Grey pastel+?

chevronBottom

This is normal the WB Pigment is never in pastel. The WB Pigment Platinum Grey is added to the pastel based paint to achieve the shade Platinum Grey pastel. The WB Pigment Platinum Grey is added to the pastel+ based paint to achieve the shade Platinum Grey pastel+.

Why did I get the WB Pigment Ochre Brown when I ordered Ochre Brown pastel?
Why did I get the WB Pigment Ochre Brown when I ordered Ochre Brown pastel+?

chevronBottom

This is normal the WB Pigment is never in pastel. The WB Pigment Ochre Brown is added to the pastel based paint to achieve the shade Ochre Brown pastel. The WB Pigment Ochre Brown is added to the pastel+ based paint to achieve the shade Ochre Brown pastel+.

Why did I get the WB Pigment Terra Brown when I ordered Terra Brown pastel?
Why did I get the WB Pigment Terra Brown when I ordered Terra Brown pastel+?

chevronBottom

This is normal the WB Pigment is never in pastel. The WB Pigment Terra Brown is added to the pastel based paint to achieve the shade Terra Brown pastel. The WB Pigment Terra Brown is added to the pastel+ based paint to achieve the shade Terra Brown pastel+.

Why did I get the WB Pigment Signal White when I ordered Signal White pastel?
Why did I get the WB Pigment Signal White when I ordered Signal White pastel+?

chevronBottom

This is normal the WB Pigment is never in pastel. The WB Pigment Signal White is added to the pastel based paint to achieve the shade Signal White pastel. The WB Pigment Signal White is added to the pastel+ based paint to achieve the shade Signal White pastel+.

Why did I get the WB Pigment Jet Black when I ordered Jet Black pastel?
Why did I get the WB Pigment Jet Black when I ordered Jet Black pastel+?

chevronBottom

This is normal the WB Pigment is never in pastel. The WB Pigment Jet Black is added to the pastel based paint to achieve the shade Jet Black pastel. The WB Pigment Jet Black is added to the pastel+ based paint to achieve the shade Jet Black pastel+.

Why did I get the WB Pigment Traffic White when I ordered Traffic White pastel?
Why did I get the WB Pigment Traffic White when I ordered Traffic White pastel+?

chevronBottom

This is normal the WB Pigment is never in pastel. The WB Pigment Traffic White is added to the pastel based paint to achieve the shade Traffic White pastel. The WB Pigment Traffic White is added to the pastel+ based paint to achieve the shade Traffic White pastel+.

Why did I get the WB Pigment Papyrus White when I ordered Papyrus White pastel?
Why did I get the WB Pigment Papyrus White when I ordered Papyrus White pastel+?

chevronBottom

This is normal the WB Pigment is never in pastel. The WB Pigment Papyrus White is added to the pastel based paint to achieve the shade Papyrus White pastel. The WB Pigment Papyrus White is added to the pastel+ based paint to achieve the shade Papyrus White pastel+.

Why did I get the WB Pigment Pastel Blue when I ordered Pastel Blue+?
Why did I get the WB Pigment Pastel Blue when I ordered Pastel Blue II?

chevronBottom

This is normal the WB Pigment is never in pastel+ or pastel II. The WB Pigment Pastel Blue is added to the pastel based paint to achieve the shade Pastel Blue+. The WB Pigment Pastel Blue is added to the pastel+ based paint to achieve the shade Pastel Blue II.

Why did I get the WB Pigment Pastel Turquoise when I ordered Pastel Turquoise+?
Why did I get the WB Pigment Pastel Turquoise when I ordered Pastel Turquoise II?

chevronBottom

This is normal the WB Pigment is never in pastel+ or pastel II. The WB Pigment Pastel Turquoise is added to the pastel based paint to achieve the shade Pastel Turquoise+. The WB Pigment Pastel Turquoise is added to the pastel+ based paint to achieve the shade Pastel Turquoise II.

Why did I get the WB Pigment Pastel Grey when I ordered Pastel Grey+?
Why did I get the WB Pigment Pastel Grey when I ordered Pastel Grey II?

chevronBottom

This is normal the WB Pigment is never in pastel+ or pastel II. The WB Pigment Pastel Grey is added to the pastel based paint to achieve the shade Pastel Grey+. The WB Pigment Pastel Grey is added to the pastel+ based paint to achieve the shade Pastel Grey II.

Is the WB Pigment powder?

chevronBottom

No, the WB Pigment is liquid water-based pigment.

Why did I receive powder pigment last time and now I receive a paste?

chevronBottom

Depending on the color selected, the pigments come in different forms.

Why did I receive powder pigment last time and now I receive a paste?

chevronBottom

Depending on the color selected, the pigments come in different forms.

The most frequently asked questions about General Inquiries

Do you have paint color samples?

chevronBottom

Unfortunately, we do not have any samples or color cards available now, but we are working on introducing this option. We recommend ordering the smallest quantity of the right unpigmented base along with desired WB pigments to test the colors. Please note that opened WB pigments are excluded from the right of return.

Do you have stores/ physical store/ a place to go and buy directly?

chevronBottom

Unfortunately, we currently do not have a showroom. However, pick up your delivery at our office/warehouse.
If that suits you, we kindly ask you contact us per E-mail or phone beforehand.

 

Where do I find instructions for use?

chevronBottom

The Instructions for use can be found on each product page. Scroll down to see the instructions for use. Additionally, we have a large number of YouTube videos and tutorials that visually explain how to use our products, how to prepare the substrate, and how to choose the right products.

How can I return the product?

chevronBottom

We offer a 30-day return policy. You have 30 days from receipt date to return the items.
To start a return, contact us at service@epodex.com. Items sent back to us without first requesting a return will not be accepted.

I want to return my order, who pays for the return costs?  How much does it cost to return a package?

chevronBottom

The customer bears the direct costs of returning the goods. 

What happens if my package was/arrived damaged?

chevronBottom

Please send us pictures of the damaged goods per E-mail. If possible, indicate exactly which components are damaged as well as your order number. A member of your team will make sure that the damaged products are replaced as soon as possible.

Do you have trader’s price? Do professionals get a discount? 

chevronBottom

We do offer a discount on bulk orders to our b2b clients. We kindly ask that you send us your request per e-mail, discount request can’t be processed over the livechat. 

Do you have coupons?
Can I have a discount?

chevronBottom

At EPODEX, we are committed to offering fair and competitive prices year-round. For this reason, we do not offer promotional discounts, as our focus is on always maintaining consistently low prices for all customers. However, new customers can enter the code new5 to get 5% off their first order.

Are you open around Christmas and new year? Are you open during the holidays?

chevronBottom

We are open between Christmas and new year. Please note that delivery might take longer during that period. 

Where are your product coming from?
Are you producing your product?

chevronBottom

All our products are Made in Germany. Our head-quarter is based in Germany. We produce and distribute our own products.

I want to know how to mix EPODEX? I want to know how to apply EPODEX?

chevronBottom

EPODEX is our brand and not a specific product. Each of our products have a different mixing ratio and application technic.  

Do you sell to private persons?

chevronBottom

Yes, we do sell to private customers as well a trader. 

Are you available in stores?

chevronBottom

No, we are an online and shop our products are only available via our website online.

Are you shipping on the weekends?

chevronBottom

We aren’t shipping on the weekends and public holidays. Our warehouse is opened Monday to Friday. 

What is same-day shipping?

chevronBottom

Same-day Shipping means that your order will not have any preparation delays and will be packed and shipped as soon as we receive your payments. Our warehouse is opened Monday to Friday. Orders made on the weekend are being prepared and dispatched the following Monday. Orders made in the week after 1pm EST time are being shipped on the next day. When ordering on a public Holiday your order will be prepared and dispatched on the next working day.

Which carrier are you using?

chevronBottom

Depending on the region you are in your order will be shipped with FEDEX.

Can I pay on delivery?

chevronBottom

No, unfortunately it is not possible to pay on delivery.  

Can I pay later?
Do you allow short-term late payments?
Can I receive the invoice and pay within a few days?
Can I delay my payment by a few days?
Do you offer a payment window after ordering?

chevronBottom

You can select the payment method afterpay or Klarna pay later at checkout, these payment options gives you the possibility to pay your order later, through the Klarna or afterpay platform.

I can’t log into my account. What should I do?

chevronBottom

Did you try to reset your password? If this didn’t work, please contact our team via E-mail.

Do I need an account to order?

chevronBottom

No, you do not need to create an account to order. You can order as a guess on our website.

I can’t create an account. What should I do?

chevronBottom

Please contact our team per E-mail they will assist you as soon as possible.

What payment methods does EPODEX accept?

chevronBottom

We offer several secure and convenient payment methods:
✅ Credit Card (MasterCard, Visa, Amex, Maestro, etc.) – Payments are securely processed via Stripe, with no additional fees. Your card will be charged immediately upon order completion.
✅ PayPal – Fast and secure payment method. You’ll be redirected to PayPal at checkout to complete the payment, allowing for quicker order processing.
✅ Amazon Pay – Use your existing Amazon account to complete your purchase easily with your saved payment and delivery details.
✅ Klarna Slice it – offers the possibility to  can cut up the amount due in installments and pay it off in anywhere between 3 to 36 months, with interest or without.
✅ Apply Pay – Our system automatically detects whether your customer is paying from an Apple device. Only then will Apple Pay be offered as a payment method. 
✅ Klarna Pay Later – Monthly financing through Klarna issued by WebBank. Other CA resident loans made or arranged pursuant to a California Financing Law license.

✅ After Pay – Afterpay is a ‘buy now, pay later (BNPL) platform that makes it possible to buy something now, receive your goods, and pay them off later in fortnightly installments. While you may get the instant gratification of your purchase, you’ll need to commit to making four fortnightly payments over eight weeks.

Does EPODEX offer paying cash on delivery?

chevronBottom

❌ No, we do not offer cash on delivery. All orders must be paid in advance before shipping.

How much does this cost?
Can you tell me the price?
What’s the cost of EPODEX?

chevronBottom

The price depends on the quantity you need. Please visit the product page, select the amount you require, and the price will be displayed automatically.
Would you like help calculating how much product you need? Contact our team! They are here to assist.

Do you collaborate with others or offer partnerships?

chevronBottom

Our marketing team reviews partnership and collaboration inquiries individually. We kindly ask that you send us an email with details about your project and your expectations for the collaboration.

Do you deliver to  PO boxes?

chevronBottom

We do not deliver to PU boxes.

I would like the technical and safety data sheets for a product. Where can I find them?

chevronBottom

You can request the technical and safety data sheets by emailing our support team. We will send you the PDF as soon as possible.

I would like to place an order, but I can't add the item to the cart.

chevronBottom

If you're unable to add an item to your cart, this may be due to several reasons:
-    The color has not been selected. For epoxy resins, you can choose either "transparent colorless" or a specific color.
-    The quantity has not been selected. You need to choose the quantity of product you want before adding it to the cart. Different quantity options are available, either by weight or by surface area (sqft).
-    The required options have not been filled in. Even if you do not want an accessory kit or a finish, you must indicate this in order to add the product to your cart.
-    The product is not available. 
If none of these solutions help, please send us an email with a screenshot so we can contact our IT team and resolve the issue as quickly as possible.

Do you have instructions for use with pictures?

chevronBottom

You can find small icones on each bottles explaining how to mix. We don't have any instructions for use with pictures on the website but we do have video tutorials for each product.

Do your product bottles have an expiration date?

chevronBottom

No, we don’t have an expiration date on the bottles. All our products are filled on demand, and we don’t store anything for long periods. This ensures that the product you receive is always fresh. 

Could you send a technician on-site to advise us on how to improve the results?
Would it be possible to have a technician visit our site to provide guidance on improving the outcome?
Can you arrange for a professional to come on-site and help us optimize the results?

chevronBottom

Unfortunately, we do not have technicians available to visit job sites.
However, if you encounter a problem and need a solution for your project, please contact us directly by email and include photos of the results so that we can provide you with the best possible solution.

Where can I find the TDS or SDS? Where can I get instructions for use per PDF?

chevronBottom

We kindly, ask that you request the TDS or SDS per Email. 

Do you offer training courses?

chevronBottom

No, we do not offer any training courses.

Do I need a training course to use your products?

chevronBottom

No, you do not need a training course to use our product.

I received the wrong product what should I do?

chevronBottom

If you received the wrong product, we kindly ask that you send us an email with your name, order number and pictures of the wrong goods. If possible please, let us know what is missing in your order.

Can I change my delivery address once the order is placed?

chevronBottom

To modify or add information for the carrier once your order was placed, we kindly ask that you contact us per Email with the complete address and your order number.

Can I use your individual component to mix it with the rest of resin or hardener from another brand?

chevronBottom

No, we do not recommend using our individual components to mix it with components from another brand.

I’m missing products in my order; what should I do?

chevronBottom

We kindly ask that you contact us per E-Mail with your order number stating which article is missing, so that our team can take care of the reshipment as quickly as possible.

Can you help me find an old order; it’s not showing on my order history?

chevronBottom

Please send us via E-Mail all relevant information about your old order not showing up on your order history and our team will send you the details as quickly as possible.

What is the date on the bottles?

chevronBottom

The term F/BVT with a date in engraved in the bottle and represents the bottle’s manufacturer mold or production code, it has nothing to do with the content of the bottle. 

Do you offer training courses?

chevronBottom

We do not offer training courses at the moment. 

What is the address to return my order?

chevronBottom

To return goods, please contact us per E-mail.

Where is my order?

chevronBottom

It is possible to track your order and check up its status, on our website.

Where can i find an installer?

chevronBottom

We are working closely with many installers, we kindly ask that you send us an email to service@epodex.com with a description of your project and your address, so that we can check the availability of an installer in your area.

Customer Support

What does the EPODEX satisfaction guarantee mean?

chevronBottom

We want you to be completely satisfied with our service and products. If you are dissatisfied our satisfaction guarantee will help you. We offer a 30-day return policy, which means you have 30 days after receiving your item to request a return. To start a return, you can contact us at service@epodex.com. Please inspect your order upon delivery and contact us immediately if an item is defective, damaged or if you receive the wrong products so that we can evaluate and resolve the issue promptly. Our friendly 24h-Support team is always happy to assist!

What does the EPODEX Money-Back-Guarantee mean?

chevronBottom

We are 100% confident in what our products can offer, and we want you to be too! Test a small amount of your order and experience the quality for yourself. If you are not satisfied return your order and we will refund the purchase price.

Payments

chevronBottom

If an order is confirmed yet not processed, we are able to cancel the order. Please reach out to us ASAP by email at service@epodex.com as orders are processed within 1 to 2 business days. If the order has completed processing, we are no longer able to cancel it. Please then follow our return policy.

Shipping & Tracking

chevronBottom

The dispatch of your order takes place via FedEx. Once your order is shipped, you will receive a shipping confirmation email with a link to the parcel tracking information. The shipping costs are based on the total price of the order placed. Shipping within the contiguous USA is free for all orders over $50.00. Orders under $49.99 are charged a flat rate of $7.99. We are currently not shipping to Alaska, Hawaii, and Puerto Rico. Your order will be processed and prepared for standard shipping with FedEx on receipt of payment. We offer same-day shipping for instant payments. Typical delivery times are 1-3 business days.

Contact Us

chevronBottom

If you have any questions about the processing and delivery of your order or about our products, please contact our service team immediately so that we can find a solution together. Your satisfaction is our number one priority!

Damages

chevronBottom

If your parcel or the products inside the parcel are damaged, please contact our service team right away to provide you with a solution. Damages must be reported within 7 days of the marked delivery date.

Cancellations

chevronBottom

If an order is confirmed yet not processed, we are able to cancel the order. Please reach out to us ASAP by email at service@epodex.com as orders are processed within 1 to 2 business days. If the order has completed processing, we are no longer able to cancel it. Please then follow our return policy.

Returns

chevronBottom

We offer a 30-day return policy, which means you have 30 days after receiving your item to request a return. To be eligible for a return, your item must be in the same condition that you received it, unworn or unused, with tags, and in its original packaging. You’ll also need the receipt or proof of purchase.
To start a return, contact us at service@epodex.com. Items sent back to us without first requesting a return will not be accepted.

Refunds

chevronBottom

We will notify you once we’ve received and inspected your return, and let you know if the refund was approved or not. If approved, you’ll be automatically refunded on your original payment method within 14 days. You will only be refunded the values of the goods; delivery fees will not be refunded. Please remember it can take some time for your bank or credit card company to process and post the refund too. Please note that EPODEX is not responsible for return shipping fees, the cost of the return is at your expense. Any loss of value of the goods will also be at your expense.

Epoxy Resin 101

What is Epoxy Resin?

chevronBottom

It is a liquid plastic that becomes solid when resin and hardener are mixed. It can be colored and molded into any desired shape. Epoxy resin grades differ in terms of the maximum possible pouring height per casting operation as well as the additives they contain.

What is Epoxy Resin used for?

chevronBottom

The most popular applications are epoxy floors for interior and exterior use. It’s also popular in industrial warehouses and stores.

You can also use it for coating tables, countertops, and other furniture as well as boat building, mold making, and all repairs. It is also suitable for art and jewelry.

Why choose EPODEX Epoxy Resin?

chevronBottom

We offer the largest and most diverse quantity selection of epoxy across the USA. Our epoxy is bubble-free, ultra-clear, and has the best UV stabilization. It is VOC-, BPA- and solvent-free. Easy to use and allows for castings of up to 12".

Choose from a variety of colors  - by far the biggest selection across the USA. Customer satisfaction and the overall shipping experience are our number one priority which is why we offer extremely attractive kit prices. With precise purchasing, you only need to purchase what you need. The more your order the bigger the savings! We provide enough colorant to dye the quantity purchased. Don't stress how much you need. We've got you covered! Our epoxy colorants feature live videos where the colorant is mixed in with our epoxy leaving no room for surprises! Watch our for professional easy to follow step-by-step tutorials and complete the epoxy project you've always dreamed of!

What can be used to polish Epoxy Resin?

chevronBottom

To polish epoxy resin surfaces, it is best to use a special polish such as the EPODEX POLISH. This contains ultra-fine abrasive particles that give the surface a glossy shine.

What is the mixing ratio?

chevronBottom

The mixing ratio for our kits is 2:1 (e.g., 64oz resin: 32oz hardener). We recommend using a scale for precise accuracy.

Always transfer your resin and hardener mixture to a clean mixing cup and mix again until the mixture is streak-free to ensure both components are completely mixed together.

Is the epoxy food safe?

chevronBottom
The epoxy resin is not hazardous to one´s health after complete chemical curing has occurred. Please note that cuts in the epoxy resin can leave residues on the cutlery. Our epoxy resins are resistant to most chemicals and acids (also present in food). Nevertheless, it may be that components of the cured material, which should not be consumed, are dissolved by acids or the like.

How can I protect the epoxy from scratches?

chevronBottom
Our epoxy resin kits are scratch-resistant but to increase the resistance to an even higher level we recommend applying a PU (polyurethane) varnish to the surface once the epoxy has fully chemically cured.

How can I increase the slip resistance of epoxy for floors?

chevronBottom
Our Flooring Kits are slip-resistant however to increase the resistance to an even higher level we recommend adding Micro Glass Beads to the epoxy mixture. This product can be found under the Accessories tab and creates a more abrasive surface.

Is epoxy resistant to chemicals, acids, gasoline, oil, etc.?

chevronBottom

Yes, all epoxy resins once fully chemically cured are waterproof and chemically resistant.

When does Epoxy Resin turn yellow?

chevronBottom

Products formulated without the addition of UV stabilizers will turn yellow over time. The world's clearest epoxy resin grades currently on the market are EPODEX PRO and PRO+.

How do I get the surface of the epoxy resin matt?

chevronBottom

Sand with a grit between 800 and 2000.

What is the heat resistance of the epoxy?

chevronBottom

All our kits have a maximum heat-resistance temperature of 140°F. Higher temperature resistance can only be achieved by annealing, which means that you place the castings in the oven starting at 140°F and increase the temperature accordingly at intervals. In this way, you achieve a higher heat resistance.

How do I make the patterns with the metallic & mica pigments no longer sink?

chevronBottom

If you work with metallic & mica powders and want to draw patterns, it is very important that you control the gelling time so that the drawn patterns and powders do not sink as metallic & mica powders are heavier than the resin and hardener mixture. The gelling time depends on the three factors (reactivity, casting volume, temperature) as well as how much time the mixture spends inside the mixing jug. 

If you work with the Coating & Sealing Kit or the Art Resin & Crafting Kit the gelling time is usually within the first two hours after mixing, depending on the volume and temperature of the cast. The gelling time for the Deep Pour & Casting Kit is usually within the first 6 hours, again depending on the volume and temperature of the cast. We recommend drawing your patterns on a regular basis if the mixture can be processed. This way you will be sure to get the desired pattern.

Are the epoxy resin kits pre-colored or pre-mixed?

chevronBottom

Our epoxy resin kits are not pre-colored or pre-mixed. Our products are DIY and easy to use. Mixing instructions and our coloring guide can be found on each product page.

How long can the epoxy be stored?

chevronBottom

Unopened containers last 12 months and opened containers last 6 months. If the lid of the container is closed directly after opening, the shelf life after opening is at least 6 months.

How much color do I add to my epoxy mix?

chevronBottom

Powder pigments (Metallic, Neon, and Glow in the dark): 1g of pigment per 2oz of epoxy.70g (2.5oz) of pigment per gallon of epoxy
Transparent dyes (except white, black, and gray): 1g of dye per 17.5oz of epoxy. 7g (0.25oz) of dye per gallon of epoxy
Transparent white, black, and gray dyes: 1g of dye per 53oz of epoxy. 2.5g (0.1oz) of dye per gallon of epoxy
Semi-transparent dyes (except white): 1g of the desired dye and 0.5g of white dye per 26.5oz of epoxy. 5g (0.2oz) of the desired dye and 2.5g (0.1oz) of white dye per gallon of epoxy
Semi-transparent white: 1g of dye per 17.5oz of epoxy. 7g (0.25oz) of dye per gallon of epoxy
Solid color: 1g of dye per 3oz of epoxy. 40g (1.5oz) of dye per gallon of epoxy)
Glitter pigments/flakes: 1g of dye per 3oz of epoxy. 40g (1.5oz) of dye per gallon of epoxy

Troubleshooting

Why is my epoxy sticky and tacky?

chevronBottom

If your epoxy resin hasn't cured properly, it means that the chemical reaction between the resin and hardener did not take place. Sticky resin is typically caused by inaccurate measuring, under mixing, or working in cold temperatures. Move your project to a warmer spot. If it does not harden, then remove the resin and pour a fresh new layer.

Why does my epoxy not harden?

chevronBottom

If liquid resin does not cure, this can be caused by several reasons. In most cases, it is due to an incorrect mixing ratio. The material does not cure if there is no or insufficient cross-linking between resin molecules and hardener amines.

Likewise, excessive humidity or contamination with other substances can cause the chemical reaction to subsequently fail. Please follow our instructions for use carefully and always remember to transfer your mixture to a clean mixing jug and remix before applying to your surface. This ensures the components are properly mixed together.

How can I remove bubbles from the uncured material? What can I do about bubbles in the cured material?

chevronBottom

If the material has not yet hardened, adding heat is beneficial as it will cause the bubbles to rise to the surface. You can therefore use a hair dryer or heat torch, for example, and apply heat to your epoxy resin project at a slight distance. If the resin has already cured, the bubbles can no longer be removed.

Can I remove uncured epoxy if mixed incorrectly? If so, how?

chevronBottom

Removing the uncured epoxy is essential. Use a putty knife to scrape it off. Any leftover residue can be removed by sanding or using Denatured Alcohol.

What are the white spots and streaks in and on the epoxy layer I´ve applied?

chevronBottom

This is called amine blush. It forms when moisture encounters uncured material. You can easily sand it down and then polish the resin back up. To bring your surface to a high gloss, use our sandpaper, found under the equipment tab. Start with a grit of P100 and gradually sand up to a P3,000 grit. If you wish, you can also sand up to a P10,000 grit until you have achieved the desired effect. Finally, polish your surface with EPODEX resin polish found under the equipment tab.

Why does my surface become "cloudy" after using the polish?

chevronBottom

This is caused by poor inadequate sanding techniques. If the surface is not smooth, the polish will settle in the sanded layer causing the cloudiness.

Do I need to sand in between layers? Is there a minimum and maximum time limit to further cast?

chevronBottom

Sanding between layers is optional.

The minimum time limit to further cast for each kit is as follows:
Coating & Sealing Kit: 6 hours at 70°F
Art Resin & Crafting Kit: 12 hours at 70°F
Deep Pour & Casting Kit: 72 hours at 70°F

There is no maximum time limit to further cast.

Can I simply empty out each jug received and mix the components together without weighing them out?

chevronBottom

No, the epoxy resin must be properly mixed in the correct ratio. A scale must also be used for precise accuracy. This is the key factor in generating great results. If the ratio is not precise the epoxy will not harden.

How do I mix Epoxy Resin?

chevronBottom

The best way to mix the resin and the hardener components is to use a stirring rod which is flat on the sides. This allows you to reach the material that sticks to the bottom and sides when stirring.

Why is my Epoxy Resin A component lumpy, thick, and icy?

chevronBottom

Crystallization is the natural solid state of a product and resins, and hardeners can all experience crystallization. It primarily occurs with two-component systems and crystallization does not mean you have defective material. Crystallization occurs when the A component is exposed to extremely cold temperatures.

How to de-crystallize?
Always check for crystallization in your Resin A-component before you begin working. It is possible that when the Resin A-component is first opened there are no signs of crystallization. To check simply, pour a little resin A-component into a mixing cup.

1. If detected, place the containers in a water bath with boiling water (100°C) with the lids on. Container sizes will affect the length of time needed for de-crystallization. We recommend turning the sealed A-components in the boiling water every 2 minutes until every side has been heated.
2. Stir resin including container sides and bottom thoroughly to ensure all crystals have been melted and that heat has been evenly distributed.
3. If crystals are still present continue the process until there is no evidence.
4. Let the epoxy cool down to room temperature and then proceed to use as normal.

(Note: The treatment with boiling temperatures doesn’t damage the epoxy or impact its properties. The Resin A-component will also not cure as it hasn’t been mixed with the Hardener B-component.

In the case of heavily crystallised epoxy, it can take up to 1 hour in boiling water to de-crystallize the A-component. Please contact us before using your epoxy if you have any doubt.